C8051F85x/86x
Low-Cost 8-bit MCU Family with up to 8 kB of Flash
Memory
- Up to 8 kB flash
- Flash is in-system programmable in 512-Byte sectors
- Up to 512 Bytes RAM (256 + 256)
On-Chip Debug
- On-chip debug circuitry facilitates full speed, non-intrusive in-
12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter
- Up to 16 input channels
- Up to 200 ksps 12-bit mode or 800 ksps 10-bit mode
- Internal VREF or external VREF supported
Timer/Counters and PWM
- 4 General-Purpose 16-bit Timer/Counters
- 16-bit Programmable Counter Array (PCA) with three channels
of PWM, capture/compare, or frequency output capability, and
hardware kill/safe state capability
Internal Low-Power Oscillator
- Calibrated to 24.5 MHz
- Low supply current
- ±2% accuracy over supply and temperature
Additional Support Peripherals
- Independent watchdog timer clocked from LFO
- 16-bit CRC engine
Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator
- 80 kHz nominal operation
- Low supply current
- Independent clock source for watchdog timer
Unique Identifier
- 32-bit unique key for each device
Supply Voltage
- 2.2 to 3.6 V
2 Analog Comparators
- Programmable hysteresis and response time
- Configurable as interrupt or reset source
- Low current
Package Options
- 16-pin SOIC
- 20-pin QFN, 3 x 3 mm
- 24-pin QSOP
- Available in die form
- Qualified to AEC-Q100 Standards
General-Purpose I/O
- Up to 18 pins
- 5 V-Tolerant
- Crossbar-enabled
Temperature Ranges:
- –40 to +125 °C (-Ix) and –40 to +85 °C (-Gx)
256-512 B RAM
Core LDO
CIP-51
(25 MHz)
Watchdog
UART
I2C / SMBus
Supply Monitor
16-bit CRC
4 x 16-bit Timers
24.5 MHz Low Power Oscillator
80 kHz Low Frequency Oscillator
External Clock (CMOS Input)
3-Channel PCA
Clock Selection
C2 Serial Debug / Programming
Clocking / Oscillators
SPI
Analog Peripherals
SAR ADC
(12-bit 200 ksps,10-bit 800 ksps)
Voltage Reference
2 x Low Current Comparators
Copyright © 2014 by Silicon Laboratories
18 Multi-Function 5V-Tolerant I/O Pins
2-8 kB Flash
Digital Peripherals
Priority Crossbar
Encoder
Core / Memory / Support
Rev. 1.0 2/14
Communication Peripherals
- UART
- I2C / SMBus™
- SPI™
Flexible Pin Muxing
-
system debug (no emulator required)
Provides breakpoints, single stepping, inspect/modify memory
and registers
High-Speed CIP-51 µC Core
- Efficient, pipelined instruction architecture
- Up to 25 MIPS throughput with 25 MHz clock
- Uses standard 8051 instruction set
- Expanded interrupt handler
C8051F85x/86x
C8051F85x-86x
Table of Contents
1. Electrical Specifications............................................................................................ 8
1.1. Electrical Characteristics ..................................................................................... 8
1.2. Typical Performance Curves ............................................................................. 19
1.2.1. Operating Supply Current ......................................................................... 19
1.2.2. ADC Supply Current.................................................................................. 20
1.2.3. Port I/O Output Drive................................................................................. 21
1.3. Thermal Conditions ........................................................................................... 21
1.4. Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................... 22
2. System Overview ..................................................................................................... 23
2.1. Power ............................................................................................................ 25
2.1.1. LDO ....................................................................................................... 25
2.1.2. Voltage Supply Monitor (VMON0)............................................................. 25
2.1.3. Device Power Modes ................................................................................ 25
2.2. I/O
............................................................................................................ 26
2.2.1. General Features ...................................................................................... 26
2.2.2. Crossbar.................................................................................................... 26
2.3. Clocking ............................................................................................................ 27
2.4. Counters/Timers and PWM ............................................................................... 27
2.4.1. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) ...................................................... 27
2.4.2. Timers (Timer 0, Timer 1, Timer 2 and Timer 3) ....................................... 27
2.4.3. Watchdog Timer (WDT0) .......................................................................... 27
2.5. Communications and other Digital Peripherals ................................................. 28
2.5.1. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0).......................... 28
2.5.2. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) ............................................................. 28
2.5.3. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0) ............................................... 28
2.5.4. 16/32-bit CRC (CRC0) .............................................................................. 28
2.6. Analog Peripherals ............................................................................................ 30
2.6.1. 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0) ............................................... 30
2.6.2. Low Current Comparators (CMP0, CMP1) ............................................... 30
2.7. Reset Sources ................................................................................................... 31
2.8. On-Chip Debugging........................................................................................... 31
3. Pin Definitions.......................................................................................................... 32
3.1. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QSOP24 Pin Definitions ................................................. 32
3.2. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QFN20 Pin Definitions .................................................... 36
3.3. C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5 SOIC16 Pin Definitions ................................................... 39
4. Ordering Information ............................................................................................... 42
5. QSOP-24 Package Specifications .......................................................................... 45
6. QFN-20 Package Specifications ............................................................................. 47
7. SOIC-16 Package Specifications ............................................................................ 50
8. Memory Organization .............................................................................................. 52
8.1. Program Memory............................................................................................... 53
8.1.1. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory .................................................. 53
8.2. Data Memory ..................................................................................................... 53
2
Rev. 1.0
C8051F85x-86x
8.2.1. Internal RAM ............................................................................................. 53
8.2.2. External RAM ............................................................................................ 54
8.2.3. Special Function Registers ....................................................................... 55
9. Special Function Register Memory Map................................................................ 56
10. Flash Memory......................................................................................................... 61
10.1. Security Options .............................................................................................. 61
10.2. Programming the Flash Memory ..................................................................... 63
10.2.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions ................................................................ 63
10.2.2. Flash Erase Procedure ........................................................................... 63
10.2.3. Flash Write Procedure ............................................................................ 63
10.3. Non-Volatile Data Storage............................................................................... 64
10.4. Flash Write and Erase Guidelines ................................................................... 64
10.4.1. Voltage Supply Maintenance and the Supply Monitor ............................ 64
10.4.2. PSWE Maintenance ................................................................................ 65
10.4.3. System Clock .......................................................................................... 65
10.5. Flash Control Registers ................................................................................... 66
11. Device Identification and Unique Identifier ......................................................... 68
11.1. Device Identification Registers ........................................................................ 69
12. Interrupts ................................................................................................................ 72
12.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors................................................................ 72
12.1.1. Interrupt Priorities.................................................................................... 72
12.1.2. Interrupt Latency ..................................................................................... 72
12.2. Interrupt Control Registers .............................................................................. 75
13. Power Management and Internal Regulator ........................................................ 82
13.1. Power Modes................................................................................................... 82
13.1.1. Idle Mode ................................................................................................ 82
13.1.2. Stop Mode............................................................................................... 83
13.2. LDO Regulator................................................................................................. 83
13.3. Power Control Registers.................................................................................. 83
13.4. LDO Control Registers .................................................................................... 84
14. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)..................................................................... 85
14.1. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer ................................................................................ 86
14.2. ADC Operation ................................................................................................ 88
14.2.1. Starting a Conversion.............................................................................. 88
14.2.2. Tracking Modes....................................................................................... 88
14.2.3. Burst Mode.............................................................................................. 89
14.2.4. Settling Time Requirements.................................................................... 90
14.2.5. Gain Setting ............................................................................................ 91
14.3. 8-Bit Mode ....................................................................................................... 91
14.4. 12-Bit Mode ..................................................................................................... 91
14.5. Power Considerations ..................................................................................... 92
14.6. Output Code Formatting .................................................................................. 94
14.7. Programmable Window Detector..................................................................... 95
14.7.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode ................................................ 95
14.8. Voltage and Ground Reference Options ......................................................... 97
Rev. 1.0
3
C8051F85x-86x
14.8.1. External Voltage Reference .................................................................... 97
14.8.2. Internal Voltage Reference ..................................................................... 97
14.8.3. Analog Ground Reference ...................................................................... 97
14.9. Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 98
14.9.1. Calibration ............................................................................................... 98
14.10. ADC Control Registers .................................................................................. 99
15. CIP-51 Microcontroller Core ............................................................................... 113
15.1. Performance .................................................................................................. 113
15.2. Programming and Debugging Support .......................................................... 114
15.3. Instruction Set................................................................................................ 114
15.3.1. Instruction and CPU Timing .................................................................. 114
15.4. CPU Core Registers ...................................................................................... 119
16. Clock Sources and Selection (HFOSC0, LFOSC0, and EXTCLK).................... 125
16.1. Programmable High-Frequency Oscillator .................................................... 125
16.2. Programmable Low-Frequency Oscillator ..................................................... 125
16.2.1. Calibrating the Internal L-F Oscillator.................................................... 125
16.3. External Clock ............................................................................................... 126
16.4. Clock Selection.............................................................................................. 126
16.5. High Frequency Oscillator Control Registers ................................................ 127
16.6. Low Frequency Oscillator Control Registers ................................................. 128
16.7. Clock Selection Control Registers ................................................................. 129
17. Comparators (CMP0 and CMP1)......................................................................... 130
17.1. System Connectivity ...................................................................................... 130
17.2. Functional Description ................................................................................... 133
17.3. Comparator Control Registers....................................................................... 134
18. Cyclic Redundancy Check Unit (CRC0)............................................................. 140
18.1. CRC Algorithm............................................................................................... 140
18.2. Preparing for a CRC Calculation ................................................................... 142
18.3. Performing a CRC Calculation ...................................................................... 142
18.4. Accessing the CRC0 Result .......................................................................... 142
18.5. CRC0 Bit Reverse Feature............................................................................ 142
18.6. CRC Control Registers .................................................................................. 143
19. External Interrupts (INT0 and INT1).................................................................... 149
19.1. External Interrupt Control Registers .............................................................. 150
20. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0)................................................................ 152
20.1. PCA Counter/Timer ....................................................................................... 153
20.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources................................................................................. 153
20.3. Capture/Compare Modules ........................................................................... 154
20.3.1. Output Polarity ...................................................................................... 154
20.3.2. Edge-Triggered Capture Mode ............................................................. 155
20.3.3. Software Timer (Compare) Mode.......................................................... 156
20.3.4. High-Speed Output Mode ..................................................................... 157
20.3.5. Frequency Output Mode ....................................................................... 158
20.4. PWM Waveform Generation.......................................................................... 159
20.4.1. Edge Aligned PWM ............................................................................... 159
4
Rev. 1.0
C8051F85x-86x
20.4.2. Center Aligned PWM............................................................................. 161
20.4.3. 8 to11-bit Pulse Width Modulator Modes ............................................. 163
20.4.4. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode..................................................... 164
20.5. Comparator Clear Function ........................................................................... 165
20.6. PCA Control Registers .................................................................................. 167
21. Port I/O (Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Crossbar, and Port Match) .............................. 184
21.1. General Port I/O Initialization......................................................................... 185
21.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog and Digital Functions............................... 186
21.2.1. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog Functions ........................................ 186
21.2.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Digital Functions.......................................... 186
21.2.3. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Fixed Digital Functions................................ 187
21.3. Priority Crossbar Decoder ............................................................................. 188
21.4. Port I/O Modes of Operation.......................................................................... 191
21.4.1. Configuring Port Pins For Analog Modes.............................................. 191
21.4.2. Configuring Port Pins For Digital Modes ............................................... 191
21.4.3. Port Drive Strength................................................................................ 192
21.5. Port Match ..................................................................................................... 192
21.6. Direct Read/Write Access to Port I/O Pins .................................................... 192
21.7. Port I/O and Pin Configuration Control Registers.......................................... 193
22. Reset Sources and Supply Monitor ................................................................... 211
22.1. Power-On Reset ............................................................................................ 212
22.2. Power-Fail Reset / Supply Monitor ................................................................ 213
22.3. Enabling the VDD Monitor ............................................................................. 213
22.4. External Reset ............................................................................................... 214
22.5. Missing Clock Detector Reset ....................................................................... 214
22.6. Comparator0 Reset ....................................................................................... 214
22.7. Watchdog Timer Reset.................................................................................. 214
22.8. Flash Error Reset .......................................................................................... 214
22.9. Software Reset .............................................................................................. 214
22.10. Reset Sources Control Registers ................................................................ 215
22.11. Supply Monitor Control Registers................................................................ 216
23. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) ....................................................................... 217
23.1. Signal Descriptions........................................................................................ 218
23.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI)................................................................. 218
23.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO)................................................................. 218
23.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK) ................................................................................ 218
23.1.4. Slave Select (NSS) ............................................................................... 218
23.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation ........................................................................ 219
23.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation .......................................................................... 221
23.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources .................................................................................. 221
23.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity .................................................................... 221
23.6. SPI Special Function Registers ..................................................................... 223
23.7. SPI Control Registers .................................................................................... 227
24. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0) ......................................................... 233
24.1. Supporting Documents .................................................................................. 234
Rev. 1.0
5
C8051F85x-86x
24.2. SMBus Configuration..................................................................................... 234
24.3. SMBus Operation .......................................................................................... 234
24.3.1. Transmitter vs. Receiver ....................................................................... 235
24.3.2. Arbitration.............................................................................................. 235
24.3.3. Clock Low Extension............................................................................. 235
24.3.4. SCL Low Timeout.................................................................................. 235
24.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout ......................................................... 236
24.4. Using the SMBus........................................................................................... 236
24.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register.............................................................. 236
24.4.2. SMBus Pin Swap .................................................................................. 238
24.4.3. SMBus Timing Control .......................................................................... 238
24.4.4. SMB0CN Control Register .................................................................... 238
24.4.5. Hardware Slave Address Recognition .................................................. 240
24.4.6. Data Register ........................................................................................ 241
24.5. SMBus Transfer Modes................................................................................. 242
24.5.1. Write Sequence (Master) ...................................................................... 242
24.5.2. Read Sequence (Master) ...................................................................... 243
24.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave) ........................................................................ 244
24.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave) ........................................................................ 245
24.6. SMBus Status Decoding................................................................................ 245
24.7. I2C / SMBus Control Registers...................................................................... 251
25. Timers (Timer0, Timer1, Timer2 and Timer3) .................................................... 259
25.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1 ...................................................................................... 261
25.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer ............................................................... 262
25.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer ............................................................... 263
25.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload..................................... 264
25.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)................................ 265
25.2. Timer 2 and Timer 3 ...................................................................................... 266
25.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 266
25.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 267
25.2.3. Capture Mode ....................................................................................... 268
25.3. Timer Control Registers................................................................................. 269
26. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0) ................................ 289
26.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation.................................................................. 289
26.2. Operational Modes ........................................................................................ 291
26.2.1. 8-Bit UART ............................................................................................ 291
26.2.2. 9-Bit UART ............................................................................................ 292
26.3. Multiprocessor Communications ................................................................... 293
26.4. UART Control Registers ................................................................................ 295
27. Watchdog Timer (WDT0) ..................................................................................... 298
27.1. Enabling / Resetting the WDT ....................................................................... 299
27.2. Disabling the WDT......................................................................................... 299
27.3. Disabling the WDT Lockout ........................................................................... 299
27.4. Setting the WDT Interval ............................................................................... 299
27.5. Watchdog Timer Control Registers ............................................................... 300
6
Rev. 1.0
C8051F85x-86x
28. Revision-Specific Behavior................................................................................. 301
28.1. Revision Identification.................................................................................... 301
28.2. Temperature Sensor Offset and Slope.......................................................... 303
28.3. Flash Endurance ........................................................................................... 303
28.4. Latch-Up Performance .................................................................................. 303
28.5. Unique Identifier ............................................................................................ 303
29. C2 Interface .......................................................................................................... 304
29.1. C2 Pin Sharing .............................................................................................. 304
29.2. C2 Interface Registers................................................................................... 305
Document Change List.............................................................................................. 310
Contact Information................................................................................................... 311
Rev. 1.0
7
1. Electrical Specifications
1.1. Electrical Characteristics
All electrical parameters in all tables are specified under the conditions listed in Table 1.1, unless stated
otherwise.
Table 1.1. Recommended Operating Conditions
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VDD
2.2
—
3.6
V
fSYSCLK
0
—
25
MHz
Commercial Grade Devices
(-GM, -GS, -GU)
–40
—
85
°C
Industrial Grade Devices
(-IM, -IS, -IU)
–40
—
125
°C
Operating Supply Voltage on VDD
System Clock Frequency
Operating Ambient Temperature
TA
Test Condition
Note: All voltages with respect to GND
Table 1.2. Power Consumption
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
FSYSCLK = 24.5 MHz2
—
4.45
4.85
mA
2
—
915
1150
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz3, TA = 25 °C
—
250
290
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz3
—
250
380
A
FSYSCLK = 24.5 MHz2
—
2.05
2.3
mA
2
—
550
700
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz3, TA = 25 °C
—
125
130
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz3
—
125
200
A
Internal LDO ON, TA = 25 °C
—
105
120
A
Internal LDO ON
—
105
170
A
Internal LDO OFF
—
0.2
—
A
Digital Core Supply Current (–Gx Devices, -40°C to +85°C)
Normal Mode—Full speed
with code executing from flash
Idle Mode—Core halted with
peripherals running
Stop Mode—Core halted and
all clocks stopped, Supply
monitor off.
IDD
FSYSCLK = 1.53 MHz
IDD
FSYSCLK = 1.53 MHz
IDD
Notes:
1. Currents are additive. For example, where IDD is specified and the mode is not mutually exclusive, enabling the
functions increases supply current by the specified amount.
2. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and High Frequency Oscillator.
3. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and Low Frequency Oscillator.
4. ADC0 always-on power excludes internal reference supply current.
5. The internal reference is enabled as-needed when operating the ADC in burst mode to save power.
8
Rev. 1.0
Table 1.2. Power Consumption (Continued)
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
FSYSCLK = 24.5 MHz2
—
4.45
5.25
mA
FSYSCLK = 1.53 MHz2
—
915
1600
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz , TA = 25 °C
—
250
290
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz3
—
250
725
A
FSYSCLK = 24.5 MHz2
—
2.05
2.6
mA
FSYSCLK = 1.53 MHz2
—
550
1000
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz , TA = 25 °C
—
125
130
A
FSYSCLK = 80 kHz3
—
125
550
A
Internal LDO ON, TA = 25 °C
—
105
120
A
Internal LDO ON
—
105
270
A
Internal LDO OFF
—
0.2
—
A
Digital Core Supply Current (–Ix Devices, -40°C to +125°C)
Normal Mode—Full speed
with code executing from flash
IDD
3
Idle Mode—Core halted with
peripherals running
IDD
3
Stop Mode—Core halted and
all clocks stopped, Supply
monitor off.
IDD
Analog Peripheral Supply Currents (Both –Gx and –Ix Devices)
High-Frequency Oscillator
IHFOSC
Operating at 24.5 MHz,
TA = 25 °C
—
155
—
µA
Low-Frequency Oscillator
ILFOSC
Operating at 80 kHz,
TA = 25 °C
—
3.5
—
µA
IADC
800 ksps, 10-bit conversions or
200 ksps, 12-bit conversions
Normal bias settings
VDD = 3.0 V
—
845
1200
µA
250 ksps, 10-bit conversions or
62.5 ksps 12-bit conversions
Low power bias settings
VDD = 3.0 V
—
425
580
µA
200 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
370
—
µA
100 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
185
—
µA
10 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
19
—
µA
ADC0 Always-on4
ADC0 Burst Mode, 10-bit single conversions, external reference
IADC
Notes:
1. Currents are additive. For example, where IDD is specified and the mode is not mutually exclusive, enabling the
functions increases supply current by the specified amount.
2. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and High Frequency Oscillator.
3. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and Low Frequency Oscillator.
4. ADC0 always-on power excludes internal reference supply current.
5. The internal reference is enabled as-needed when operating the ADC in burst mode to save power.
Rev. 1.0
9
Table 1.2. Power Consumption (Continued)
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
ADC0 Burst Mode, 10-bit single conversions, internal reference, Low power bias
settings
IADC
200 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
490
—
µA
100 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
245
—
µA
10 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
23
—
µA
ADC0 Burst Mode, 12-bit single conversions, external reference
IADC
100 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
530
—
µA
50 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
265
—
µA
10 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V
—
53
—
µA
100 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V,
Normal bias
—
950
—
µA
50 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V,
Low power bias
—
420
—
µA
10 ksps, VDD = 3.0 V,
Low power bias
—
85
—
µA
Normal Power Mode
—
680
790
µA
Low Power Mode
—
160
210
µA
—
75
120
µA
CPnMD = 11
—
0.5
—
µA
CPnMD = 10
—
3
—
µA
CPnMD = 01
—
10
—
µA
CPnMD = 00
—
25
—
µA
—
15
20
µA
ADC0 Burst Mode, 12-bit single conversions, internal reference
Internal ADC0 Reference,
Always-on5
Temperature Sensor
Comparator 0 (CMP0),
Comparator 1 (CMP1)
Voltage Supply Monitor
(VMON0)
IADC
IIREF
ITSENSE
ICMP
IVMON
Notes:
1. Currents are additive. For example, where IDD is specified and the mode is not mutually exclusive, enabling the
functions increases supply current by the specified amount.
2. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and High Frequency Oscillator.
3. Includes supply current from internal regulator, supply monitor, and Low Frequency Oscillator.
4. ADC0 always-on power excludes internal reference supply current.
5. The internal reference is enabled as-needed when operating the ADC in burst mode to save power.
10
Rev. 1.0
Table 1.3. Reset and Supply Monitor
Parameter
VDD Supply Monitor Threshold
Power-On Reset (POR) Threshold
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1.85
1.95
2.1
V
Rising Voltage on VDD
—
1.4
—
V
Falling Voltage on VDD
0.75
—
1.36
V
VVDDM
VPOR
VDD Ramp Time
tRMP
Time to VDD > 2.2 V
10
—
—
µs
Reset Delay from POR
tPOR
Relative to VDD >
VPOR
3
10
31
ms
Reset Delay from non-POR source
tRST
Time between release
of reset source and
code execution
—
39
—
µs
RST Low Time to Generate Reset
tRSTL
15
—
—
µs
Missing Clock Detector Response
Time (final rising edge to reset)
tMCD
—
0.625
1.2
ms
Missing Clock Detector Trigger
Frequency
FMCD
—
7.5
13.5
kHz
VDD Supply Monitor Turn-On Time
tMON
—
2
—
µs
FSYSCLK > 1 MHz
Table 1.4. Flash Memory
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Units
tWRITE
One Byte,
FSYSCLK = 24.5 MHz
19
20
21
µs
Erase Time1,2
tERASE
One Page,
FSYSCLK = 24.5 MHz
5.2
5.35
5.5
ms
VDD Voltage During Programming3
VPROG
2.2
—
3.6
V
NWE
20k
100k
—
Cycles
Write Time
1,2
Endurance (Write/Erase Cycles)
Notes:
1. Does not include sequencing time before and after the write/erase operation, which may be multiple SYSCLK cycles.
2. The internal High-Frequency Oscillator has a programmable output frequency using the OSCICL register, which is
factory programmed to 24.5 MHz. If user firmware adjusts the oscillator speed, it must be between 22 and 25 MHz
during any flash write or erase operation. It is recommended to write the OSCICL register back to its reset value when
writing or erasing flash.
3. Flash can be safely programmed at any voltage above the supply monitor threshold (VVDDM).
4. Data Retention Information is published in the Quarterly Quality and Reliability Report.
Rev. 1.0
11
Table 1.5. Internal Oscillators
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
fHFOSC
Full Temperature and
Supply Range
24
24.5
25
MHz
Power Supply Sensitivity
PSSHFOSC
TA = 25 °C
—
0.5
—
%/V
Temperature Sensitivity
TSHFOSC
VDD = 3.0 V
—
40
—
ppm/°C
fLFOSC
Full Temperature and
Supply Range
75
80
85
kHz
Power Supply Sensitivity
PSSLFOSC
TA = 25 °C
—
0.05
—
%/V
Temperature Sensitivity
TSLFOSC
VDD = 3.0 V
—
65
—
ppm/°C
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
High Frequency Oscillator (24.5 MHz)
Oscillator Frequency
Low Frequency Oscillator (80 kHz)
Oscillator Frequency
Table 1.6. External Clock Input
Parameter
Symbol
External Input CMOS Clock
Frequency (at EXTCLK pin)
fCMOS
0
—
25
MHz
External Input CMOS Clock High Time
tCMOSH
18
—
—
ns
External Input CMOS Clock Low Time
tCMOSL
18
—
—
ns
12
Rev. 1.0
Table 1.7. ADC
Parameter
Resolution
Symbol
Test Condition
Nbits
12 Bit Mode
12
Bits
10 Bit Mode
10
Bits
Throughput Rate
(High Speed Mode)
fS
Throughput Rate
(Low Power Mode)
fS
Tracking Time
tTRK
Power-On Time
tPWR
SAR Clock Frequency
fSAR
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
12 Bit Mode
—
—
200
ksps
10 Bit Mode
—
—
800
ksps
12 Bit Mode
—
—
62.5
ksps
10 Bit Mode
—
—
250
ksps
High Speed Mode
230
—
—
ns
Low Power Mode
450
—
—
ns
1.2
—
—
µs
High Speed Mode,
Reference is 2.4 V internal
—
—
6.25
MHz
High Speed Mode,
Reference is not 2.4 V internal
—
—
12.5
MHz
Low Power Mode
—
—
4
MHz
Conversion Time
tCNV
10-Bit Conversion,
SAR Clock = 12.25 MHz,
System Clock = 24.5 MHz.
1.1
µs
Sample/Hold Capacitor
CSAR
Gain = 1
—
5
—
pF
Gain = 0.5
—
2.5
—
pF
Input Pin Capacitance
CIN
—
20
—
pF
Input Mux Impedance
RMUX
—
550
—
Voltage Reference Range
VREF
1
—
VDD
V
Gain = 1
0
—
VREF
V
Gain = 0.5
0
—
2xVREF
V
—
70
—
dB
12 Bit Mode
—
±1
±2.3
LSB
10 Bit Mode
—
±0.2
±0.6
LSB
12 Bit Mode
–1
±0.7
1.9
LSB
10 Bit Mode
—
±0.2
±0.6
LSB
Input Voltage Range*
Power Supply Rejection
Ratio
VIN
PSRRADC
DC Performance
Integral Nonlinearity
Differential Nonlinearity
(Guaranteed Monotonic)
INL
DNL
*Note: Absolute input pin voltage is limited by the VDD supply.
Rev. 1.0
13
Table 1.7. ADC (Continued)
Parameter
Offset Error
Offset Temperature Coefficient
Slope Error
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
EOFF
12 Bit Mode, VREF = 1.65 V
–3
0
3
LSB
10 Bit Mode, VREF = 1.65 V
–2
0
2
LSB
—
0.004
—
LSB/°C
12 Bit Mode
—
±0.02
±0.1
%
10 Bit Mode
—
±0.06
±0.24
%
TCOFF
EM
Dynamic Performance 10 kHz Sine Wave Input 1dB below full scale, Max throughput, using AGND pin
Signal-to-Noise
Signal-to-Noise Plus Distortion
Total Harmonic Distortion
(Up to 5th Harmonic)
Spurious-Free Dynamic
Range
SNR
SNDR
THD
SFDR
12 Bit Mode
61
66
—
dB
10 Bit Mode
53
60
—
dB
12 Bit Mode
61
66
—
dB
10 Bit Mode
53
60
—
dB
12 Bit Mode
—
71
—
dB
10 Bit Mode
—
70
—
dB
12 Bit Mode
—
–79
—
dB
10 Bit Mode
—
–74
—
dB
*Note: Absolute input pin voltage is limited by the VDD supply.
14
Rev. 1.0
Table 1.8. Voltage Reference
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VREFFS
1.65 V Setting
1.62
1.65
1.68
V
2.4 V Setting, VDD > 2.6 V
2.35
2.4
2.45
V
TCREFFS
—
50
—
ppm/°C
tREFFS
—
—
1.5
µs
PSRRREFFS
—
400
—
ppm/V
—
5
—
µA
Internal Fast Settling Reference
Output Voltage
(Full Temperature and Supply
Range)
Temperature Coefficient
Turn-on Time
Power Supply Rejection
External Reference
Input Current
IEXTREF
Sample Rate = 800 ksps;
VREF = 3.0 V
Table 1.9. Temperature Sensor
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Offset
VOFF
TA = 0 °C
—
757
—
mV
Offset Error*
EOFF
TA = 0 °C
—
17
—
mV
Slope
M
—
2.85
—
mV/°C
Slope Error*
EM
—
70
—
µV/°C
Linearity
—
0.5
—
°C
Turn-on Time
—
1.8
—
µs
*Note: Represents one standard deviation from the mean.
Rev. 1.0
15
Table 1.10. Comparators
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Response Time, CPnMD = 00
(Highest Speed)
tRESP0
+100 mV Differential
—
100
—
ns
–100 mV Differential
—
150
—
ns
Response Time, CPnMD = 11
(Lowest Power)
tRESP3
+100 mV Differential
—
1.5
—
µs
–100 mV Differential
—
3.5
—
µs
CPnHYP = 00
—
0.4
—
mV
CPnHYP = 01
—
8
—
mV
CPnHYP = 10
—
16
—
mV
CPnHYP = 11
—
32
—
mV
CPnHYN = 00
—
-0.4
—
mV
CPnHYN = 01
—
–8
—
mV
CPnHYN = 10
—
–16
—
mV
CPnHYN = 11
—
–32
—
mV
CPnHYP = 00
—
0.5
—
mV
CPnHYP = 01
—
6
—
mV
CPnHYP = 10
—
12
—
mV
CPnHYP = 11
—
24
—
mV
CPnHYN = 00
—
-0.5
—
mV
CPnHYN = 01
—
–6
—
mV
CPnHYN = 10
—
–12
—
mV
CPnHYN = 11
—
–24
—
mV
CPnHYP = 00
—
0.7
—
mV
CPnHYP = 01
—
4.5
—
mV
CPnHYP = 10
—
9
—
mV
CPnHYP = 11
—
18
—
mV
CPnHYN = 00
—
-0.6
—
mV
CPnHYN = 01
—
–4.5
—
mV
CPnHYN = 10
—
–9
—
mV
CPnHYN = 11
—
–18
—
mV
Positive Hysterisis
Mode 0 (CPnMD = 00)
Negative Hysterisis
Mode 0 (CPnMD = 00)
Positive Hysterisis
Mode 1 (CPnMD = 01)
Negative Hysterisis
Mode 1 (CPnMD = 01)
Positive Hysterisis
Mode 2 (CPnMD = 10)
Negative Hysterisis
Mode 2 (CPnMD = 10)
16
HYSCP+
HYSCP-
HYSCP+
HYSCP-
HYSCP+
HYSCP-
Rev. 1.0
Table 1.10. Comparators
Parameter
Positive Hysteresis
Mode 3 (CPnMD = 11)
Negative Hysteresis
Mode 3 (CPnMD = 11)
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
HYSCP+
CPnHYP = 00
—
1.5
—
mV
CPnHYP = 01
—
4
—
mV
CPnHYP = 10
—
8
—
mV
CPnHYP = 11
—
16
—
mV
CPnHYN = 00
—
-1.5
—
mV
CPnHYN = 01
—
–4
—
mV
CPnHYN = 10
—
–8
—
mV
CPnHYN = 11
—
–16
—
mV
HYSCP-
Input Range (CP+ or CP–)
VIN
-0.25
—
VDD+0.25
V
Input Pin Capacitance
CCP
—
7.5
—
pF
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
CMRRCP
—
70
—
dB
Power Supply Rejection Ratio
PSRRCP
—
72
—
dB
-10
0
10
mV
—
3.5
—
µV/°C
Input Offset Voltage
VOFF
Input Offset Tempco
TCOFF
TA = 25 °C
Rev. 1.0
17
Table 1.11. Port I/O
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Output High Voltage (High Drive)
VOH
IOH = –3 mA
VDD – 0.7
—
—
V
Output Low Voltage (High Drive)
VOL
IOL = 8.5 mA
—
—
0.6
V
Output High Voltage (Low Drive)
VOH
IOH = –1 mA
VDD – 0.7
—
—
V
Output Low Voltage (Low Drive)
VOL
IOL = 1.4 mA
—
—
0.6
V
Input High Voltage
VIH
VDD – 0.6
—
—
V
Input Low Voltage
VIL
—
—
0.6
V
Pin Capacitance
CIO
—
7
—
pF
Weak Pull-Up Current
(VIN = 0 V)
IPU
VDD = 3.6
–30
–20
–10
µA
Input Leakage
(Pullups off or Analog)
ILK
GND < VIN < VDD
–1.1
—
1.1
µA
Input Leakage Current with VIN
above VDD
ILK
VDD < VIN < VDD+2.0 V
0
5
150
µA
18
Rev. 1.0
1.2. Typical Performance Curves
1.2.1. Operating Supply Current
5
NormalMode
4.5
IdleMode
SupplyCurrent(mA)
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
OperatingFrequency(MHz)
Figure 1.1. Typical Operating Current Running From 24.5 MHz Internal Oscillator
260
NormalMode
240
IdleMode
SupplyCurrent(μA)
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
OperatingFrequency(kHz)
Figure 1.2. Typical Operating Current Running From 80 kHz Internal Oscillator
Rev. 1.0
19
1.2.2. ADC Supply Current
10ͲbitBurstMode,SingleConversions
12ͲbitBurstMode,SingleConversions
1200
1200
InternalReference,NormalBias
1100
1000
InternalReference,LPBias
1000
OtherReference
900
OtherReference
900
SupplyCurrent(μA)
SupplyCurrent(μA)
InternalReference,NormalBias
1100
InternalReference,LPBias
800
700
600
500
400
800
700
600
500
400
300
300
200
200
100
100
0
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
0
20
SampleRate(ksps)
40
60
80
100
120
SampleRate(ksps)
Figure 1.3. Typical ADC and Internal Reference Power Consumption in Burst Mode
10ͲbitConversions,NormalBias
10ͲbitConversions,LowPowerBias
950
450
Vdd=3.6V
Vdd=3.0V
430
Vdd=2.2V
SupplyCurrent(μA)
SupplyCurrent(μA)
Vdd=3.6V
440
Vdd=3.0V
900
850
800
750
Vdd=2.2V
420
410
400
390
380
370
700
360
650
350
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
50
150
SampleRate(ksps)
12ͲbitConversions,NormalBias
12ͲbitConversions,LowPowerBias
950
450
Vdd=3.6V
Vdd=3.6V
440
Vdd=3.0V
900
Vdd=3.0V
430
Vdd=2.2V
SupplyCurrent(μA)
SupplyCurrent(μA)
250
SampleRate(ksps)
850
800
750
Vdd=2.2V
420
410
400
390
380
370
700
360
650
350
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
SampleRate(ksps)
10
20
30
40
SampleRate(ksps)
Figure 1.4. Typical ADC Power Consumption in Normal (Always-On) Mode
20
Rev. 1.0
50
60
1.2.3. Port I/O Output Drive
TypicalVOH vs.SourceCurrentinHighDriveMode
TypicalVOH vs.SourceCurrentinLowDriveMode
4
4
VDD=3.6V
3.5
VDD=3.6V
3.5
VDD=3.3V
VDD=2.7V
3
VDD=2.7V
3
VDD=2.2V
2.5
VDD=2.2V
2.5
VOH (V)
VOH (V)
VDD=3.3V
2
2
1.5
1.5
1
1
0.5
0.5
0
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
2
4
SourceCurrent(mA)
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
SourceCurrent(mA)
Figure 1.5. Typical VOH vs. Source Current
TypicalVOL vs.SinkCurrentinLowDriveMode
TypicalVOL vs.SinkCurrentinHighDriveMode
4
4
VDD=3.6V
VDD=3.6V
3.5
3.5
VDD=3.3V
3
3
VDD=2.2V
VDD=2.2V
2.5
VOL (V)
2.5
VOL (V)
VDD=3.3V
VDD=2.7V
VDD=2.7V
2
2
1.5
1.5
1
1
0.5
0.5
0
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
0
45
5
10
15
20
25
SinkCurrent(mA)
SinkCurrent(mA)
Figure 1.6. Typical VOL vs. Sink Current
1.3. Thermal Conditions
Table 1.12. Thermal Conditions
Parameter
Thermal Resistance*
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
JA
SOIC-16 Packages
—
70
—
°C/W
QFN-20 Packages
—
60
—
°C/W
QSOP-24 Packages
—
65
—
°C/W
*Note: Thermal resistance assumes a multi-layer PCB with any exposed pad soldered to a PCB pad.
Rev. 1.0
21
1.4. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Stresses above those listed under Table 1.13 may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress
rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions above those indicated
in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.
For more information on the available quality and reliability data, see the Quality and Reliability Monitor
Report at http://www.silabs.com/support/quality/pages/default.aspx.
Table 1.13. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit
Ambient Temperature Under
Bias
TBIAS
–55
125
°C
Storage Temperature
TSTG
–65
150
°C
Voltage on VDD
VDD
GND–0.3
4.2
V
Voltage on I/O pins or RST
VIN
VDD > 3.3 V
GND–0.3
5.8
V
VDD < 3.3 V
GND–0.3
VDD+2.5
V
Total Current Sunk into Supply
Pin
IVDD
—
400
mA
Total Current Sourced out of
Ground Pin
IGND
400
—
mA
Current Sourced or Sunk by Any
I/O Pin or RST
IPIO
-100
100
mA
Operating Junction Temperature
TJ
Commercial Grade Devices
(-GM, -GS, -GU)
–40
105
°C
Industrial Grade Devices
(-IM, -IS, -IU)
–40
125
°C
Note: Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
22
Rev. 1.0
2. System Overview
The C8051F85x/86x device family are fully integrated, mixed-signal system-on-a-chip MCUs. Highlighted
features are listed below. Refer to Table 4.1 for specific product feature selection and part ordering
numbers.
Core:
Pipelined
CIP-51 Core
compatible with standard 8051 instruction set
70% of instructions execute in 1-2 clock cycles
25 MHz maximum operating frequency
Fully
Memory:
2-8
512
kB flash; in-system programmable in 512-byte sectors
bytes RAM (including 256 bytes standard 8051 RAM and 256 bytes on-chip XRAM)
Power:
Internal
low drop-out (LDO) regulator for CPU core voltage
reset circuit and brownout detectors
Power-on
I/O:
Up to 18 total multifunction I/O pins:
All
pins 5 V tolerant under bias
peripheral crossbar for peripheral routing
5 mA source, 12.5 mA sink allows direct drive of LEDs
Flexible
Clock
Sources:
Low-power
internal oscillator: 24.5 MHz ±2%
internal oscillator: 80 kHz
External CMOS clock option
Low-frequency
Timers/Counters
3-channel
and PWM:
Programmable Counter Array (PCA) supporting PWM, capture/compare and frequency output
modes
16-bit general-purpose timers
Independent watchdog timer, clocked from low frequency oscillator
4x
Communications
and Other Digital Peripherals:
UART
SPI™
I
2
C / SMBus™
CRC Unit, supporting automatic CRC of flash at 256-byte boundaries
16-bit
Analog:
12-Bit
2
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
x Low-Current Comparators
On-Chip Debugging
With on-chip power-on reset, voltage supply monitor, watchdog timer, and clock oscillator, the C8051F85x/
86x devices are truly standalone system-on-a-chip solutions. The flash memory is reprogrammable incircuit, providing non-volatile data storage and allowing field upgrades of the firmware.
The on-chip debugging interface (C2) allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed, incircuit debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug logic supports
inspection and modification of memory and registers, setting breakpoints, single stepping, and run and halt
commands. All analog and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging.
Each device is specified for 2.2 to 3.6 V operation, and are available in 20-pin QFN, 16-pin SOIC or 24-pin
QSOP packages. All package options are lead-free and RoHS compliant. The device is available in two
temperature grades: -40 to +85 °C or –40 to +125 °C. See Table 4.1 for ordering information. A block
diagram is included in Figure 2.1.
Rev. 1.0
23
Power On
Reset
Reset
C2CK/RST
Debug /
Programming
Hardware
Port I/O Configuration
CIP-51 8051
Controller Core
Port 0
Drivers
P0.0/VREF
P0.1/AGND
P0.2
P0.3/EXTCLK
P0.4/TX
P0.5/RX
P0.6/CNVSTR
P0.7
Port 1
Drivers
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
Port 2
Driver
P2.0/C2D
P2.1
Digital Peripherals
8k Byte ISP Flash
Program Memory
UART
256 Byte SRAM
Timers 0,
1, 2, 3
Priority
Crossbar
Decoder
3-ch PCA
C2D
I2C /
SMBus
256 Byte XRAM
SPI
VDD
CRC
Power Net
Independent
Watchdog Timer
GND
SYSCLK
SFR
Bus
Analog Peripherals
Internal
Reference
24.5 MHz
2%
Oscillator
VDD
Low-Freq.
Oscillator
EXTCLK
Crossbar Control
12/10 bit
ADC
CMOS
Oscillator
Input
VREF
A
M
U
X
VDD
Temp
Sensor
+
-+
2 Comparators
System Clock
Configuration
Figure 2.1. C8051F85x/86x Family Block Diagram (QSOP-24 Shown)
24
Rev. 1.0
2.1. Power
2.1.1. LDO
The C8051F85x/86x devices include an internal regulator to regulate the supply voltage down the core
operating voltage of 1.8 V. This LDO consumes little power, but can be shut down in the power-saving Stop
mode.
2.1.2. Voltage Supply Monitor (VMON0)
The C8051F85x/86x devices include a voltage supply monitor which allows devices to function in known,
safe operating condition without the need for external hardware.
The supply monitor module includes the following features:
Holds
the device in reset if the main VDD supply drops below the VDD Reset threshold.
2.1.3. Device Power Modes
The C8051F85x/86x devices feature three low power modes in addition to normal operating mode,
allowing the designer to save power when the core is not in use. All power modes are detailed in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1. C8051F85x/86x Power Modes
Mode
Description
Normal
Core and peripherals operating
at full speed
Core
Idle
Mode Entrance
Mode Exit
Set IDLE bit in PCON
Any enabled interrupt or
reset source
Clear STOPCF in REG0MD
and
Set STOP bit in PCON
Device reset
Set STOPCF in REG0MD
and
Set STOP bit in PCON
Device reset
halted
Peripherals
operate at
full speed
All
Stop
clocks stopped
Core LDO and
(optionally)
comparators still
running
Pins retain state
All
Shutdown
clocks stopped
Core LDO and all
analog circuits shut
down
Pins retain state
In addition, the user may choose to lower the clock speed in Normal and Idle modes to save power when
the CPU requirements allow for lower speed.
Rev. 1.0
25
2.1.3.1. Normal Mode
Normal mode encompasses the typical full-speed operation. The power consumption of the device in this
mode will vary depending on the system clock speed and any analog peripherals that are enabled.
2.1.3.2. Idle Mode
Setting the IDLE bit in PCON causes the hardware to halt the CPU and enter idle mode as soon as the
instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain their original
data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during idle mode.
Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an
enabled interrupt will cause the IDLE bit to be cleared and the CPU to resume operation. The pending
interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return from interrupt (RETI) will
be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit. If Idle mode is terminated
by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program
execution at address 0x0000.
2.1.3.3. Stop Mode (Regulator On)
Setting the STOP bit in PCON when STOPCF in REG0CN is clear causes the controller core to enter stop
mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. In stop mode the internal oscillator,
CPU, and all digital peripherals are stopped. Each analog peripheral may be shut down individually prior to
entering stop mode. Stop mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset.
2.1.3.4. Shutdown Mode (Regulator Off)
Shutdown mode is an extension of the normal stop mode operation. Setting the STOP bit in PCON when
STOPCF in REG0CN is also set causes the controller core to enter shutdown mode as soon as the
instruction that sets the bit completes execution, and then the internal regulator is powered down. In
shutdown mode, all core functions, memories and peripherals are powered off. An external pin reset or
power-on reset is required to exit shutdown mode.
2.2. I/O
2.2.1. General Features
The C8051F85x/86x ports have the following features:
Push-pull
or open-drain output modes and analog or digital modes.
Port Match allows the device to recognize a change on a port pin value and wake from idle mode
or generate an interrupt.
Internal pull-up resistors can be globally enabled or disabled.
Two external interrupts provide unique interrupt vectors for monitoring time-critical events.
Above-rail tolerance allows 5 V interface when device is powered.
2.2.2. Crossbar
The C8051F85x/86x devices have a digital peripheral crossbar with the following features:
Flexible
peripheral assignment to port pins.
Pins can be individually skipped to move peripherals as needed for design or layout
considerations.
The crossbar has a fixed priority for each I/O function and assigns these functions to the port pins. When a
digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned port pin is assigned to that resource. If a port
pin is assigned, the crossbar skips that pin when assigning the next selected resource. Additionally, the
crossbar will skip port pins whose associated bits in the PnSKIP registers are set. This provides some
flexibility when designing a system: pins involved with sensitive analog measurements can be moved away
from digital I/O and peripherals can be moved around the chip as needed to ease layout constraints.
26
Rev. 1.0
2.3. Clocking
The C8051F85x/86x devices have two internal oscillators and the option to use an external CMOS input at
a pin as the system clock. A programmable divider allows the user to internally run the system clock at a
slower rate than the selected oscillator if desired.
2.4. Counters/Timers and PWM
2.4.1. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0)
The C8051F85x/86x devices include a three-channel, 16-bit Programmable Counter Array with the
following features:
16-bit
time base.
clock divisor and clock source selection.
Three independently-configurable channels.
8, 9, 10, 11 and 16-bit PWM modes (center or edge-aligned operation).
Output polarity control.
Frequency output mode.
Capture on rising, falling or any edge.
Compare function for arbitrary waveform generation.
Software timer (internal compare) mode.
Can accept hardware “kill” signal from comparator 0.
Programmable
2.4.2. Timers (Timer 0, Timer 1, Timer 2 and Timer 3)
Timers include the following features:
Timer
0 and Timer 1 are standard 8051 timers, supporting backwards-compatibility with firmware
and hardware.
Timer 2 and Timer 3 can each operate as 16-bit auto-reload or two independent 8-bit auto-reload
timers, and include pin or LFO clock capture capabilities.
2.4.3. Watchdog Timer (WDT0)
The watchdog timer includes a 16-bit timer with a programmable reset period. The registers are protected
from inadvertent access by an independent lock and key interface.
The Watchdog Timer has the following features:
Programmable
timeout interval.
from the low frequency oscillator.
Lock-out feature to prevent any modification until a system reset.
Runs
Rev. 1.0
27
2.5. Communications and other Digital Peripherals
2.5.1. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0)
The UART uses two signals (TX and RX) and a predetermined fixed baud rate to provide asynchronous
communications with other devices.
The UART module provides the following features:
Asynchronous
transmissions and receptions.
Baud rates up to SYSCLK / 2 (transmit) or SYSCLK / 8 (receive).
8- or 9-bit data.
Automatic start and stop generation.
2.5.2. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)
SPI is a 3- or 4-wire communication interface that includes a clock, input data, output data, and an optional
select signal.
The SPI module includes the following features:
Supports
Supports
3- or 4-wire master or slave modes.
external clock frequencies up to SYSCLK / 2 in master mode and SYSCLK / 10 in slave
mode.
Support for all clock phase and polarity modes.
8-bit programmable clock rate.
Support for multiple masters on the same data lines.
2.5.3. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0)
The SMBus interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus compatible with both I2C and SMBus protocols.
The two clock and data signals operate in open-drain mode with external pull-ups to support automatic bus
arbitration.
Reads and writes to the interface are byte-oriented with the SMBus interface autonomously controlling the
serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/8th of the system clock as a master or slave,
which can be faster than allowed by the SMBus / I2C specification, depending on the clock source used. A
method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed
capabilities on the same bus.
The SMBus interface may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple
masters. The SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and
synchronization, arbitration logic, and start/stop control and generation.
The SMBus module includes the following features:
Standard
(up to 100 kbps) and Fast (400 kbps) transfer speeds.
Support for master, slave, and multi-master modes.
Hardware synchronization and arbitration for multi-master mode.
Clock low extending (clock stretching) to interface with faster masters.
Hardware support for 7-bit slave and general call address recognition.
Firmware support for 10-bit slave address decoding.
Ability to inhibit all slave states.
Programmable data setup/hold times.
2.5.4. 16/32-bit CRC (CRC0)
The CRC module is designed to provide hardware calculations for flash memory verification and
communications protocols. The CRC module supports the standard CCITT-16 16-bit polynomial (0x1021),
and includes the following features:
Support
28
for four CCITT-16 polynomial.
Rev. 1.0
Byte-level
bit reversal.
CRC of flash contents on one or more 256-byte blocks.
Initial seed selection of 0x0000 or 0xFFFF.
Automatic
Rev. 1.0
29
2.6. Analog Peripherals
2.6.1. 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)
The ADC0 module on C8051F85x/86x devices is a Successive Approximation Register (SAR) Analog to
Digital Converter (ADC). The key features of the ADC module are:
Single-ended
12-bit and 10-bit modes.
an output update rate of 200 ksps samples per second in 12-bit mode or 800 ksps
samples per second in 10-bit mode.
Operation in low power modes at lower conversion speeds.
Selectable asynchronous hardware conversion trigger.
Output data window comparator allows automatic range checking.
Support for Burst Mode, which produces one set of accumulated data per conversion-start trigger
with programmable power-on settling and tracking time.
Conversion complete and window compare interrupts supported.
Flexible output data formatting.
Includes an internal fast-settling reference with two levels (1.65 V and 2.4 V) and support for
external reference and signal ground.
Supports
2.6.2. Low Current Comparators (CMP0, CMP1)
The comparators take two analog input voltages and output the relationship between these voltages (less
than or greater than) as a digital signal. The Low Power Comparator module includes the following
features:
Multiple
sources for the positive and negative poles, including VDD, VREF, and I/O pins.
outputs are available: a digital synchronous latched output and a digital asynchronous raw
output.
Programmable hysteresis and response time.
Falling or rising edge interrupt options on the comparator output.
Provide “kill” signal to PCA module.
Comparator 0 can be used to reset the device.
Two
30
Rev. 1.0
2.7. Reset Sources
Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. On entry to this
reset state, the following occur:
The
core halts program execution.
registers are initialized to their defined reset values unless the bits reset only with a poweron reset.
External port pins are forced to a known state.
Interrupts and timers are disabled.
All registers are reset to the predefined values noted in the register descriptions unless the bits only reset
with a power-on reset. The contents of RAM are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is
preserved as long as power is not lost.
Module
The Port I/O latches are reset to 1 in open-drain mode. Weak pullups are enabled during and after the
reset. For VDD Supply Monitor and power-on resets, the RST pin is driven low until the device exits the
reset state.
On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, and the system clock defaults to the
internal low-power oscillator. The Watchdog Timer is enabled with the Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO0) as
its clock source. Program execution begins at location 0x0000.
2.8. On-Chip Debugging
The C8051F85x/86x devices include an on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow flash
programming and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application. The C2
interface uses a clock signal (C2CK) and a bi-directional C2 data signal (C2D) to transfer information
between the device and a host system. See the C2 Interface Specification for details on the C2 protocol.
Rev. 1.0
31
3. Pin Definitions
3.1. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QSOP24 Pin Definitions
N/C
1
24
N/C
P0.2
2
23
P0.3
P0.1 / AGND
3
22
P0.4
P0.0 / VREF
4
21
P0.5
GND
5
20
P0.6
VDD
6
19
P0.7
24 pin QSOP
(Top View)
RST / C2CK
7
18
P1.0
C2D / P2.0
8
17
P1.1
P1.7
9
16
P1.2
P1.6
10
15
P1.3
P1.5
11
14
P1.4
P2.1
12
13
N/C
Figure 3.1. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU Pinout
32
Type
GND
Ground
5
VDD
Power
6
RST /
C2CK
Active-low Reset /
C2 Debug Clock
7
Rev. 1.0
Analog Functions
Pin Name
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU
Analog Functions
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU
Pin Name
Type
P0.0
Standard I/O
4
Yes
P0MAT.0
INT0.0
INT1.0
ADC0.0
CP0P.0
CP0N.0
VREF
P0.1
Standard I/O
3
Yes
P0MAT.1
INT0.1
INT1.1
ADC0.1
CP0P.1
CP0N.1
AGND
P0.2
Standard I/O
2
Yes
P0MAT.2
INT0.2
INT1.2
ADC0.2
CP0P.2
CP0N.2
P0.3 /
EXTCLK
Standard I/O /
External CMOS Clock Input
23
Yes
P0MAT.3
EXTCLK
INT0.3
INT1.3
ADC0.3
CP0P.3
CP0N.3
P0.4
Standard I/O
22
Yes
P0MAT.4
INT0.4
INT1.4
ADC0.4
CP0P.4
CP0N.4
P0.5
Standard I/O
21
Yes
P0MAT.5
INT0.5
INT1.5
ADC0.5
CP0P.5
CP0N.5
P0.6
Standard I/O
20
Yes
P0MAT.6
CNVSTR
INT0.6
INT1.6
ADC0.6
CP0P.6
CP0N.6
P0.7
Standard I/O
19
Yes
P0MAT.7
INT0.7
INT1.7
ADC0.7
CP0P.7
CP0N.7
Rev. 1.0
33
34
Analog Functions
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU
Pin Name
Type
P1.0
Standard I/O
18
Yes
P1MAT.0
ADC0.8
CP1P.0
CP1N.0
P1.1
Standard I/O
17
Yes
P1MAT.1
ADC0.9
CP1P.1
CP1N.1
P1.2
Standard I/O
16
Yes
P1MAT.2
ADC0.10
CP1P.2
CP1N.2
P1.3
Standard I/O
15
Yes
P1MAT.3
ADC0.11
CP1P.3
CP1N.3
P1.4
Standard I/O
14
Yes
P1MAT.4
ADC0.12
CP1P.4
CP1N.4
P1.5
Standard I/O
11
Yes
P1MAT.5
ADC0.13
CP1P.5
CP1N.5
P1.6
Standard I/O
10
Yes
P1MAT.6
ADC0.14
CP1P.6
CP1N.6
P1.7
Standard I/O
9
Yes
P1MAT.7
ADC0.15
CP1P.7
CP1N.7
P2.0 /
C2D
Standard I/O /
C2 Debug Data
8
P2.1
Standard I/O
12
Rev. 1.0
No Connection
Analog Functions
N/C
Additional Digital Functions
Type
Pin Numbers
Pin Name
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GU and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IU
1
13
24
Rev. 1.0
35
RST / C2CK
5
6
P0.3
P0.4
P0.5
19
18
17
GND
P1.6
C2D / P2.0
(Top View)
10
4
16
P0.6
15
P0.7
14
P1.0
13
P1.1
12
GND
11
P1.2
P1.3
VDD
20 pin QFN
9
3
P1.4
GND
8
2
P1.5
P0.0 / VREF
P0.2
1
7
P0.1 / AGND
20
3.2. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5 QFN20 Pin Definitions
Figure 3.2. C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM Pinout
36
Type
GND
Ground
Center
3
12
VDD
Power
4
RST /
C2CK
Active-low Reset /
C2 Debug Clock
5
Rev. 1.0
Analog Functions
Pin Name
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.2. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM
Analog Functions
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.2. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM
Pin Name
Type
P0.0
Standard I/O
2
Yes
P0MAT.0
INT0.0
INT1.0
ADC0.0
CP0P.0
CP0N.0
VREF
P0.1
Standard I/O
1
Yes
P0MAT.1
INT0.1
INT1.1
ADC0.1
CP0P.1
CP0N.1
AGND
P0.2
Standard I/O
20
Yes
P0MAT.2
INT0.2
INT1.2
ADC0.2
CP0P.2
CP0N.2
P0.3
Standard I/O
19
Yes
P0MAT.3
EXTCLK
INT0.3
INT1.3
ADC0.3
CP0P.3
CP0N.3
P0.4
Standard I/O
18
Yes
P0MAT.4
INT0.4
INT1.4
ADC0.4
CP0P.4
CP0N.4
P0.5
Standard I/O
17
Yes
P0MAT.5
INT0.5
INT1.5
ADC0.5
CP0P.5
CP0N.5
P0.6
Standard I/O
16
Yes
P0MAT.6
CNVSTR
INT0.6
INT1.6
ADC0.6
CP0P.6
CP0N.6
P0.7
Standard I/O
15
Yes
P0MAT.7
INT0.7
INT1.7
ADC0.7
CP0P.7
CP0N.7
Rev. 1.0
37
38
Analog Functions
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.2. Pin Definitions for C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-GM and C8051F850/1/2/3/4/5-IM
Pin Name
Type
P1.0
Standard I/O
14
Yes
P1MAT.0
ADC0.8
CP1P.0
CP1N.0
P1.1
Standard I/O
13
Yes
P1MAT.1
ADC0.9
CP1P.1
CP1N.1
P1.2
Standard I/O
11
Yes
P1MAT.2
ADC0.10
CP1P.2
CP1N.2
P1.3
Standard I/O
10
Yes
P1MAT.3
ADC0.11
CP1P.3
CP1N.3
P1.4
Standard I/O
9
Yes
P1MAT.4
ADC0.12
CP1P.4
CP1N.4
P1.5
Standard I/O
8
Yes
P1MAT.5
ADC0.13
CP1P.5
CP1N.5
P1.6
Standard I/O
7
Yes
P1MAT.6
ADC0.14
CP1P.6
CP1N.6
P2.0 /
C2D
Standard I/O /
C2 Debug Data
6
Rev. 1.0
3.3. C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5 SOIC16 Pin Definitions
P0.2
1
16
P0.3
P0.1 / AGND
2
15
P0.4
P0.0 / VREF
3
14
P0.5
GND
4
13
P0.6
VDD
5
12
P0.7
RST / C2CK
6
11
P1.0
C2D / P2.0
7
10
P1.1
P1.3
8
9
P1.2
16 pin SOIC
(Top View)
Figure 3.3. C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS Pinout
Type
GND
Ground
4
VDD
Power
5
RST /
C2CK
Active-low Reset /
C2 Debug Clock
6
P0.0
Standard I/O
3
Rev. 1.0
Yes
P0MAT.0
INT0.0
INT1.0
Analog Functions
Pin Name
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.3. Pin Definitions for C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS
ADC0.0
CP0P.0
CP0N.0
39
40
Analog Functions
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.3. Pin Definitions for C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS
Pin Name
Type
P0.1
Standard I/O
2
Yes
P0MAT.1
INT0.1
INT1.1
ADC0.1
CP0P.1
CP0N.1
P0.2
Standard I/O
1
Yes
P0MAT.2
INT0.2
INT1.2
ADC0.2
CP0P.2
CP0N.2
P0.3 /
EXTCLK
Standard I/O /
External CMOS Clock Input
16
Yes
P0MAT.3
EXTCLK
INT0.3
INT1.3
ADC0.3
CP0P.3
CP0N.3
P0.4
Standard I/O
15
Yes
P0MAT.4
INT0.4
INT1.4
ADC0.4
CP0P.4
CP0N.4
P0.5
Standard I/O
14
Yes
P0MAT.5
INT0.5
INT1.5
ADC0.5
CP0P.5
CP0N.5
P0.6
Standard I/O
13
Yes
P0MAT.6
CNVSTR
INT0.6
INT1.6
ADC0.6
CP1P.0
CP1N.0
P0.7
Standard I/O
12
Yes
P0MAT.7
INT0.7
INT1.7
ADC0.7
CP1P.1
CP1N.1
P1.0
Standard I/O
11
Yes
P1MAT.0
ADC0.8
CP1P.2
CP1N.2
Rev. 1.0
Analog Functions
Additional Digital Functions
Pin Numbers
Crossbar Capability
Table 3.3. Pin Definitions for C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-GS and C8051F860/1/2/3/4/5-IS
Pin Name
Type
P1.1
Standard I/O
10
Yes
P1MAT.1
ADC0.9
CP1P.3
CP1N.3
P1.2
Standard I/O
9
Yes
P1MAT.2
ADC0.10
CP1P.4
CP1N.4
P1.3
Standard I/O
8
Yes
P1MAT.3
ADC0.11
CP1P.5
CP1N.5
P2.0 /
C2D
Standard I/O /
C2 Debug Data
7
Rev. 1.0
41
4. Ordering Information
C8051 F 850 – C – G M
Package Type M (QFN), U (QSOP), S (SSOP)
Temperature Grade G (-40 to +85), I (-40 to +125)
Revision
Family and Features – 85x and 86x
Memory Type – F (Flash)
Silicon Labs 8051 Family
Figure 4.1. C8051F85x/86x Part Numbering
All C8051F85x/86x family members have the following features:
CIP-51
Core running up to 25 MHz
Two Internal Oscillators (24.5 MHz and 80 kHz)
I2C/SMBus
SPI
UART
3-Channel Programmable Counter Array (PWM, Clock Generation, Capture/Compare)
4 16-bit Timers
2 Analog Comparators
16-bit CRC Unit
In addition to these features, each part number in the C8051F85x/86x family has a set of features that vary
across the product line. The product selection guide in Table 4.1 shows the features available on each
family member.
All devices in Table 4.1 are also available in an industrial version. For the industrial version, the -G in the
ordering part number is replaced with -I. For example, the industrial version of the C8051F850-C-GM is the
C8051F850-C-IM.
42
Rev. 1.0
Flash Memory (kB)
RAM (Bytes)
Digital Port I/Os (Total)
Number of ADC0 Channels
I/O with Comparator 0/1 Inputs
Pb-free (RoHS Compliant)
AEC-Q100 Qualified
Temperature Range
C8051F850-C-GM
8
512
16
15
15
-40 to 85 °C
QFN-20
C8051F850-C-GU
8
512
18
16
16
-40 to 85 °C
QSOP-24
C8051F851-C-GM
4
512
16
15
15
-40 to 85 °C
QFN-20
C8051F851-C-GU
4
512
18
16
16
-40 to 85 °C
QSOP-24
C8051F852-C-GM
2
256
16
15
15
-40 to 85 °C
QFN-20
C8051F852-C-GU
2
256
18
16
16
-40 to 85 °C
QSOP-24
C8051F853-C-GM
8
512
16
—
15
-40 to 85 °C
QFN-20
C8051F853-C-GU
8
512
18
—
16
-40 to 85 °C
QSOP-24
C8051F854-C-GM
4
512
16
—
15
-40 to 85 °C
QFN-20
C8051F854-C-GU
4
512
18
—
16
-40 to 85 °C
QSOP-24
C8051F855-C-GM
2
256
16
—
15
-40 to 85 °C
QFN-20
C8051F855-C-GU
2
256
18
—
16
-40 to 85 °C
QSOP-24
C8051F860-C-GS
8
512
13
12
12
-40 to 85 °C
SOIC-16
C8051F861-C-GS
4
512
13
12
12
-40 to 85 °C
SOIC-16
C8051F862-C-GS
2
256
13
12
12
-40 to 85 °C
SOIC-16
C8051F863-C-GS
8
512
13
—
12
-40 to 85 °C
SOIC-16
C8051F864-C-GS
4
512
13
—
12
-40 to 85 °C
SOIC-16
C8051F865-C-GS
2
256
13
—
12
-40 to 85 °C
SOIC-16
Rev. 1.0
Package
Ordering Part Number
Table 4.1. Product Selection Guide
43
44
Rev. 1.0
Package
Temperature Range
AEC-Q100 Qualified
Pb-free (RoHS Compliant)
I/O with Comparator 0/1 Inputs
Number of ADC0 Channels
Digital Port I/Os (Total)
RAM (Bytes)
Flash Memory (kB)
Ordering Part Number
Table 4.1. Product Selection Guide
-IM, -IU and -IS extended temperature range devices (-40 to 125 °C) are also available.
C8051F85x/86x
5. QSOP-24 Package Specifications
Figure 5.1. QSOP-24 Package Drawing
Table 5.1. QSOP-24 Package Dimensions
Dimension
Min
Nom
Max
Dimension
Min
Nom
Max
A
—
—
1.75
e
A1
0.10
—
0.25
L
0.40
—
1.27
b
0.20
—
0.30
0º
—
8º
c
0.10
—
0.25
aaa
0.20
0.635 BSC
D
8.65 BSC
bbb
0.18
E
6.00 BSC
ccc
0.10
E1
3.90 BSC
ddd
0.10
Notes:
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994.
3. This drawing conforms to JEDEC outline MO-137, variation AE.
4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body
Components.
Rev. 1.0
45
C8051F85x/86x
Figure 5.2. QSOP-24 PCB Land Pattern
Table 5.2. QSOP-24 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions
Dimension
Min
Max
C
E
X
Y
5.20
5.30
0.635 BSC
0.30
1.50
0.40
1.60
Notes:
General
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. This land pattern design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines.
Solder Mask Design
3. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the
solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 µm minimum, all the way around the pad.
Stencil Design
4. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should
be used to assure good solder paste release.
5. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils).
6. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pads.
Card Assembly
7. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended.
8. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020
specification for Small Body Components.
46
Rev. 1.0
C8051F85x/86x
6. QFN-20 Package Specifications
Figure 6.1. QFN-20 Package Drawing
Table 6.1. QFN-20 Package Dimensions
Symbol
Millimeters
Symbol
Min
Nom
Max
Millimeters
Min
Nom
Max
A
0.70
0.75
0.80
f
A1
0.00
0.02
0.05
L
0.3
0.40
0.5
b
0.20
0.25
0.30
L1
0.00
—
0.10
c
0.25
0.30
0.35
aaa
—
—
0.05
bbb
—
—
0.05
ccc
—
—
0.08
D
D2
3.00 BSC
1.6
1.70
1.8
2.53 BSC
e
0.50 BSC
ddd
—
—
0.10
E
3.00 BSC
eee
—
—
0.10
E2
1.6
1.70
1.8
Notes:
1. All dimensions are shown in millimeters unless otherwise noted.
2. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994.
Rev. 1.0
47
C8051F85x/86x
Figure 6.2. QFN-20 Landing Diagram
48
Rev. 1.0
C8051F85x/86x
Table 6.2. QFN-20 Landing Diagram Dimensions
Symbol
Millimeters
Min
D
D2
Symbol
Max
Min
2.71 REF
1.60
1.80
2.10
—
W
—
0.34
—
0.28
0.50 BSC
X
E
2.71 REF
Y
f
GD
1.60
1.80
2.53 BSC
2.10
Max
GE
e
E2
Millimeters
0.61 REF
ZE
—
3.31
ZD
—
3.31
—
Notes: General
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing is per the ANSI Y14.5M-1994 specification.
3. This Land Pattern Design is based on IPC-SM-782 guidelines.
4. All dimensions shown are at Maximum Material Condition (MMC). Least Material
Condition (LMC) is calculated based on a Fabrication Allowance of 0.05 mm.
Notes: Solder Mask Design
1. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the
solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 µm minimum, all the way around the pad.
Notes: Stencil Design
1. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should
be used to assure good solder paste release.
2. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils).
3. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for the perimeter pads.
4. A 1.45 x 1.45 mm square aperture should be used for the center pad. This provides
approximately 70% solder paste coverage on the pad, which is optimum to assure
correct component stand-off.
Notes: Card Assembly
1. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended.
2. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification
for Small Body Components.
Rev. 1.0
49
C8051F85x/86x
7. SOIC-16 Package Specifications
Figure 7.1. SOIC-16 Package Drawing
Table 7.1. SOIC-16 Package Dimensions
Dimension
Min
A
Nom
Max
Dimension
Min
Nom
Max
—
1.75
L
0.40
A1
0.10
0.25
L2
A2
1.25
—
h
0.25
0.50
b
0.31
0.51
0º
8º
c
0.17
0.25
aaa
0.10
1.27
0.25 BSC
D
9.90 BSC
bbb
0.20
E
6.00 BSC
ccc
0.10
E1
3.90 BSC
ddd
0.25
e
1.27 BSC
Notes:
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994.
3. This drawing conforms to the JEDEC Solid State Outline MS-012, Variation AC.
4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body
Components.
50
Rev. 1.0
C8051F85x/86x
Figure 7.2. SOIC-16 PCB Land Pattern
Table 7.2. SOIC-16 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions
Dimension
Feature
(mm)
C1
E
X1
Y1
Pad Column Spacing
Pad Row Pitch
Pad Width
Pad Length
5.40
1.27
0.60
1.55
Notes:
General
1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted.
2. This Land Pattern Design is based on IPC-7351 pattern SOIC127P600X165-16N for Density
Level B (Median Land Protrusion).
3. All feature sizes shown are at Maximum Material Condition (MMC) and a card fabrication
tolerance of 0.05 mm is assumed.
Rev. 1.0
51
8. Memory Organization
The memory organization of the CIP-51 System Controller is similar to that of a standard 8051. There are
two separate memory spaces: program memory and data memory. Program and data memory share the
same address space but are accessed via different instruction types. The memory organization of the
C8051F85x/86x device family is shown in Figure 8.1.
PROGRAM/DATA MEMORY
(FLASH)
DATA MEMORY (RAM)
INTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
0xFF
0x1FFF
0x80
0x7F
Upper 128 RAM
(Indirect Addressing
Only)
Special Function
Registers
(Direct Addressing Only)
(Direct and Indirect Addressing)
0x30
0x2F
0x20
0x1F
0x00
32 Bit-Addressable Bytes
32 General Purpose Registers
8 kB FLASH
(In-System
Programmable in 512
Byte Sectors)
EXTERNAL DATA ADDRESS SPACE
0xFFFF
Same 256 bytes as 0x0000 to 0x00FF,
wrapped on 256-byte boundaries
0x0100
0x00FF
XRAM - 256 Bytes
0x0000
(accessable using MOVX instruction)
0x0000
Figure 8.1. C8051F85x/86x Memory Map (8 kB flash version shown)
52
Rev. 1.0
Lower 128 RAM
(Direct and Indirect
Addressing)
8.1. Program Memory
The CIP-51 core has a 64 kB program memory space. The C8051F85x/86x family implements 8 kB, 4 kB
or 2 kB of this program memory space as in-system, re-programmable flash memory. The last address in
the flash block (0x1FFF on 8 kB devices, 0x0FFF on 4 kB devices and 0x07FF on 2 kB devices) serves as
a security lock byte for the device, and provides read, write and erase protection. Addresses above the
lock byte within the 64 kB address space are reserved.
C8051F850/3
C8051F860/3
Lock Byte
FLASH memory organized in
512-byte pages
Lock Byte Page
0x1FFF
0x1FFE
0x1E00
C8051F851/4
C8051F861/4
Lock Byte
Lock Byte Page
0x0FFF
0x0FFE
0x0E00
C8051F852/5
C8051F862/5
Lock Byte
Flash Memory Space
Lock Byte Page
Flash Memory Space
0x07FF
0x07FE
0x0600
Flash Memory Space
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
Figure 8.2. Flash Program Memory Map
8.1.1. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory
The MOVX instruction in an 8051 device is typically used to access external data memory. On the
C8051F85x/86x devices, the MOVX instruction is normally used to read and write on-chip XRAM, but can
be re-configured to write and erase on-chip flash memory space. MOVC instructions are always used to
read flash memory, while MOVX write instructions are used to erase and write flash. This flash access
feature provides a mechanism for the C8051F85x/86x to update program code and use the program
memory space for non-volatile data storage. Refer to Section “10. Flash Memory” on page 61 for further
details.
8.2. Data Memory
The C8051F85x/86x device family includes up to 512 bytes of RAM data memory. 256 bytes of this
memory is mapped into the internal RAM space of the 8051. On devices with 512 bytes total RAM, 256
additional bytes of memory are available as on-chip “external” memory. The data memory map is shown in
Figure 8.1 for reference.
8.2.1. Internal RAM
There are 256 bytes of internal RAM mapped into the data memory space from 0x00 through 0xFF. The
lower 128 bytes of data memory are used for general purpose registers and scratch pad memory. Either
direct or indirect addressing may be used to access the lower 128 bytes of data memory. Locations 0x00
through 0x1F are addressable as four banks of general purpose registers, each bank consisting of eight
byte-wide registers. The next 16 bytes, locations 0x20 through 0x2F, may either be addressed as bytes or
as 128 bit locations accessible with the direct addressing mode.
Rev. 1.0
53
The upper 128 bytes of data memory are accessible only by indirect addressing. This region occupies the
same address space as the Special Function Registers (SFR) but is physically separate from the SFR
space. The addressing mode used by an instruction when accessing locations above 0x7F determines
whether the CPU accesses the upper 128 bytes of data memory space or the SFRs. Instructions that use
direct addressing will access the SFR space. Instructions using indirect addressing above 0x7F access the
upper 128 bytes of data memory. Figure 8.1 illustrates the data memory organization of the C8051F85x/
86x.
Revision C C8051F852/5 and C8051F862/5 devices implement the upper four bytes of internal RAM as a
32-bit Unique Identifier. More information can be found in “Device Identification and Unique Identifier” on
page 68.
8.2.1.1. General Purpose Registers
The lower 32 bytes of data memory, locations 0x00 through 0x1F, may be addressed as four banks of
general-purpose registers. Each bank consists of eight byte-wide registers designated R0 through R7.
Only one of these banks may be enabled at a time. Two bits in the program status word (PSW) register,
RS0 and RS1, select the active register bank. This allows fast context switching when entering subroutines
and interrupt service routines. Indirect addressing modes use registers R0 and R1 as index registers.
8.2.1.2. Bit Addressable Locations
In addition to direct access to data memory organized as bytes, the sixteen data memory locations at 0x20
through 0x2F are also accessible as 128 individually addressable bits. Each bit has a bit address from
0x00 to 0x7F. Bit 0 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x00 while bit7 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address
0x07. Bit 7 of the byte at 0x2F has bit address 0x7F. A bit access is distinguished from a full byte access by
the type of instruction used (bit source or destination operands as opposed to a byte source or
destination).
The MCS-51™ assembly language allows an alternate notation for bit addressing of the form XX.B where
XX is the byte address and B is the bit position within the byte. For example, the instruction:
MOV
C, 22.3h
moves the Boolean value at 0x13 (bit 3 of the byte at location 0x22) into the Carry flag.
8.2.1.3. Stack
A programmer's stack can be located anywhere in the 256-byte data memory. The stack area is
designated using the Stack Pointer (SP) SFR. The SP will point to the last location used. The next value
pushed on the stack is placed at SP+1 and then SP is incremented. A reset initializes the stack pointer to
location 0x07. Therefore, the first value pushed on the stack is placed at location 0x08, which is also the
first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if more than one register bank is to be used, the SP should be
initialized to a location in the data memory not being used for data storage. The stack depth can extend up
to 256 bytes.
8.2.2. External RAM
On devices with 512 bytes total RAM, there are 256 bytes of on-chip RAM mapped into the external data
memory space. All of these address locations may be accessed using the external move instruction
(MOVX) and the data pointer (DPTR), or using MOVX indirect addressing mode. Note: The 16-bit MOVX
instruction is also used for writes to the flash memory. See Section “10. Flash Memory” on page 61 for
details. The MOVX instruction accesses XRAM by default.
For a 16-bit MOVX operation (@DPTR), the upper 8 bits of the 16-bit external data memory address word
are "don't cares". As a result, addresses 0x0000 through 0x00FF are mapped modulo style over the entire
64 k external data memory address range. For example, the XRAM byte at address 0x0000 is shadowed
at addresses 0x0100, 0x0200, 0x0300, 0x0400, etc.
Revision C C8051F850/1/3/4 and C8051F860/1/3/4 devices implement the upper four bytes of external
RAM as a 32-bit Unique Identifier. More information can be found in “Device Identification and Unique
Identifier” on page 68.
54
Rev. 1.0
8.2.3. Special Function Registers
The direct-access data memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF constitute the special function registers
(SFRs). The SFRs provide control and data exchange with the CIP-51's resources and peripherals. The
CIP-51 duplicates the SFRs found in a typical 8051 implementation as well as implementing additional
SFRs used to configure and access the sub-systems unique to the MCU. This allows the addition of new
functionality while retaining compatibility with the MCS-51™ instruction set.
The SFR registers are accessed anytime the direct addressing mode is used to access memory locations
from 0x80 to 0xFF. SFRs with addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 (e.g. P0, TCON, SCON0, IE, etc.) are bitaddressable as well as byte-addressable. All other SFRs are byte-addressable only. Unoccupied
addresses in the SFR space are reserved for future use. Accessing these areas will have an indeterminate
effect and should be avoided.
Rev. 1.0
55
9. Special Function Register Memory Map
This section details the special function register memory map for the C8051F85x/86x devices.
Table 9.1. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map
F8
SPI0CN
PCA0L
PCA0H
F0
B
P0MDIN
P1MDIN
E8 ADC0CN0
PCA0CPL0 PCA0CPH0
EIP1
-
PCA0CPL1 PCA0CPH1 PCA0CPL2 PCA0CPH2
XBR1
XBR2
IT01CF
P0MAT
P0MASK
VDM0CN
-
PRTDRV
PCA0PWM
P1MAT
P1MASK
RSTSRC
-
EIE1
-
E0
ACC
XBR0
D8
PCA0CN
PCA0MD
PCA0CPM0 PCA0CPM1 PCA0CPM2
CRC0IN
CRC0DAT
ADC0PWR
D0
PSW
REF0CN
CRC0AUTO CRC0CNT
P0SKIP
P1SKIP
SMB0ADM
SMB0ADR
C8
TMR2CN
REG0CN
TMR2RLL
TMR2RLH
TMR2L
TMR2H
CRC0CN
CRC0FLIP
C0
SMB0CN
SMB0CF
SMB0DAT
ADC0GTL
ADC0GTH
ADC0LTL
ADC0LTH
OSCICL
B8
IP
ADC0TK
-
ADC0MX
ADC0CF
ADC0L
ADC0H
CPT1CN
B0
-
OSCLCN
ADC0CN1
ADC0AC
-
DEVICEID
REVID
FLKEY
A8
IE
CLKSEL
CPT1MX
CPT1MD
SMB0TC
DERIVID
-
-
A0
P2
SPI0CFG
SPI0CKR
SPI0DAT
P0MDOUT
P1MDOUT
P2MDOUT
-
98
SCON0
SBUF0
-
CPT0CN
PCA0CLR
CPT0MD
PCA0CENT
CPT0MX
90
P1
TMR3CN
TMR3RLL
TMR3RLH
TMR3L
TMR3H
PCA0POL
WDTCN
88
TCON
TMOD
TL0
TL1
TH0
TH1
CKCON
PSCTL
80
P0
SP
DPL
DPH
-
-
-
PCON
0(8)
1(9)
2(A)
3(B)
4(C)
5(D)
6(E)
7(F)
(bit addressable)
Table 9.2. Special Function Registers
Register
Address
Register Description
Page
ACC
0xE0
Accumulator
122
ADC0AC
0xB3
ADC0 Accumulator Configuration
102
ADC0CF
0xBC
ADC0 Configuration
101
ADC0CN0
0xE8
ADC0 Control 0
99
ADC0CN1
0xB2
ADC0 Control 1
100
ADC0GTH
0xC4
ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte
107
ADC0GTL
0xC3
ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte
108
ADC0H
0xBE
ADC0 Data Word High Byte
105
56
Rev. 1.0
Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued)
Register
Address
Register Description
Page
ADC0L
0xBD
ADC0 Data Word Low Byte
106
ADC0LTH
0xC6
ADC0 Less-Than High Byte
109
ADC0LTL
0xC5
ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte
110
ADC0MX
0xBB
ADC0 Multiplexer Selection
111
ADC0PWR
0xDF
ADC0 Power Control
103
ADC0TK
0xB9
ADC0 Burst Mode Track Time
104
B
0xF0
B Register
123
CKCON
0x8E
Clock Control
269
CLKSEL
0xA9
Clock Selection
129
CPT0CN
0x9B
Comparator 0 Control
134
CPT0MD
0x9D
Comparator 0 Mode
135
CPT0MX
0x9F
Comparator 0 Multiplexer Selection
136
CPT1CN
0xBF
Comparator 1 Control
137
CPT1MD
0xAB
Comparator 1 Mode
138
CPT1MX
0xAA
Comparator 1 Multiplexer Selection
139
CRC0AUTO
0xD2
CRC0 Automatic Control
146
CRC0CN
0xCE
CRC0 Control
143
CRC0CNT
0xD3
CRC0 Automatic Flash Sector Count
147
CRC0DAT
0xDE
CRC0 Data Output
145
CRC0FLIP
0xCF
CRC0 Bit Flip
148
CRC0IN
0xDD
CRC0 Data Input
144
DERIVID
0xAD
Derivative Identification
70
DEVICEID
0xB5
Device Identification
69
DPH
0x83
Data Pointer Low
120
DPL
0x82
Data Pointer High
119
EIE1
0xE6
Extended Interrupt Enable 1
78
EIP1
0xF3
Extended Interrupt Priority 1
80
FLKEY
0xB7
Flash Lock and Key
67
Rev. 1.0
57
Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued)
Register
Address
Register Description
Page
IE
0xA8
Interrupt Enable
75
IP
0xB8
Interrupt Priority
77
IT01CF
0xE4
INT0 / INT1 Configuration
150
OSCICL
0xC7
High Frequency Oscillator Calibration
127
OSCLCN
0xB1
Low Frequency Oscillator Control
128
P0
0x80
Port 0 Pin Latch
199
P0MASK
0xFE
Port 0 Mask
197
P0MAT
0xFD
Port 0 Match
198
P0MDIN
0xF1
Port 0 Input Mode
200
P0MDOUT
0xA4
Port 0 Output Mode
201
P0SKIP
0xD4
Port 0 Skip
202
P1
0x90
Port 1 Pin Latch
205
P1MASK
0xEE
Port 1 Mask
203
P1MAT
0xED
Port 1 Match
204
P1MDIN
0xF2
Port 1 Input Mode
206
P1MDOUT
0xA5
Port 1 Output Mode
207
P1SKIP
0xD5
Port 1 Skip
208
P2
0xA0
Port 2 Pin Latch
209
P2MDOUT
0xA6
Port 2 Output Mode
210
PCA0CENT
0x9E
PCA Center Alignment Enable
177
PCA0CLR
0x9C
PCA Comparator Clear Control
170
PCA0CN
0xD8
PCA Control
167
PCA0CPH0
0xFC
PCA Capture Module High Byte 0
175
PCA0CPH1
0xEA
PCA Capture Module High Byte 1
181
PCA0CPH2
0xEC
PCA Capture Module High Byte 2
183
PCA0CPL0
0xFB
PCA Capture Module Low Byte 0
174
PCA0CPL1
0xE9
PCA Capture Module Low Byte 1
180
PCA0CPL2
0xEB
PCA Capture Module Low Byte 2
182
58
Rev. 1.0
Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued)
Register
Address
Register Description
Page
PCA0CPM0
0xDA
PCA Capture/Compare Mode 0
171
PCA0CPM1
0xDB
PCA Capture/Compare Mode 1
178
PCA0CPM2
0xDC
PCA Capture/Compare Mode 1
179
PCA0H
0xFA
PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte
173
PCA0L
0xF9
PCA Counter/Timer High Byte
172
PCA0MD
0xD9
PCA Mode
168
PCA0POL
0x96
PCA Output Polarity
176
PCA0PWM
0xF7
PCA PWM Configuration
169
PCON
0x87
Power Control
83
PRTDRV
0xF6
Port Drive Strength
196
PSCTL
0x8F
Program Store Control
66
PSW
0xD0
Program Status Word
124
REF0CN
0xD1
Voltage Reference Control
112
REG0CN
0xC9
Voltage Regulator Control
84
REVID
0xB6
Revision Identification
71
RSTSRC
0xEF
Reset Source
215
SBUF0
0x99
UART0 Serial Port Data Buffer
297
SCON0
0x98
UART0 Serial Port Control
295
SMB0ADM
0xD6
SMBus0 Slave Address Mask
257
SMB0ADR
0xD7
SMBus0 Slave Address
256
SMB0CF
0xC1
SMBus0 Configuration
251
SMB0CN
0xC0
SMBus0 Control
254
SMB0DAT
0xC2
SMBus0 Data
258
SMB0TC
0xAC
SMBus0 Timing and Pin Control
253
SP
0x81
Stack Pointer
121
SPI0CFG
0xA1
SPI0 Configuration
227
SPI0CKR
0xA2
SPI0 Clock Control
231
SPI0CN
0xF8
SPI0 Control
229
Rev. 1.0
59
Table 9.2. Special Function Registers (Continued)
Register
Address
SPI0DAT
0xA3
SPI0 Data
232
TCON
0x88
Timer 0/1 Control
271
TH0
0x8C
Timer 0 High Byte
275
TH1
0x8D
Timer 1 High Byte
276
TL0
0x8A
Timer 0 Low Byte
273
TL1
0x8B
Timer 1 Low Byte
274
TMOD
0x89
Timer 0/1 Mode
272
TMR2CN
0xC8
Timer 2 Control
277
TMR2H
0xCD
Timer 2 High Byte
282
TMR2L
0xCC
Timer 2 Low Byte
281
TMR2RLH
0xCB
Timer 2 Reload High Byte
280
TMR2RLL
0xCA
Timer 2 Reload Low Byte
279
TMR3CN
0x91
Timer 3 Control
283
TMR3H
0x95
Timer 3 High Byte
288
TMR3L
0x94
Timer 3 Low Byte
287
TMR3RLH
0x93
Timer 3 Reload High Byte
286
TMR3RLL
0x92
Timer 3 Reload Low Byte
285
VDM0CN
0xFF
Supply Monitor Control
216
WDTCN
0x97
Watchdog Timer Control
300
XBR0
0xE1
Port I/O Crossbar 0
193
XBR1
0xE2
Port I/O Crossbar 1
194
XBR2
0xE3
Port I/O Crossbar 2
195
60
Register Description
Page
Rev. 1.0
10. Flash Memory
On-chip, re-programmable flash memory is included for program code and non-volatile data storage. The
flash memory is organized in 512-byte pages. It can be erased and written through the C2 interface or from
firmware by overloading the MOVX instruction. Any individual byte in flash memory must only be written
once between page erase operations.
10.1. Security Options
The CIP-51 provides security options to protect the flash memory from inadvertent modification by
software as well as to prevent the viewing of proprietary program code and constants. The Program Store
Write Enable (bit PSWE in register PSCTL) and the Program Store Erase Enable (bit PSEE in register
PSCTL) bits protect the flash memory from accidental modification by software. PSWE must be explicitly
set to ‘1’ before software can modify the flash memory; both PSWE and PSEE must be set to ‘1’ before
software can erase flash memory. Additional security features prevent proprietary program code and data
constants from being read or altered across the C2 interface.
A Security Lock Byte located in flash user space offers protection of the flash program memory from
access (reads, writes, or erases) by unprotected code or the C2 interface. See Section “8. Memory
Organization” on page 52 for the location of the security byte. The flash security mechanism allows the
user to lock n 512-byte flash pages, starting at page 0 (addresses 0x0000 to 0x01FF), where n is the 1’s
complement number represented by the Security Lock Byte. Note that the page containing the flash
Security Lock Byte is unlocked when no other flash pages are locked (all bits of the Lock Byte are
‘1’) and locked when any other flash pages are locked (any bit of the Lock Byte is ‘0’). An example is
shown in Figure 10.1.
Security Lock Byte:
11111101b
1s Complement:
00000010b
Flash pages locked:
3 (First two flash pages + Lock Byte Page)
Figure 10.1. Security Byte Decoding
The level of flash security depends on the flash access method. The three flash access methods that can
be restricted are reads, writes, and erases from the C2 debug interface, user firmware executing on
unlocked pages, and user firmware executing on locked pages. Table 10.1 summarizes the flash security
features of the C8051F85x/86x devices.
Table 10.1. Flash Security Summary
Action
C2 Debug
Interface
User Firmware executing from:
an unlocked page
a locked page
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Not Permitted
Flash Error Reset
Permitted
Read or Write page containing Lock Byte
(if no pages are locked)
Permitted
Permitted
N/A
Read or Write page containing Lock Byte
(if any page is locked)
Not Permitted
Flash Error Reset
Permitted
Read, Write or Erase unlocked pages
(except page with Lock Byte)
Read, Write or Erase locked pages
(except page with Lock Byte)
Rev. 1.0
61
Table 10.1. Flash Security Summary (Continued)
Read contents of Lock Byte
(if no pages are locked)
Permitted
Permitted
N/A
Read contents of Lock Byte
(if any page is locked)
Not Permitted
Flash Error Reset
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
N/A
C2 Device Erase
Only
Flash Error Reset
Flash Error Reset
Lock additional pages
(change 1s to 0s in the Lock Byte)
Not Permitted
Flash Error Reset
Flash Error Reset
Unlock individual pages
(change 0s to 1s in the Lock Byte)
Not Permitted
Flash Error Reset
Flash Error Reset
Read, Write or Erase Reserved Area
Not Permitted
Flash Error Reset
Flash Error Reset
Erase page containing Lock Byte
(if no pages are locked)
Erase page containing Lock Byte—Unlock all
pages (if any page is locked)
C2 Device Erase—Erases all flash pages including the page containing the Lock Byte.
Flash Error Reset —Not permitted; Causes Flash Error Device Reset (FERROR bit in RSTSRC is '1' after reset).
- All prohibited operations that are performed via the C2 interface are ignored (do not cause device reset).
- Locking any flash page also locks the page containing the Lock Byte.
- Once written to, the Lock Byte cannot be modified except by performing a C2 Device Erase.
- If user code writes to the Lock Byte, the Lock does not take effect until the next device reset.
62
Rev. 1.0
10.2. Programming the Flash Memory
Writes to flash memory clear bits from logic 1 to logic 0, and can be performed on single byte locations.
Flash erasures set bits back to logic 1, and occur only on full pages. The write and erase operations are
automatically timed by hardware for proper execution; data polling to determine the end of the write/erase
operation is not required. Code execution is stalled during a flash write/erase operation.
The simplest means of programming the flash memory is through the C2 interface using programming
tools provided by Silicon Labs or a third party vendor. This is the only means for programming a noninitialized device.
To ensure the integrity of flash contents, it is strongly recommended that the on-chip supply monitor be
enabled in any system that includes code that writes and/or erases flash memory from software.
10.2.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions
Flash writes and erases by user software are protected with a lock and key function. The Flash Lock and
Key Register (FLKEY) must be written with the correct key codes, in sequence, before flash operations
may be performed. The key codes are: 0xA5, 0xF1. The timing does not matter, but the codes must be
written in order. If the key codes are written out of order, or the wrong codes are written, flash writes and
erases will be disabled until the next system reset. Flash writes and erases will also be disabled if a flash
write or erase is attempted before the key codes have been written properly. The flash lock resets after
each write or erase; the key codes must be written again before a following flash operation can be
performed.
10.2.2. Flash Erase Procedure
The flash memory can be programmed by software using the MOVX write instruction with the address and
data byte to be programmed provided as normal operands. Before writing to flash memory using MOVX,
flash write operations must be enabled by: (1) setting the PSWE Program Store Write Enable bit in the
PSCTL register to logic 1 (this directs the MOVX writes to target flash memory); and (2) Writing the flash
key codes in sequence to the Flash Lock register (FLKEY). The PSWE bit remains set until cleared by
software.
A write to flash memory can clear bits to logic 0 but cannot set them; only an erase operation can set bits
to logic 1 in flash. A byte location to be programmed should be erased before a new value is written.
Erase operation applies to an entire page (setting all bytes in the page to 0xFF). To erase an entire page,
perform the following steps:
1. Disable interrupts (recommended).
2. Set the PSEE bit (register PSCTL).
3. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL).
4. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5.
5. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1.
6. Using the MOVX instruction, write a data byte to any location within the page to be erased.
7. Clear the PSWE and PSEE bits.
10.2.3. Flash Write Procedure
Flash bytes are programmed by software with the following sequence:
1. Disable interrupts (recommended).
2. Erase the flash page containing the target location, as described in Section 10.2.2.
3. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL).
4. Clear the PSEE bit (register PSCTL).
5. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5.
6. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1.
7. Using the MOVX instruction, write a single data byte to the desired location within the desired
Rev. 1.0
63
page.
8. Clear the PSWE bit.
Steps 5–7 must be repeated for each byte to be written. After flash writes are complete, PSWE should be
cleared so that MOVX instructions do not target program memory.
10.3. Non-Volatile Data Storage
The flash memory can be used for non-volatile data storage as well as program code. This allows data
such as calibration coefficients to be calculated and stored at run time. Data is written using the MOVX
write instruction and read using the MOVC instruction. Note: MOVX read instructions always target XRAM.
10.4. Flash Write and Erase Guidelines
Any system which contains routines which write or erase flash memory from software involves some risk
that the write or erase routines will execute unintentionally if the CPU is operating outside its specified
operating range of supply voltage, system clock frequency or temperature. This accidental execution of
flash modifying code can result in alteration of flash memory contents causing a system failure that is only
recoverable by re-flashing the code in the device.
To help prevent the accidental modification of flash by firmware, hardware restricts flash writes and
erasures when the supply monitor is not active and selected as a reset source. As the monitor is enabled
and selected as a reset source by default, it is recommended that systems writing or erasing flash simply
maintain the default state.
The following guidelines are recommended for any system which contains routines which write or erase
flash from code.
10.4.1. Voltage Supply Maintenance and the Supply Monitor
1. If the system power supply is subject to voltage or current "spikes," add sufficient transient
protection devices to the power supply to ensure that the supply voltages listed in the Absolute
Maximum Ratings table are not exceeded.
2. Make certain that the minimum supply rise time specification is met. If the system cannot meet this
rise time specification, then add an external supply brownout circuit to the RST pin of the device
that holds the device in reset until the voltage supply reaches the lower limit, and re-asserts RST if
the supply drops below the low supply limit.
3. Do not disable the supply monitor. If the supply monitor must be disabled in the system, firmware
should be added to the startup routine to enable the on-chip supply monitor and enable the supply
monitor as a reset source as early in code as possible. This should be the first set of instructions
executed after the reset vector. For C-based systems, this may involve modifying the startup code
added by the C compiler. See your compiler documentation for more details. Make certain that
there are no delays in software between enabling the supply monitor and enabling the supply
monitor as a reset source. Code examples showing this can be found in “AN201: Writing to Flash
From Firmware", available from the Silicon Laboratories web site. Note that the supply monitor
must be enabled and enabled as a reset source when writing or erasing flash memory. A
flash error reset will occur if either condition is not met.
4. As an added precaution if the supply monitor is ever disabled, explicitly enable the supply monitor
and enable the supply monitor as a reset source inside the functions that write and erase flash
memory. The supply monitor enable instructions should be placed just after the instruction to set
PSWE to a 1, but before the flash write or erase operation instruction.
5. Make certain that all writes to the RSTSRC (Reset Sources) register use direct assignment
operators and explicitly DO NOT use the bit-wise operators (such as AND or OR). For example,
"RSTSRC = 0x02" is correct. "RSTSRC |= 0x02" is incorrect.
6. Make certain that all writes to the RSTSRC register explicitly set the PORSF bit to a '1'. Areas to
check are initialization code which enables other reset sources, such as the Missing Clock
64
Rev. 1.0
Detector or Comparator, for example, and instructions which force a Software Reset. A global
search on "RSTSRC" can quickly verify this.
10.4.2. PSWE Maintenance
7. Reduce the number of places in code where the PSWE bit (in register PSCTL) is set to a 1. There
should be exactly one routine in code that sets PSWE to a '1' to write flash bytes and one routine in
code that sets PSWE and PSEE both to a '1' to erase flash pages.
8. Minimize the number of variable accesses while PSWE is set to a 1. Handle pointer address
updates and loop variable maintenance outside the "PSWE = 1;... PSWE = 0;" area. Code
examples showing this can be found in “AN201: Writing to Flash From Firmware", available from
the Silicon Laboratories web site.
9. Disable interrupts prior to setting PSWE to a '1' and leave them disabled until after PSWE has
been reset to 0. Any interrupts posted during the flash write or erase operation will be serviced in
priority order after the flash operation has been completed and interrupts have been re-enabled by
software.
10. Make certain that the flash write and erase pointer variables are not located in XRAM. See your
compiler documentation for instructions regarding how to explicitly locate variables in different
memory areas.
11. Add address bounds checking to the routines that write or erase flash memory to ensure that a
routine called with an illegal address does not result in modification of the flash.
10.4.3. System Clock
12. If operating from an external crystal-based source, be advised that crystal performance is
susceptible to electrical interference and is sensitive to layout and to changes in temperature. If the
system is operating in an electrically noisy environment, use the internal oscillator or use an
external CMOS clock.
13. If operating from the external oscillator, switch to the internal oscillator during flash write or erase
operations. The external oscillator can continue to run, and the CPU can switch back to the
external oscillator after the flash operation has completed.
Additional flash recommendations and example code can be found in “AN201: Writing to Flash From
Firmware", available from the Silicon Laboratories website.
Rev. 1.0
65
10.5. Flash Control Registers
Register 10.1. PSCTL: Program Store Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
PSEE
PSWE
Type
R
RW
RW
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x8F
Table 10.2. PSCTL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:2
Reserved
1
PSEE
Function
Must write reset value.
Program Store Erase Enable.
Setting this bit (in combination with PSWE) allows an entire page of flash program memory to be erased. If this bit is logic 1 and flash writes are enabled (PSWE is logic 1), a
write to flash memory using the MOVX instruction will erase the entire page that contains
the location addressed by the MOVX instruction. The value of the data byte written does
not matter.
0: Flash program memory erasure disabled.
1: Flash program memory erasure enabled.
0
PSWE
Program Store Write Enable.
Setting this bit allows writing a byte of data to the flash program memory using the MOVX
write instruction. The flash location should be erased before writing data.
0: Writes to flash program memory disabled.
1: Writes to flash program memory enabled; the MOVX write instruction targets flash
memory.
66
Rev. 1.0
Register 10.2. FLKEY: Flash Lock and Key
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
FLKEY
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xB7
Table 10.3. FLKEY Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
FLKEY
Function
Flash Lock and Key Register.
Write:
This register provides a lock and key function for flash erasures and writes. Flash writes
and erases are enabled by writing 0xA5 followed by 0xF1 to the FLKEY register. Flash
writes and erases are automatically disabled after the next write or erase is complete. If
any writes to FLKEY are performed incorrectly, or if a flash write or erase operation is
attempted while these operations are disabled, the flash will be permanently locked from
writes or erasures until the next device reset. If an application never writes to flash, it can
intentionally lock the flash by writing a non-0xA5 value to FLKEY from software.
Read:
When read, bits 1-0 indicate the current flash lock state.
00: Flash is write/erase locked.
01: The first key code has been written (0xA5).
10: Flash is unlocked (writes/erases allowed).
11: Flash writes/erases are disabled until the next reset.
Rev. 1.0
67
11. Device Identification and Unique Identifier
The C8051F85x/86x has SFRs that identify the device family, derivative, and revision. These SFRs can be
read by firmware at runtime to determine the capabilities of the MCU that is executing code. This allows
the same firmware image to run on MCUs with different memory sizes and peripherals, and dynamically
change functionality to suit the capabilities of that MCU.
In addition to the device identification registers, a 32-bit unique identifier (UID) is pre-programmed into all
Revision C and later devices. The UID resides in the last four bytes of XRAM (C8051F850/1/3/4 and
C8051F860/1/3/4) or RAM (C8051F852/5 and C8051F862/5). For devices with the UID in RAM, the UID
can be read by firmware using indirect data accesses. For devices with the UID in XRAM, the UID can be
read by firmware using MOVX instructions. The UID can also be read through the debug port for all
devices.
Firmware can overwrite the UID during normal operation, and the bytes in memory will be automatically
reinitialized with the UID value after any device reset. Firmware using this area of memory should always
initialize the memory to a known value, as any previous data stored at these locations will be overwritten
and not retained through a reset.
Table 11.1. UID Implementation Information
68
Device
Memory Segment
Addresses
C8051F850
C8051F851
C8051F853
C8051F854
C8051F860
C8051F861
C8051F863
C8051F864
XRAM
(MSB) 0x00FF, 0x00FE, 0x00FD, 0x00FC (LSB)
C8051F852
C8051F855
C8051F862
C8051F865
RAM (indirect)
(MSB) 0xFF, 0xFE, 0xFD, 0xFC (LSB)
Rev. 1.0
11.1. Device Identification Registers
Register 11.1. DEVICEID: Device Identification
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
DEVICEID
Type
R
Reset
0
0
1
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xB5
Table 11.2. DEVICEID Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
DEVICEID
Function
Device ID.
This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x30 (C8051F85x/86x).
Rev. 1.0
69
Register 11.2. DERIVID: Derivative Identification
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
DERIVID
Type
R
Reset
X
X
X
X
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
SFR Address: 0xAD
Table 11.3. DERIVID Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
DERIVID
Function
Derivative ID.
This read-only register returns the 8-bit derivative ID, which can be used by firmware to
identify which device in the product family the code is executing on. The ‘{R}’ tag in the
part numbers below indicates the device revision letter in the ordering code.
0xD0: C8051F850-{R}-GU
0xD1: C8051F851-{R}-GU
0xD2: C8051F852-{R}-GU
0xD3: C8051F853-{R}-GU
0xD4: C8051F854-{R}-GU
0xD5: C8051F855-{R}-GU
0xE0: C8051F860-{R}-GS
0xE1: C8051F861-{R}-GS
0xE2: C8051F862-{R}-GS
0xE3: C8051F863-{R}-GS
0xE4: C8051F864-{R}-GS
0xE5: C8051F865-{R}-GS
0xF0: C8051F850-{R}-GM
0xF1: C8051F851-{R}-GM
0xF2: C8051F852-{R}-GM
0xF3: C8051F853-{R}-GM
0xF4: C8051F854-{R}-GM
0xF5: C8051F855-{R}-GM
70
Rev. 1.0
Register 11.3. REVID: Revision Identifcation
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
REVID
Type
R
Reset
X
X
X
X
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
SFR Address: 0xB6
Table 11.4. REVID Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
REVID
Function
Revision ID.
This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID.
00000000: Revision A
00000001: Revision B
00000010: Revision C
00000011-11111111: Reserved.
Rev. 1.0
71
12. Interrupts
The C8051F85x/86x includes an extended interrupt system supporting multiple interrupt sources with two
priority levels. The allocation of interrupt sources between on-chip peripherals and external input pins
varies according to the specific version of the device. Each interrupt source has one or more associated
interrupt-pending flag(s) located in an SFR. When a peripheral or external source meets a valid interrupt
condition, the associated interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1.
If interrupts are enabled for the source, an interrupt request is generated when the interrupt-pending flag is
set. As soon as execution of the current instruction is complete, the CPU generates an LCALL to a
predetermined address to begin execution of an interrupt service routine (ISR). Each ISR must end with an
RETI instruction, which returns program execution to the next instruction that would have been executed if
the interrupt request had not occurred. If interrupts are not enabled, the interrupt-pending flag is ignored by
the hardware and program execution continues as normal. The interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1
regardless of the interrupt's enable/disable state.
Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled through the use of an associated interrupt
enable bit in an SFR (IE and EIE1). However, interrupts must first be globally enabled by setting the EA bit
in the IE register to logic 1 before the individual interrupt enables are recognized. Setting the EA bit to logic
0 disables all interrupt sources regardless of the individual interrupt-enable settings.
Some interrupt-pending flags are automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR.
However, most are not cleared by the hardware and must be cleared by software before returning from the
ISR. If an interrupt-pending flag remains set after the CPU completes the return-from-interrupt (RETI)
instruction, a new interrupt request will be generated immediately and the CPU will re-enter the ISR after
the completion of the next instruction.
12.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors
The C8051F85x/86x MCUs support interrupt sources for each peripheral on the device. Software can
simulate an interrupt by setting any interrupt-pending flag to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the flag, an
interrupt request will be generated and the CPU will vector to the ISR address associated with the
interrupt-pending flag. MCU interrupt sources, associated vector addresses, priority order and control bits
are summarized in Table 12.1. Refer to the datasheet section associated with a particular on-chip
peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its
interrupt-pending flag(s).
12.1.1. Interrupt Priorities
Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of two priority levels: low or high. A low
priority interrupt service routine can be preempted by a high priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt
cannot be preempted. Each interrupt has an associated interrupt priority bit in an SFR (IP or EIP1) used to
configure its priority level. Low priority is the default. If two interrupts are recognized simultaneously, the
interrupt with the higher priority is serviced first. If both interrupts have the same priority level, a fixed
priority order is used to arbitrate, given in Table 12.1.
12.1.2. Interrupt Latency
Interrupt response time depends on the state of the CPU when the interrupt occurs. Pending interrupts are
sampled and priority decoded each system clock cycle. Therefore, the fastest possible response time is 5
system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt and 4 clock cycles to complete the LCALL to the
ISR. If an interrupt is pending when a RETI is executed, a single instruction is executed before an LCALL
is made to service the pending interrupt. Therefore, the maximum response time for an interrupt (when no
other interrupt is currently being serviced or the new interrupt is of greater priority) occurs when the CPU is
performing an RETI instruction followed by a DIV as the next instruction. In this case, the response time is
18 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt, 5 clock cycles to execute the RETI, 8 clock
72
Rev. 1.0
cycles to complete the DIV instruction and 4 clock cycles to execute the LCALL to the ISR. If the CPU is
executing an ISR for an interrupt with equal or higher priority, the new interrupt will not be serviced until the
current ISR completes, including the RETI and following instruction. If more than one interrupt is pending
when the CPU exits an ISR, the CPU will service the next highest priority interrupt that is pending.
Rev. 1.0
73
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Vector
Priority Pending Flags
Order
Bit addressable?
Cleared by HW?
Table 12.1. Interrupt Summary
Enable Flag
Reset
0x0000
Top
None
N/A
N/A
Always Enabled
External Interrupt 0 (INT0)
0x0003
0
IE0 (TCON.1)
Y
Y
EX0 (IE.0)
Timer 0 Overflow
0x000B
1
TF0 (TCON.5)
Y
Y
ET0 (IE.1)
External Interrupt 1 (INT1)
0x0013
2
IE1 (TCON.3)
Y
Y
EX1 (IE.2)
Timer 1 Overflow
0x001B
3
TF1 (TCON.7)
Y
Y
ET1 (IE.3)
UART0
0x0023
4
RI (SCON0.0)
TI (SCON0.1)
Y
N
ES0 (IE.4)
Timer 2 Overflow
0x002B
5
TF2H (TMR2CN.7)
TF2L (TMR2CN.6)
Y
N
ET2 (IE.5)
SPI0
0x0033
6
SPIF (SPI0CN.7)
WCOL (SPI0CN.6)
MODF (SPI0CN.5)
RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4)
Y
N
ESPI0 (IE.6)
SMB0
0x003B
7
SI (SMB0CN.0)
Y
N
ESMB0 (EIE1.0)
Port Match
0x0043
8
None
N/A
N/A
EMAT (EIE1.1)
ADC0 Window Compare
0x004B
9
ADWINT (ADC0CN.3)
Y
N
EWADC0 (EIE1.2)
ADC0 Conversion Complete
0x0053
10
ADINT (ADC0CN.5)
Y
N
EADC0 (EIE1.3)
Programmable Counter
Array
0x005B
11
CF (PCA0CN.7)
CCFn (PCA0CN.n)
COVF (PCA0PWM.6)
Y
N
EPCA0 (EIE1.4)
Comparator0
0x0063
12
CPFIF (CPT0CN.4)
CPRIF (CPT0CN.5)
N
N
ECP0 (EIE1.5)
Comparator1
0x006B
13
CPFIF (CPT1CN.4)
CPRIF (CPT1CN.5)
N
N
ECP1 (EIE1.6)
Timer 3 Overflow
0x0073
14
TF3H (TMR3CN.7)
TF3L (TMR3CN.6)
N
N
ET3 (EIE1.7)
74
Rev. 1.0
12.2. Interrupt Control Registers
Register 12.1. IE: Interrupt Enable
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
EA
ESPI0
ET2
ES0
ET1
EX1
ET0
EX0
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA8 (bit-addressable)
Table 12.2. IE Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
EA
Function
Enable All Interrupts.
Globally enables/disables all interrupts and overrides individual interrupt mask settings.
0: Disable all interrupt sources.
1: Enable each interrupt according to its individual mask setting.
6
ESPI0
Enable SPI0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the SPI0 interrupts.
0: Disable all SPI0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SPI0.
5
ET2
Enable Timer 2 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 2 interrupt.
0: Disable Timer 2 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF2L or TF2H flags.
4
ES0
Enable UART0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the UART0 interrupt.
0: Disable UART0 interrupt.
1: Enable UART0 interrupt.
3
ET1
Enable Timer 1 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 1 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 1 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF1 flag.
2
EX1
Enable External Interrupt 1.
This bit sets the masking of External Interrupt 1.
0: Disable external interrupt 1.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the INT1 input.
1
ET0
Enable Timer 0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 0 interrupt.
0: Disable all Timer 0 interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF0 flag.
Rev. 1.0
75
Table 12.2. IE Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
EX0
Function
Enable External Interrupt 0.
This bit sets the masking of External Interrupt 0.
0: Disable external interrupt 0.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the INT0 input.
76
Rev. 1.0
Register 12.2. IP: Interrupt Priority
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
PSPI0
PT2
PS0
PT1
PX1
PT0
PX0
Type
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xB8 (bit-addressable)
Table 12.3. IP Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
Reserved
6
PSPI0
Function
Must write reset value.
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the SPI0 interrupt.
0: SPI0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: SPI0 interrupt set to high priority level.
5
PT2
Timer 2 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 2 interrupt.
0: Timer 2 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 2 interrupt set to high priority level.
4
PS0
UART0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the UART0 interrupt.
0: UART0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: UART0 interrupt set to high priority level.
3
PT1
Timer 1 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 1 interrupt.
0: Timer 1 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 1 interrupt set to high priority level.
2
PX1
External Interrupt 1 Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 1 interrupt.
0: External Interrupt 1 set to low priority level.
1: External Interrupt 1 set to high priority level.
1
PT0
Timer 0 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 0 interrupt.
0: Timer 0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Timer 0 interrupt set to high priority level.
0
PX0
External Interrupt 0 Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 0 interrupt.
0: External Interrupt 0 set to low priority level.
1: External Interrupt 0 set to high priority level.
Rev. 1.0
77
Register 12.3. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ET3
ECP1
ECP0
EPCA0
EADC0
EWADC0
EMAT
ESMB0
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE6
Table 12.4. EIE1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
ET3
Function
Enable Timer 3 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the Timer 3 interrupt.
0: Disable Timer 3 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF3L or TF3H flags.
6
ECP1
Enable Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP1 interrupt.
0: Disable CP1 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the comparator 1 CPRIF or CPFIF flags.
5
ECP0
Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the CP0 interrupt.
0: Disable CP0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the comparator 0 CPRIF or CPFIF flags.
4
EPCA0
Enable Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 interrupts.
0: Disable all PCA0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by PCA0.
3
EADC0
Enable ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.
0: Disable ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the ADINT flag.
2
EWADC0
Enable Window Comparison ADC0 Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.
0: Disable ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by ADC0 Window Compare flag (ADWINT).
1
EMAT
Enable Port Match Interrupts.
This bit sets the masking of the Port Match Event interrupt.
0: Disable all Port Match interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by a Port Match.
78
Rev. 1.0
Table 12.4. EIE1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
ESMB0
Function
Enable SMBus (SMB0) Interrupt.
This bit sets the masking of the SMB0 interrupt.
0: Disable all SMB0 interrupts.
1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SMB0.
Rev. 1.0
79
Register 12.4. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PT3
PCP1
PCP0
PPCA0
PADC0
PWADC0
PMAT
PSMB0
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xF3
Table 12.5. EIP1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
PT3
Function
Timer 3 Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Timer 3 interrupt.
0: Timer 3 interrupts set to low priority level.
1: Timer 3 interrupts set to high priority level.
6
PCP1
Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP1 interrupt.
0: CP1 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP1 interrupt set to high priority level.
5
PCP0
Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the CP0 interrupt.
0: CP0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: CP0 interrupt set to high priority level.
4
PPCA0
Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the PCA0 interrupt.
0: PCA0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: PCA0 interrupt set to high priority level.
3
PADC0
ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt.
0: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to high priority level.
2
PWADC0
ADC0 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Window interrupt.
0: ADC0 Window interrupt set to low priority level.
1: ADC0 Window interrupt set to high priority level.
1
PMAT
Port Match Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the Port Match Event interrupt.
0: Port Match interrupt set to low priority level.
1: Port Match interrupt set to high priority level.
80
Rev. 1.0
Table 12.5. EIP1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
PSMB0
Function
SMBus (SMB0) Interrupt Priority Control.
This bit sets the priority of the SMB0 interrupt.
0: SMB0 interrupt set to low priority level.
1: SMB0 interrupt set to high priority level.
Rev. 1.0
81
13. Power Management and Internal Regulator
All internal circuitry on the C8051F85x/86x devices draws power from the VDD supply pin. Circuits with
external connections (I/O pins, analog muxes) are powered directly from the VDD supply voltage, while
most of the internal circuitry is supplied by an on-chip LDO regulator. The regulator output is fully internal to
the device, and is available also as an ADC input or reference source for the comparators and ADC.
The devices support the standard 8051 power modes: idle and stop. For further power savings in stop
mode, the internal LDO regulator may be disabled, shutting down the majority of the power nets on the
device.
Although the C8051F85x/86x has idle and stop modes available, more control over the device power can
be achieved by enabling/disabling individual peripherals as needed. Each analog peripheral can be
disabled when not in use and placed in low power mode. Digital peripherals, such as timers and serial
buses, have their clocks gated off and draw little power when they are not in use.
13.1. Power Modes
Idle mode halts the CPU while leaving the peripherals and clocks active. In stop mode, the CPU is halted,
all interrupts and timers are inactive, and the internal oscillator is stopped (analog peripherals remain in
their selected states; the external oscillator is not affected). Since clocks are running in Idle mode, power
consumption is dependent upon the system clock frequency and the number of peripherals left in active
mode before entering Idle. Stop mode consumes the least power because the majority of the device is shut
down with no clocks active. The Power Control Register (PCON) is used to control the C8051F85x/86x's
Stop and Idle power management modes.
13.1.1. Idle Mode
Setting the Idle Mode Select bit (PCON.0) causes the hardware to halt the CPU and enter idle mode as
soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain
their original data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during idle mode.
Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an
enabled interrupt will cause the Idle Mode Selection bit (PCON.0) to be cleared and the CPU to resume
operation. The pending interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return
from interrupt (RETI) will be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit.
If idle mode is terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence
and begins program execution at address 0x0000.
Note: If the instruction following the write of the IDLE bit is a single-byte instruction and an interrupt occurs during the
execution phase of the instruction that sets the IDLE bit, the CPU may not wake from Idle mode when a future
interrupt occurs. Therefore, instructions that set the IDLE bit should be followed by an instruction that has two
or more opcode bytes, for example:
// in ‘C’:
// set IDLE bit
PCON |= 0x01;
PCON = PCON;
// ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction
; in assembly:
ORL PCON, #01h
MOV PCON, PCON
; set IDLE bit
; ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction
If enabled, the Watchdog Timer (WDT) will eventually cause an internal watchdog reset and thereby
terminate the idle mode. This feature protects the system from an unintended permanent shutdown in the
event of an inadvertent write to the PCON register. If this behavior is not desired, the WDT may be
disabled by software prior to entering the Idle mode if the WDT was initially configured to allow this
operation. This provides the opportunity for additional power savings, allowing the system to remain in the
Idle mode indefinitely, waiting for an external stimulus to wake up the system.
82
Rev. 1.0
13.1.2. Stop Mode
Setting the Stop Mode Select bit (PCON.1) causes the controller core to enter stop mode as soon as the
instruction that sets the bit completes execution. Before entering stop mode, the system clock must be
sourced by the internal high-frequency oscillator. In stop mode the internal oscillator, CPU, and all digital
peripherals are stopped; the state of the external oscillator circuit is not affected. Each analog peripheral
(including the external oscillator circuit) may be shut down individually prior to entering stop mode. Stop
mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset. On reset, the device performs the normal
reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000.
If enabled, the Missing Clock Detector will cause an internal reset and thereby terminate the stop mode.
The Missing Clock Detector should be disabled if the CPU is to be put to in STOP mode for longer than the
MCD timeout.
13.2. LDO Regulator
C8051F85x/86x devices include an internal regulator that regulates the internal core and logic supply.
Under default conditions, the internal regulator will remain on when the device enters STOP mode. This
allows any enabled reset source to generate a reset for the device and bring the device out of STOP mode.
For additional power savings, the STOPCF bit can be used to shut down the regulator and the internal
power network of the device when the part enters STOP mode. When STOPCF is set to 1, the RST pin
and a full power cycle of the device are the only methods of generating a reset.
13.3. Power Control Registers
Register 13.1. PCON: Power Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
GF
STOP
IDLE
Type
RW
RW
RW
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x87
Table 13.1. PCON Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:2
GF
Function
General Purpose Flags 5-0.
These are general purpose flags for use under software control.
1
STOP
Stop Mode Select.
Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Stop mode. This bit will always be read as 0.
0
IDLE
Idle Mode Select.
Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Idle mode. This bit will always be read as 0.
Rev. 1.0
83
13.4. LDO Control Registers
Register 13.2. REG0CN: Voltage Regulator Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Name
Reserved
STOPCF
Reserved
Type
R
RW
R
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC9
Table 13.2. REG0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:4
Reserved
Must write reset value.
3
STOPCF
Stop Mode Configuration.
This bit configures the regulator's behavior when the device enters stop mode.
0: Regulator is still active in stop mode. Any enabled reset source will reset the device.
1: Regulator is shut down in stop mode. Only the RST pin or power cycle can reset the
device.
2:0
84
Reserved
Must write reset value.
Rev. 1.0
14. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)
The ADC is a successive-approximation-register (SAR) ADC with 12-, 10-, and 8-bit modes, integrated
track-and-hold and a programmable window detector. These different modes allow the user to trade off
speed for resolution. ADC0 also has an autonomous low-power burst mode which can automatically
enable ADC0, capture and accumulate samples, then place ADC0 in a low power shutdown mode without
CPU intervention. It also has a 16-bit accumulator that can automatically oversample and average the
ADC results.
The ADC is fully configurable under software control via several registers. The ADC0 operates in singleended mode and may be configured to measure different signals using the analog multiplexer. The voltage
reference for the ADC is selectable between internal and external reference sources.
ADC0
Input
Selection
Control /
Configuration
P0 Pins (8)
Greater
Than
Less
Than
Window Compare
ADWINT
(Window Interrupt)
P1 Pins (8)
0.5x – 1x
gain
VDD
SAR Analog to
Digital Converter
Accumulator
GND
ADC0
ADINT
(Interrupt Flag)
Internal LDO
Temp
Sensor
ADBUSY (On Demand)
Timer 0 Overflow
1.65 V /
2.4 V
Reference
Internal LDO
VDD
VREF
Timer 2 Overflow
Timer 3 Overflow
CNVSTR (External Pin)
Trigger
Selection
Reference
Selection
Device Ground
AGND
SYSCLK
Clock
Divider
SAR clock
Figure 14.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram
Rev. 1.0
85
14.1. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer
ADC0 on C8051F85x/86x has an analog multiplexer capable of selecting any pin on ports P0 and P1 (up
to 16 total), the on-chip temperature sensor, the internal regulated supply, the VDD supply, or GND. ADC0
input channels are selected using the ADC0MX register.
Table 14.1. ADC0 Input Multiplexer Channels
ADC0MX setting
Signal Name
QSOP24 Pin Name
QFN20 Pin Name
SOIC16 Pin Name
00000
ADC0.0
P0.0
P0.0
P0.0
00001
ADC0.1
P0.1
P0.1
P0.1
00010
ADC0.2
P0.2
P0.2
P0.2
00011
ADC0.3
P0.3
P0.3
P0.3
00100
ADC0.4
P0.4
P0.4
P0.4
00101
ADC0.5
P0.5
P0.5
P0.5
00110
ADC0.6
P0.6
P0.6
P0.6
00111
ADC0.7
P0.7
P0.7
P0.7
01000
ADC0.8
P1.0
P1.0
P1.0
01001
ADC0.9
P1.1
P1.1
P1.1
01010
ADC0.10
P1.2
P1.2
P1.2
01011
ADC0.11
P1.3
P1.3
P1.3
01100
ADC0.12
P1.4
P1.4
Reserved
01101
ADC0.13
P1.5
P1.5
Reserved
01110
ADC0.14
P1.6
P1.6
Reserved
01111
ADC0.15
P1.7
Reserved
Reserved
10000
Temp Sensor
Internal Temperature Sensor
10001
LDO
Internal 1.8 V LDO Output
10010
VDD
VDD Supply Pin
10011
GND
GND Supply Pin
10100-11111
None
No connection
86
Rev. 1.0
Important note about ADC0 input configuration: Port pins selected as ADC0 inputs should be configured as
analog inputs, and should be skipped by the crossbar. To configure a Port pin for analog input, set to 0 the
corresponding bit in register PnMDIN and disable the digital driver (PnMDOUT = 0 and Port Latch = 1). To
force the crossbar to skip a Port pin, set to 1 the corresponding bit in register PnSKIP.
Rev. 1.0
87
14.2. ADC Operation
The ADC is clocked by an adjustable conversion clock (SARCLK). SARCLK is a divided version of the
selected system clock when burst mode is disabled (ADBMEN = 0), or a divided version of the highfrequency oscillator when burst mode is enabled (ADBMEN = 1). The clock divide value is determined by
the ADSC bits in the ADC0CF register. In most applications, SARCLK should be adjusted to operate as
fast as possible, without exceeding the maximum electrical specifications. The SARCLK does not directly
determine sampling times or sampling rates.
14.2.1. Starting a Conversion
A conversion can be initiated in many ways, depending on the programmed states of the ADC0 Start of
Conversion Mode field (ADCM) in register ADC0CN0. Conversions may be initiated by one of the
following:
1. Writing a 1 to the ADBUSY bit of register ADC0CN0 (software-triggered)
2. A timer overflow (see the ADC0CN0 register and the timer section for timer options)
3. A rising edge on the CNVSTR input signal (external pin-triggered)
Writing a 1 to ADBUSY provides software control of ADC0 whereby conversions are performed "ondemand". All other trigger sources occur autonomous to code execution. When the conversion is
complete, the ADC posts the result to its output register and sets the ADC interrupt flag (ADINT). ADINT
may be used to trigger a system interrupts, if enabled, or polled by firmware.
During conversion, the ADBUSY bit is set to logic 1 and reset to logic 0 when the conversion is complete.
However, when polling for ADC conversion completions, the ADC0 interrupt flag (ADINT) should be used
instead of the ADBUSY bit. Converted data is available in the ADC0 data registers, ADC0H:ADC0L, when
the conversion is complete.
Important Note About Using CNVSTR: When the CNVSTR input is used as the ADC0 conversion
source, the associated port pin should be skipped in the crossbar settings.
14.2.2. Tracking Modes
Each ADC0 conversion must be preceded by a minimum tracking time in order for the converted result to
be accurate. The minimum tracking time is given in the electrical specifications tables. The ADTM bit in
register ADC0CN0 controls the ADC0 track-and-hold mode. In its default state when Burst Mode is
disabled, the ADC0 input is continuously tracked, except when a conversion is in progress. A conversion
will begin immediately when the start-of-conversion trigger occurs.
When the ADTM bit is logic 1, each conversion is preceded by a tracking period of 4 SAR clocks (after the
start-of-conversion signal) for any internal (non-CNVSTR) conversion trigger source. When the CNVSTR
signal is used to initiate conversions with ADTM set to 1, ADC0 tracks only when CNVSTR is low;
conversion begins on the rising edge of CNVSTR (see Figure 14.2). Setting ADTM to 1 is primarily useful
when AMUX settings are frequently changed and conversions are started using the ADBUSY bit.
88
Rev. 1.0
A. ADC0 Timing for External Trigger Source
CNVSTR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14
SAR Clocks
ADTM=1
ADTM=0
Low Power
or Convert
Track
Track or Convert
Convert
Low Power
Mode
Convert
Track
B. ADC0 Timing for Internal Trigger Source
Write '1' to ADBUSY,
Timer Overflow
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
SAR
Clocks
ADTM=1
Low Power
or Convert
Track
1
2
3
4
Convert
5
6
7
8
Low Power Mode
9 10 11 12 13 14
SAR
Clocks
ADTM=0
Track or
Convert
Convert
Track
Figure 14.2. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing (ADBMEN = 0)
14.2.3. Burst Mode
Burst Mode is a power saving feature that allows ADC0 to remain in a low power state between
conversions. When Burst Mode is enabled, ADC0 wakes from a low power state, accumulates 1, 4, 8, 16,
32, or 64 samples using the internal low-power high-frequency oscillator, then re-enters a low power state.
Since the Burst Mode clock is independent of the system clock, ADC0 can perform multiple conversions
then enter a low power state within a single system clock cycle, even if the system clock is slow (e.g.
80 kHz).
Burst Mode is enabled by setting ADBMEN to logic 1. When in Burst Mode, ADEN controls the ADC0 idle
power state (i.e. the state ADC0 enters when not tracking or performing conversions). If ADEN is set to
logic 0, ADC0 is powered down after each burst. If ADEN is set to logic 1, ADC0 remains enabled after
each burst. On each convert start signal, ADC0 is awakened from its Idle Power State. If ADC0 is powered
down, it will automatically power up and wait the programmable Power-Up Time controlled by the ADPWR
bits. Otherwise, ADC0 will start tracking and converting immediately. Figure 14.3 shows an example of
Burst Mode Operation with a slow system clock and a repeat count of 4.
When Burst Mode is enabled, a single convert start will initiate a number of conversions equal to the repeat
count. When Burst Mode is disabled, a convert start is required to initiate each conversion. In both modes,
the ADC0 End of Conversion Interrupt Flag (ADINT) will be set after “repeat count” conversions have been
accumulated. Similarly, the Window Comparator will not compare the result to the greater-than and lessthan registers until “repeat count” conversions have been accumulated.
Rev. 1.0
89
In Burst Mode, tracking is determined by the settings in ADPWR and ADTK. Settling time requirements
may need adjustment in some applications. Refer to “14.2.4. Settling Time Requirements” on page 90 for
more details.
Notes:
Setting
ADTM to 1 will insert an additional 4 SAR clocks of tracking before each conversion,
regardless of the settings of ADPWR and ADTK.
When using Burst Mode, care must be taken to issue a convert start signal no faster than once
every four SYSCLK periods. This includes external convert start signals. The ADC will ignore
convert start signals which arrive before a burst is finished.
S yste m C lo ck
C o n ve rt S ta rt
ADTM = 1
ADEN = 0
P o w e re d
Down
P o w e r-U p
a n d T ra ck
T
4
ADTM = 0
ADEN = 0
P o w e re d
Down
P o w e r-U p
a n d T ra ck
C
C
T
T
C
T
4
C
T
T
C
ADPW R
T
4
T
C
T
T
4
C
C
P o w e re d
Down
P o w e re d
Down
P o w e r-U p
a n d T ra ck
T C ..
P o w e r-U p
a n d T ra ck
T C ..
ADTK
T = T ra ckin g se t b y A D T K
T 4 = T ra ckin g se t b y A D T M (4 S A R clo cks )
C = C o n ve rtin g
Figure 14.3. Burst Mode Tracking Example with Repeat Count Set to 4
14.2.4. Settling Time Requirements
A minimum amount of tracking time is required before each conversion can be performed, to allow the
sampling capacitor voltage to settle. This tracking time is determined by the AMUX0 resistance, the ADC0
sampling capacitance, any external source resistance, and the accuracy required for the conversion. Note
that when ADTM is set to 1, four SAR clocks are used for tracking at the start of every conversion. Large
external source impedance will increase the required tracking time.
Figure 14.4 shows the equivalent ADC0 input circuit. The required ADC0 settling time for a given settling
accuracy (SA) may be approximated by Equation 14.1. When measuring any internal source, RTOTAL
reduces to RMUX. See the electrical specification tables for ADC0 minimum settling time requirements as
well as the mux impedance and sampling capacitor values.
n
2
t = ln ------- R TOTAL C SAMPLE
SA
Equation 14.1. ADC0 Settling Time Requirements
Where:
SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB)
t is the required settling time in seconds
RTOTAL is the sum of the AMUX0 resistance and any external source resistance.
90
Rev. 1.0
n is the ADC resolution in bits (8/10/12).
MUX Select
P0.x
R MUX
C SAMPLE
RCInput= R MUX * C SAMPLE
Note: The value of CSAMPLE depends on the PGA Gain. See electrical specifications for details.
Figure 14.4. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits
14.2.5. Gain Setting
The ADC has gain settings of 1x and 0.5x. In 1x mode, the full scale reading of the ADC is determined
directly by VREF. In 0.5x mode, the full-scale reading of the ADC occurs when the input voltage is
VREF x 2. The 0.5x gain setting can be useful to obtain a higher input voltage range when using a small
VREF voltage, or to measure input voltages that are between VREF and VDD. Gain settings for the ADC
are controlled by the ADGN bit in register ADC0CF. Note that even with a gain setting of 0.5, voltages
above the supply rail cannot be measured directly by the ADC.
14.3. 8-Bit Mode
Setting the ADC08BE bit in register ADC0CF to 1 will put the ADC in 8-bit mode. In 8-bit mode, only the
8 MSBs of data are converted, allowing the conversion to be completed in fewer SAR clock cycles than a
10-bit conversion. The two LSBs of a conversion are always 00 in this mode, and the ADC0L register will
always read back 0x00.
14.4. 12-Bit Mode
When configured for 12-bit conversions, the ADC performs four 10-bit conversions using four different
reference voltages and combines the results into a single 12-bit value. Unlike simple averaging
techniques, this method provides true 12-bit resolution of AC or DC input signals without depending on
noise to provide dithering. The converter also employs a hardware dynamic element matching algorithm
that reconfigures the largest elements of the internal DAC for each of the four 10-bit conversions. This
reconfiguration cancels any matching errors and enables the converter to achieve 12-bit linearity
performance to go along with its 12-bit resolution.
The 12-bit mode is enabled by setting the AD12BE bit in register ADC0AC to logic 1 and configuring the
ADC in burst mode (ADBMEN = 1) for four or more conversions. The conversion can be initiated using any
of the conversion start sources, and the 12-bit result will appear in the ADC0H and ADC0L registers. Since
the 12-bit result is formed from a combination of four 10-bit results, the maximum output value is 4 x (1023)
= 4092, rather than the max value of (2^12 – 1) = 4095 that is produced by a traditional 12-bit converter. To
further increase resolution, the burst mode repeat value may be configured to any multiple of four
conversions. For example, if a repeat value of 16 is selected, the ADC0 output will be a 14-bit number
(sum of four 12-bit numbers) with 13 effective bits of resolution.
The AD12SM bit in register ADC0TK controls when the ADC will track and sample the input signal. When
AD12SM is set to 1, the selected input signal will be tracked before the first conversion of a set and held
internally during all four conversions. When AD12SM is cleared to 0, the ADC will track and sample the
selected input before each of the four conversions in a set. When maximum throughput (180-200 ksps) is
Rev. 1.0
91
needed, it is recommended that AD12SM be set to 1 and ADTK to 0x3F, and that the ADC be placed in
always-on mode (ADEN = 1). For sample rates under 180 ksps, or when accumulating multiple samples,
AD12SM should normally be cleared to 0, and ADTK should be configured to provide the appropriate
settling time for the subsequent conversions.
14.5. Power Considerations
The ADC has several power-saving features which can help the user optimize power consumption
according to the needs of the application. The most efficient way to use the ADC for slower sample rates is
by using burst mode. Burst mode dynamically controls power to the ADC and (if used) the internal voltage
reference. By completely powering off these circuits when the ADC is not tracking or converting, the
average supply current required for lower sampling rates is reduced significantly.
The ADC also provides low power options that allow reduction in operating current when operating at low
SAR clock frequencies or with longer tracking times. The internal common-mode buffer can be configured
for low power mode by setting the ADLPM bit in ADC0PWR to 1. Two other fields in the ADC0PWR
register (ADBIAS and ADMXLP) may be used together to adjust the power consumed by the ADC and its
multiplexer and reference buffers, respectively. In general, these options are used together, when
operating with a SAR conversion clock frequency of 4 MHz.
Table 14.2. ADC0 Optimal Power Configuration (8- and 10-bit Mode)
Required
Throughput
Reference Source Mode Configuration
SAR Clock Speed
Other Register Field
Settings
325-800 ksps
Any
Always-On
(ADEN = 1
ADBMEN = 0)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x40
ADC0TK = N/A
ADRPT = 0
0-325 ksps
External
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 0
ADBMEN = 1)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x44
ADC0TK = 0x3A
ADRPT = 0
250-325 ksps
Internal
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 0
ADBMEN = 1)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x44
ADC0TK = 0x3A
ADRPT = 0
200-250 ksps
Internal
Always-On
(ADEN = 1
ADBMEN = 0)
4.08 MHz
(ADSC = 5)
ADC0PWR = 0xF0
ADC0TK = N/A
ADRPT = 0
0-200 ksps
Internal
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 0
ADBMEN = 1)
4.08 MHz
(ADSC = 5)
ADC0PWR = 0xF4
ADC0TK = 0x34
ADRPT = 0
Notes:
1. For always-on configuration, ADSC settings assume SYSCLK is the internal 24.5 MHz high-frequency oscillator.
Adjust ADSC as needed if using a different source for SYSCLK.
2. ADRPT reflects the minimum setting for this bit field. When using the ADC in Burst Mode, up to 64 samples may be
auto-accumulated per conversion start by adjusting ADRPT.
92
Rev. 1.0
Table 14.3. ADC0 Optimal Power Configuration (12-bit Mode)
Required
Throughput
Reference Source Mode Configuration
SAR Clock Speed
Other Register Field
Settings
Any
Always-On +
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 1
ADBMEN = 1)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x40
ADC0TK = 0xBF
ADRPT = 1
125-180 ksps
Any
Always-On +
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 1
ADBMEN = 1)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x40
ADC0TK = 0x3A
ADRPT = 1
0-125 ksps
External
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 0
ADBMEN = 1)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x44
ADC0TK = 0x3A
ADRPT = 1
50-125 ksps
Internal
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 0
ADBMEN = 1)
12.25 MHz
(ADSC = 1)
ADC0PWR = 0x44
ADC0TK = 0x3A
ADRPT = 1
0-50 ksps
Internal
Burst Mode
(ADEN = 0
ADBMEN = 1)
4.08 MHz
(ADSC = 5)
ADC0PWR = 0xF4
ADC0TK = 0x34
ADRPT = 1
180-200 ksps
Note: ADRPT reflects the minimum setting for this bit field. When using the ADC in Burst Mode, up to 64 samples may be
auto-accumulated per conversion trigger by adjusting ADRPT.
For applications where burst mode is used to automatically accumulate multiple results, additional supply
current savings can be realized. The length of time the ADC is active during each burst contains power-up
time at the beginning of the burst as well as the conversion time required for each conversion in the burst.
The power-on time is only required at the beginning of each burst. When compared with single-sample
bursts to collect the same number of conversions, multi-sample bursts will consume significantly less
power. For example, performing an eight-cycle burst of 10-bt conversions consumes about 61% of the
power required to perform those same eight samples in single-cycle bursts. For 12-bit conversions, an
eight-cycle burst results in about 85% of the equivalent single-cycle bursts. Figure 14.5 shows this
relationship for the different burst cycle lengths.
See the Electrical Characteristics chapter for details on power consumption and the maximum clock
frequencies allowed in each mode.
Rev. 1.0
93
10ͲBitBurstModePower
12ͲBitBurstModePower
100%
AverageCurrentComparedtoSingleͲCycle
AverageCurrentComparedtoSingleͲCycle
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
55%
50%
98%
96%
94%
92%
90%
88%
86%
84%
82%
80%
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
1
NumberofCyclesAccumulatedinBurst
2
4
8
NumberofCyclesAccumulatedinBurst
Figure 14.5. Burst Mode Accumulation Power Savings
14.6. Output Code Formatting
The registers ADC0H and ADC0L contain the high and low bytes of the output conversion code from the
ADC at the completion of each conversion. Data can be right-justified or left-justified, depending on the
setting of the ADSJST field. When the repeat count is set to 1 in 10-bit mode, conversion codes are
represented as 10-bit unsigned integers. Inputs are measured from 0 to VREF x 1023/1024. Example
codes are shown below for both right-justified and left-justified data. Unused bits in the ADC0H and ADC0L
registers are set to 0.
Input Voltage
Right-Justified
Left-Justified
ADC0H:ADC0L (ADSJST = 000)
ADC0H:ADC0L (ADSJST = 100)
VREF x 1023/1024
0x03FF
0xFFC0
VREF x 512/1024
0x0200
0x8000
VREF x 256/1024
0x0100
0x4000
0
0x0000
0x0000
When the repeat count is greater than 1, the output conversion code represents the accumulated result of
the conversions performed and is updated after the last conversion in the series is finished. Sets of 4, 8,
16, 32, or 64 consecutive samples can be accumulated and represented in unsigned integer format. The
repeat count can be selected using the ADRPT bits in the ADC0AC register. When a repeat count is higher
than 1, the ADC output must be right-justified (ADSJST = 0xx); unused bits in the ADC0H and ADC0L
registers are set to 0. The example below shows the right-justified result for various input voltages and
repeat counts. Notice that accumulating 2n samples is equivalent to left-shifting by n bit positions when all
samples returned from the ADC have the same value.
Input Voltage
Repeat Count = 4
Repeat Count = 16
Repeat Count = 64
VREF x 1023/1024
0x0FFC
0x3FF0
0xFFC0
VREF x 512/1024
0x0800
0x2000
0x8000
VREF x 511/1024
0x07FC
0x1FF0
0x7FC0
0
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
94
Rev. 1.0
16
The ADSJST bits can be used to format the contents of the 16-bit accumulator. The accumulated result
can be shifted right by 1, 2, or 3 bit positions. Based on the principles of oversampling and averaging, the
effective ADC resolution increases by 1 bit each time the oversampling rate is increased by a factor of 4.
The example below shows how to increase the effective ADC resolution by 1, 2, and 3 bits to obtain an
effective ADC resolution of 11-bit, 12-bit, or 13-bit respectively without CPU intervention.
Input Voltage
Repeat Count = 4
Repeat Count = 16
Repeat Count = 64
Shift Right = 1
Shift Right = 2
Shift Right = 3
11-Bit Result
12-Bit Result
13-Bit Result
VREF x 1023/1024
0x07F7
0x0FFC
0x1FF8
VREF x 512/1024
0x0400
0x0800
0x1000
VREF x 511/1024
0x03FE
0x04FC
0x0FF8
0
0x0000
0x0000
0x0000
14.7. Programmable Window Detector
The ADC Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC0 output registers to userprogrammed limits, and notifies the system when a desired condition is detected. This is especially
effective in an interrupt-driven system, saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster
system response times. The window detector interrupt flag (ADWINT in register ADC0CN0) can also be
used in polled mode. The ADC0 Greater-Than (ADC0GTH, ADC0GTL) and Less-Than (ADC0LTH,
ADC0LTL) registers hold the comparison values. The window detector flag can be programmed to indicate
when measured data is inside or outside of the user-programmed limits, depending on the contents of the
ADC0 Less-Than and ADC0 Greater-Than registers.
14.7.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode
Figure 14.6
shows
two
example
window
comparisons
for
right-justified
data,
with
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0x0080 (128d) and ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0x0040 (64d). The input voltage can
range from 0 to VREF x (1023/1024) with respect to GND, and is represented by a 10-bit unsigned integer
value. In the left example, an ADWINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion word
(ADC0H:ADC0L) is within the range defined by ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL and ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
(if 0x0040 < ADC0H:ADC0L < 0x0080). In the right example, and ADWINT interrupt will be generated if
the ADC0 conversion word is outside of the range defined by the ADC0GT and ADC0LT registers
(if ADC0H:ADC0L < 0x0040 or ADC0H:ADC0L > 0x0080). Figure 14.7 shows an example using leftjustified data with the same comparison values.
Rev. 1.0
95
ADC0H:ADC0L
ADC0H:ADC0L
Input Voltage
(Px.x - GND)
VREF x (1023/
1024)
Input Voltage
(Px.x - GND)
VREF x (1023/
1024)
0x03FF
0x03FF
ADWINT
not affected
ADWINT=1
0x0081
VREF x (128/1024)
0x0080
0x007F
0x0081
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
VREF x (128/1024)
0x0080
0x007F
ADWINT=1
VREF x (64/1024)
0x0041
0x0040
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
VREF x (64/1024)
0x003F
0x0041
0x0040
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
ADWINT
not affected
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
0x003F
ADWINT=1
ADWINT
not affected
0x0000
0
0
0x0000
Figure 14.6. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Single-Ended Data
ADC0H:ADC0L
ADC0H:ADC0L
Input Voltage
(Px.x - GND)
VREF x (1023/
1024)
Input Voltage
(Px.x - GND)
VREF x (1023/
1024)
0xFFC0
0xFFC0
ADWINT
not affected
ADWINT=1
0x2040
VREF x (128/1024)
0x2000
0x1FC0
0x2040
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
VREF x (128/1024)
0x2000
0x1FC0
ADWINT=1
0x1040
VREF x (64/1024)
0x1000
0x1040
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
VREF x (64/1024)
0x0FC0
0x1000
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL
ADWINT
not affected
ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL
0x0FC0
ADWINT=1
ADWINT
not affected
0
0x0000
0
0x0000
Figure 14.7. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Single-Ended Data
96
Rev. 1.0
14.8. Voltage and Ground Reference Options
The voltage reference multiplexer is configurable to use an externally connected voltage reference, the
internal voltage reference, or one of two power supply voltages. The ground reference mux allows the
ground reference for ADC0 to be selected between the ground pin (GND) or a port pin dedicated to analog
ground (AGND).
The voltage and ground reference options are configured using the REF0CN register.
Important Note About the VREF and AGND Inputs: Port pins are used as the external VREF and AGND
inputs. When using an external voltage reference, VREF should be configured as an analog input and
skipped by the digital crossbar. When using AGND as the ground reference to ADC0, AGND should be
configured as an analog input and skipped by the Digital Crossbar.
14.8.1. External Voltage Reference
To use an external voltage reference, REFSL should be set to 00. Bypass capacitors should be added as
recommended by the manufacturer of the external voltage reference. If the manufacturer does not provide
recommendations, a 4.7uF in parallel with a 0.1uF capacitor is recommended.
14.8.2. Internal Voltage Reference
For applications requiring the maximum number of port I/O pins, or very short VREF turn-on time, the highspeed reference will be the best internal reference option to choose. The internal reference is selected by
setting REFSL to 11. When selected, the internal reference will be automatically enabled/disabled on an
as-needed basis by the ADC. The reference can be set to one of two voltage values: 1.65 V or 2.4 V,
depending on the value of the IREFLVL bit.
For applications with a non-varying power supply voltage, using the power supply as the voltage reference
can provide the ADC with added dynamic range at the cost of reduced power supply noise rejection. To
use the external supply pin (VDD) or the 1.8 V regulated digital supply voltage as the reference source,
REFSL should be set to 01 or 10, respectively.
Internal reference sources are not routed to the VREF pin, and do not require external capacitors. The
electrical specifications tables detail SAR clock and throughput limitations for each reference source.
14.8.3. Analog Ground Reference
To prevent ground noise generated by switching digital logic from affecting sensitive analog
measurements, a separate analog ground reference option is available. When enabled, the ground
reference for the ADC during both the tracking/sampling and the conversion periods is taken from the
AGND pin. Any external sensors sampled by the ADC should be referenced to the AGND pin. If an
external voltage reference is used, the AGND pin should be connected to the ground of the external
reference and its associated decoupling capacitor. The separate analog ground reference option is
enabled by setting GNDSL to 1. Note that when sampling the internal temperature sensor, the internal chip
ground is always used for the sampling operation, regardless of the setting of the GNDSL bit. Similarly,
whenever the internal 1.65 V high-speed reference is selected, the internal chip ground is always used
during the conversion period, regardless of the setting of the GNDSL bit.
Rev. 1.0
97
14.9. Temperature Sensor
An on-chip temperature sensor is included, which can be directly accessed via the ADC multiplexer in
single-ended configuration. To use the ADC to measure the temperature sensor, the ADC mux channel
should select the temperature sensor. The temperature sensor transfer function is shown in Figure 14.8.
The output voltage (VTEMP) is the positive ADC input when the ADC multiplexer is set correctly. The
TEMPE bit in register REF0CN enables/disables the temperature sensor. While disabled, the temperature
sensor defaults to a high impedance state and any ADC measurements performed on the sensor will result
in meaningless data. Refer to the electrical specification tables for the slope and offset parameters of the
temperature sensor.
VTEMP = (Slope x TempC) + Offset
TempC = (VTEMP - Offset) / Slope
Voltage
Slope (V / deg C)
Offset (V at 0 Celsius)
Temperature
Figure 14.8. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function
14.9.1. Calibration
The uncalibrated temperature sensor output is extremely linear and suitable for relative temperature
measurements. For absolute temperature measurements, offset and/or gain calibration is recommended.
Typically a 1-point (offset) calibration includes the following steps:
1. Control/measure the ambient temperature (this temperature must be known).
2. Power the device, and delay for a few seconds to allow for self-heating.
3. Perform an ADC conversion with the temperature sensor selected as the ADC input.
4. Calculate the offset characteristics, and store this value in non-volatile memory for use with
subsequent temperature sensor measurements.
98
Rev. 1.0
14.10. ADC Control Registers
Register 14.1. ADC0CN0: ADC0 Control 0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
ADEN
ADBMEN
ADINT
ADBUSY
ADWINT
ADCM
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE8 (bit-addressable)
Table 14.4. ADC0CN0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
ADEN
Function
Enable.
0: ADC0 Disabled (low-power shutdown).
1: ADC0 Enabled (active and ready for data conversions).
6
ADBMEN
Burst Mode Enable.
0: ADC0 Burst Mode Disabled.
1: ADC0 Burst Mode Enabled.
5
ADINT
Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware upon completion of a data conversion (ADBMEN=0), or a burst of conversions (ADBMEN=1). Can trigger an interrupt. Must be cleared by software.
4
ADBUSY
ADC Busy.
Writing 1 to this bit initiates an ADC conversion when ADC0CM = 000. This bit should not
be polled to indicate when a conversion is complete. Instead, the ADINT bit should be
used when polling for conversion completion.
3
ADWINT
Window Compare Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware when the contents of ADC0H:ADC0L fall within the window specified by
ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL and ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL. Can trigger an interrupt. Must be
cleared by software.
2:0
ADCM
Start of Conversion Mode Select.
Specifies the ADC0 start of conversion source. All remaining bit combinations are
reserved.
000: ADC0 conversion initiated on write of 1 to ADBUSY.
001: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 0.
010: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 2.
011: ADC0 conversion initiated on overflow of Timer 3.
100: ADC0 conversion initiated on rising edge of CNVSTR.
101-111: Reserved.
Rev. 1.0
99
Register 14.2. ADC0CN1: ADC0 Control 1
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
ADCMBE
Type
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xB2
Table 14.5. ADC0CN1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:1
Reserved
Must write reset value.
0
ADCMBE
Common Mode Buffer Enable.
0: Disable the common mode buffer. This setting should be used only if the tracking time
of the signal is greater than 1.5 us.
1: Enable the common mode buffer. This setting should be used in most cases, and will
give the best dynamic ADC performance. The common mode buffer must be enabled if
signal tracking time is less than or equal to 1.5 us.
100
Rev. 1.0
Register 14.3. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ADSC
AD8BE
ADTM
ADGN
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
0
0
0
Reset
1
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xBC
Table 14.6. ADC0CF Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:3
ADSC
Function
SAR Clock Divider.
This field sets the ADC clock divider value. It should be configured to be as close to the
maximum SAR clock speed as the datasheet will allow. The SAR clock frequency is
given by the following equation:
F ADCCLK
F CLKSAR = -----------------------ADSC + 1
FADCCLK is equal to the selected SYSCLK when ADBMEN is 0 and the high-frequency
oscillator when ADBMEN is 1.
2
AD8BE
8-Bit Mode Enable.
0: ADC0 operates in 10-bit or 12-bit mode (normal operation).
1: ADC0 operates in 8-bit mode.
1
ADTM
Track Mode.
Selects between Normal or Delayed Tracking Modes.
0: Normal Track Mode. When ADC0 is enabled, conversion begins immediately following
the start-of-conversion signal.
1: Delayed Track Mode. When ADC0 is enabled, conversion begins 4 SAR clock cycles
following the start-of-conversion signal. The ADC is allowed to track during this time.
0
ADGN
Gain Control.
0: The on-chip PGA gain is 0.5.
1: The on-chip PGA gain is 1.
Rev. 1.0
101
Register 14.4. ADC0AC: ADC0 Accumulator Configuration
Bit
7
6
5
Name
AD12BE
ADAE
ADSJST
ADRPT
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xB3
Table 14.7. ADC0AC Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
AD12BE
Function
12-Bit Mode Enable.
Enables 12-bit Mode. In 12-bit mode, the ADC throughput is reduced by a factor of 4.
0: 12-bit Mode Disabled.
1: 12-bit Mode Enabled.
6
ADAE
Accumulate Enable.
Enables multiple conversions to be accumulated when burst mode is disabled.
0: ADC0H:ADC0L contain the result of the latest conversion when Burst Mode is disabled.
1: ADC0H:ADC0L contain the accumulated conversion results when Burst Mode is disabled. Software must write 0x0000 to ADC0H:ADC0L to clear the accumulated result.
5:3
ADSJST
Accumulator Shift and Justify.
Specifies the format of data read from ADC0H:ADC0L. All remaining bit combinations
are reserved.
000: Right justified. No shifting applied.
001: Right justified. Shifted right by 1 bit.
010: Right justified. Shifted right by 2 bits.
011: Right justified. Shifted right by 3 bits.
100: Left justified. No shifting applied.
101-111: Reserved.
2:0
ADRPT
Repeat Count.
Selects the number of conversions to perform and accumulate in Burst Mode. This bit
field must be set to 000 if Burst Mode is disabled.
000: Perform and Accumulate 1 conversion (not used in 12-bit mode).
001: Perform and Accumulate 4 conversions (1 conversion in 12-bit mode).
010: Perform and Accumulate 8 conversions (2 conversions in 12-bit mode).
011: Perform and Accumulate 16 conversions (4 conversions in 12-bit mode).
100: Perform and Accumulate 32 conversions (8 conversions in 12-bit mode).
101: Perform and Accumulate 64 conversions (16 conversions in 12-bit mode).
110-111: Reserved.
102
Rev. 1.0
Register 14.5. ADC0PWR: ADC0 Power Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
ADBIAS
ADMXLP
ADLPM
ADPWR
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
0
0
Reset
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
SFR Address: 0xDF
Table 14.8. ADC0PWR Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:6
ADBIAS
Function
Bias Power Select.
This field can be used to adjust the ADC's power consumption based on the conversion
speed. Higher bias currents allow for faster conversion times.
00: Select bias current mode 0. Recommended to use modes 1, 2, or 3.
01: Select bias current mode 1 (SARCLK <= 16 MHz).
10: Select bias current mode 2.
11: Select bias current mode 3 (SARCLK <= 4 MHz).
5
ADMXLP
Mux and Reference Low Power Mode Enable.
Enables low power mode operation for the multiplexer and voltage reference buffers.
0: Low power mode disabled.
1: Low power mode enabled (SAR clock < 4 MHz).
4
ADLPM
Low Power Mode Enable.
This bit can be used to reduce power to the ADC's internal common mode buffer. It can
be set to 1 to reduce power when tracking times in the application are longer (slower
sample rates).
0: Disable low power mode.
1: Enable low power mode (requires extended tracking time).
3:0
ADPWR
Burst Mode Power Up Time.
This field sets the time delay allowed for the ADC to power up from a low power state.
When ADTM is set, an additional 4 SARCLKs are added to this time.
ADPWR
T PWRTIME = 8-----------------------------F HFOSC
Rev. 1.0
103
Register 14.6. ADC0TK: ADC0 Burst Mode Track Time
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
AD12SM
Reserved
ADTK
Type
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
1
3
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
SFR Address: 0xB9
Table 14.9. ADC0TK Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
AD12SM
Function
12-Bit Sampling Mode.
This bit controls the way that the ADC samples the input when in 12-bit mode. When the
ADC is configured for multiple 12-bit conversions in burst mode, the AD12SM bit should
be cleared to 0.
0: The ADC will re-track and sample the input four times during a 12-bit conversion.
1: The ADC will sample the input once at the beginning of each 12-bit conversion. The
ADTK field can be set to 63 to maximize throughput.
6
Reserved
5:0
ADTK
Must write reset value.
Burst Mode Tracking Time.
This field sets the time delay between consecutive conversions performed in Burst
Mode. When ADTM is set, an additional 4 SARCLKs are added to this time.
– ADTKT BMTK = 64
--------------------------F HFOSC
The Burst Mode track delay is not inserted prior to the first conversion. The required
tracking time for the first conversion should be defined with the ADPWR field.
104
Rev. 1.0
Register 14.7. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ADC0H
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xBE
Table 14.10. ADC0H Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ADC0H
Function
Data Word High Byte.
When read, this register returns the most significant byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator
formatted according to the settings in ADSJST. The register may also be written to set
the upper byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator.
Note: If accumulator shifting is enabled, the most significant bits of the value read will be zeros. This register should not be
written when the SYNC bit is set to 1.
Rev. 1.0
105
Register 14.8. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ADC0L
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xBD
Table 14.11. ADC0L Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ADC0L
Function
Data Word Low Byte.
When read, this register returns the least significant byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator, formatted according to the settings in ADSJST. The register may also be written, to
set the lower byte of the 16-bit ADC0 accumulator.
Note: If Accumulator shifting is enabled, the most significant bits of the value read will be zeros. This register should not be
written when the SYNC bit is set to 1.
106
Rev. 1.0
Register 14.9. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ADC0GTH
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xC4
Table 14.12. ADC0GTH Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ADC0GTH
Function
Greater-Than High Byte.
Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit Greater-Than window compare register.
Rev. 1.0
107
Register 14.10. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ADC0GTL
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xC3
Table 14.13. ADC0GTL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ADC0GTL
Function
Greater-Than Low Byte.
Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit Greater-Than window compare register.
Note: In 8-bit mode, this register should be set to 0x00.
108
Rev. 1.0
Register 14.11. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ADC0LTH
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC6
Table 14.14. ADC0LTH Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ADC0LTH
Function
Less-Than High Byte.
Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit Less-Than window compare register.
Rev. 1.0
109
Register 14.12. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ADC0LTL
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC5
Table 14.15. ADC0LTL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ADC0LTL
Function
Less-Than Low Byte.
Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit Less-Than window compare register.
Note: In 8-bit mode, this register should be set to 0x00.
110
Rev. 1.0
Register 14.13. ADC0MX: ADC0 Multiplexer Selection
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
Reserved
ADC0MX
Type
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
SFR Address: 0xBB
Table 14.16. ADC0MX Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:5
Reserved
Must write reset value.
4:0
ADC0MX
AMUX0 Positive Input Selection.
Selects the positive input channel for ADC0. For reserved bit combinations, no input is
selected.
00000: ADC0.0
00001: ADC0.1
00010: ADC0.2
00011: ADC0.3
00100: ADC0.4
00101: ADC0.5
00110: ADC0.6
00111: ADC0.7
01000: ADC0.8
01001: ADC0.9
01010: ADC0.10
01011: ADC0.11
01100: ADC0.12
01101: ADC0.13
01110: ADC0.14
01111: ADC0.15
10000: Temperature sensor.
10001: Internal LDO regulator output.
10010: VDD
10011: GND
10100-11111: Reserved.
Rev. 1.0
111
Register 14.14. REF0CN: Voltage Reference Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
IREFLVL
Reserved
GNDSL
REFSL
TEMPE
Reserved
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
RW
R
Reset
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
1
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD1
Table 14.17. REF0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
IREFLVL
Function
Internal Voltage Reference Level.
Sets the voltage level for the internal reference source.
0: The internal reference operates at 1.65 V nominal.
1: The internal reference operates at 2.4 V nominal.
6
Reserved
5
GNDSL
Must write reset value.
Analog Ground Reference.
Selects the ADC0 ground reference.
0: The ADC0 ground reference is the GND pin.
1: The ADC0 ground reference is the AGND pin.
4:3
REFSL
Voltage Reference Select.
Selects the ADC0 voltage reference.
00: The ADC0 voltage reference is the VREF pin.
01: The ADC0 voltage reference is the VDD pin.
10: The ADC0 voltage reference is the internal 1.8 V digital supply voltage.
11: The ADC0 voltage reference is the internal voltage reference.
2
TEMPE
Temperature Sensor Enable.
Enables/Disables the internal temperature sensor.
0: Temperature Sensor Disabled.
1: Temperature Sensor Enabled.
1:0
112
Reserved
Must write reset value.
Rev. 1.0
0
15. CIP-51 Microcontroller Core
The C8051F85x/86x uses the CIP-51 microcontroller. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the MCS-51™
instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop software. The MCU
family has a superset of all the peripherals included with a standard 8051. The CIP-51 also includes onchip debug hardware and interfaces directly with the analog and digital subsystems providing a complete
data acquisition or control-system solution in a single integrated circuit.
The CIP-51 Microcontroller core implements the standard 8051 organization and peripherals as well as
additional custom peripherals and functions to extend its capability (see Figure 15.1 for a block diagram).
The CIP-51 includes the following features:
Fully
Reset
Compatible with MCS-51 Instruction Set
25 MIPS Peak Throughput with 25 MHz Clock
0 to 25 MHz Clock Frequency
Extended Interrupt Handler
Input
Power Management Modes
On-chip Debug Logic
Program and Data Memory Security
15.1. Performance
The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the
standard 8051 architecture. The CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock
cycles, with no instructions taking more than eight system clock cycles.
D8
D8
ACCUMULATOR
STACK POINTER
TMP1
TMP2
SRAM
ADDRESS
REGISTER
PSW
D8
D8
D8
ALU
SRAM
D8
DATA BUS
B REGISTER
D8
D8
D8
DATA BUS
DATA BUS
SFR_ADDRESS
BUFFER
D8
D8
DATA POINTER
D8
SFR
BUS
INTERFACE
SFR_CONTROL
SFR_WRITE_DATA
SFR_READ_DATA
DATA BUS
PC INCREMENTER
PROGRAM COUNTER (PC)
PRGM. ADDRESS REG.
MEM_ADDRESS
D8
MEM_CONTROL
A16
MEMORY
INTERFACE
MEM_WRITE_DATA
MEM_READ_DATA
PIPELINE
RESET
D8
CONTROL
LOGIC
SYSTEM_IRQs
CLOCK
D8
STOP
IDLE
POWER CONTROL
REGISTER
INTERRUPT
INTERFACE
EMULATION_IRQ
D8
Figure 15.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram
With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. The CIP-51 has
a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that require each
execution time.
Clocks to Execute
1
2
2/3
Rev. 1.0
3
3/4
4
4/5
5
8
113
Number of Instructions
26
50
5
14
7
3
1
2
15.2. Programming and Debugging Support
In-system programming of the flash program memory and communication with on-chip debug support logic
is accomplished via the Silicon Labs 2-Wire Development Interface (C2).
The on-chip debug support logic facilitates full speed in-circuit debugging, allowing the setting of hardware
breakpoints, starting, stopping and single stepping through program execution (including interrupt service
routines), examination of the program's call stack, and reading/writing the contents of registers and
memory. This method of on-chip debugging is completely non-intrusive, requiring no RAM, Stack, timers,
or other on-chip resources.
The CIP-51 is supported by development tools from Silicon Labs and third party vendors. Silicon Labs
provides an integrated development environment (IDE) including editor, debugger and programmer. The
IDE's debugger and programmer interface to the CIP-51 via the C2 interface to provide fast and efficient
in-system device programming and debugging. Third party macro assemblers and C compilers are also
available.
15.3. Instruction Set
The instruction set of the CIP-51 System Controller is fully compatible with the standard MCS-51™
instruction set. Standard 8051 development tools can be used to develop software for the CIP-51. All CIP51 instructions are the binary and functional equivalent of their MCS-51™ counterparts, including opcodes,
addressing modes and effect on PSW flags. However, instruction timing is different than that of the
standard 8051.
15.3.1. Instruction and CPU Timing
In many 8051 implementations, a distinction is made between machine cycles and clock cycles, with
machine cycles varying from 2 to 12 clock cycles in length. However, the CIP-51 implementation is based
solely on clock cycle timing. All instruction timings are specified in terms of clock cycles.
Due to the pipelined architecture of the CIP-51, most instructions execute in the same number of clock
cycles as there are program bytes in the instruction. Conditional branch instructions take one less clock
cycle to complete when the branch is not taken as opposed to when the branch is taken. Table 15.1 is the
CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary, which includes the mnemonic, number of bytes, and number of clock
cycles for each instruction.
114
Rev. 1.0
1
Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
Arithmetic Operations
ADD A, Rn
Add register to A
1
1
ADD A, direct
Add direct byte to A
2
2
ADD A, @Ri
Add indirect RAM to A
1
2
ADD A, #data
Add immediate to A
2
2
ADDC A, Rn
Add register to A with carry
1
1
ADDC A, direct
Add direct byte to A with carry
2
2
ADDC A, @Ri
Add indirect RAM to A with carry
1
2
ADDC A, #data
Add immediate to A with carry
2
2
SUBB A, Rn
Subtract register from A with borrow
1
1
SUBB A, direct
Subtract direct byte from A with borrow
2
2
SUBB A, @Ri
Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow
1
2
SUBB A, #data
Subtract immediate from A with borrow
2
2
INC A
Increment A
1
1
INC Rn
Increment register
1
1
INC direct
Increment direct byte
2
2
INC @Ri
Increment indirect RAM
1
2
DEC A
Decrement A
1
1
DEC Rn
Decrement register
1
1
DEC direct
Decrement direct byte
2
2
DEC @Ri
Decrement indirect RAM
1
2
INC DPTR
Increment Data Pointer
1
1
MUL AB
Multiply A and B
1
4
DIV AB
Divide A by B
1
8
DA A
Decimal adjust A
1
1
Logical Operations
ANL A, Rn
AND Register to A
1
1
ANL A, direct
AND direct byte to A
2
2
ANL A, @Ri
AND indirect RAM to A
1
2
ANL A, #data
AND immediate to A
2
2
ANL direct, A
AND A to direct byte
2
2
ANL direct, #data
AND immediate to direct byte
3
3
ORL A, Rn
OR Register to A
1
1
ORL A, direct
OR direct byte to A
2
2
ORL A, @Ri
OR indirect RAM to A
1
2
ORL A, #data
OR immediate to A
2
2
ORL direct, A
OR A to direct byte
2
2
ORL direct, #data
OR immediate to direct byte
3
3
Rev. 1.0
115
Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
XRL A, Rn
Exclusive-OR Register to A
1
1
XRL A, direct
Exclusive-OR direct byte to A
2
2
XRL A, @Ri
Exclusive-OR indirect RAM to A
1
2
XRL A, #data
Exclusive-OR immediate to A
2
2
XRL direct, A
Exclusive-OR A to direct byte
2
2
XRL direct, #data
Exclusive-OR immediate to direct byte
3
3
CLR A
Clear A
1
1
CPL A
Complement A
1
1
RL A
Rotate A left
1
1
RLC A
Rotate A left through Carry
1
1
RR A
Rotate A right
1
1
RRC A
Rotate A right through Carry
1
1
SWAP A
Swap nibbles of A
1
1
Data Transfer
MOV A, Rn
Move Register to A
1
1
MOV A, direct
Move direct byte to A
2
2
MOV A, @Ri
Move indirect RAM to A
1
2
MOV A, #data
Move immediate to A
2
2
MOV Rn, A
Move A to Register
1
1
MOV Rn, direct
Move direct byte to Register
2
2
MOV Rn, #data
Move immediate to Register
2
2
MOV direct, A
Move A to direct byte
2
2
MOV direct, Rn
Move Register to direct byte
2
2
MOV direct, direct
Move direct byte to direct byte
3
3
MOV direct, @Ri
Move indirect RAM to direct byte
2
2
MOV direct, #data
Move immediate to direct byte
3
3
MOV @Ri, A
Move A to indirect RAM
1
2
MOV @Ri, direct
Move direct byte to indirect RAM
2
2
MOV @Ri, #data
Move immediate to indirect RAM
2
2
MOV DPTR, #data16
Load DPTR with 16-bit constant
3
3
MOVC A, @A+DPTR
Move code byte relative DPTR to A
1
3
MOVC A, @A+PC
Move code byte relative PC to A
1
3
MOVX A, @Ri
Move external data (8-bit address) to A
1
3
MOVX @Ri, A
Move A to external data (8-bit address)
1
3
MOVX A, @DPTR
Move external data (16-bit address) to A
1
3
MOVX @DPTR, A
Move A to external data (16-bit address)
1
3
PUSH direct
Push direct byte onto stack
2
2
POP direct
Pop direct byte from stack
2
2
116
Rev. 1.0
Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
XCH A, Rn
Exchange Register with A
1
1
XCH A, direct
Exchange direct byte with A
2
2
XCH A, @Ri
Exchange indirect RAM with A
1
2
XCHD A, @Ri
Exchange low nibble of indirect RAM with A
1
2
Boolean Manipulation
CLR C
Clear Carry
1
1
CLR bit
Clear direct bit
2
2
SETB C
Set Carry
1
1
SETB bit
Set direct bit
2
2
CPL C
Complement Carry
1
1
CPL bit
Complement direct bit
2
2
ANL C, bit
AND direct bit to Carry
2
2
ANL C, /bit
AND complement of direct bit to Carry
2
2
ORL C, bit
OR direct bit to carry
2
2
ORL C, /bit
OR complement of direct bit to Carry
2
2
MOV C, bit
Move direct bit to Carry
2
2
MOV bit, C
Move Carry to direct bit
2
2
JC rel
Jump if Carry is set
2
2/3
JNC rel
Jump if Carry is not set
2
2/3
JB bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is set
3
3/4
JNB bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is not set
3
3/4
JBC bit, rel
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit
3
3/4
Program Branching
ACALL addr11
Absolute subroutine call
2
3
LCALL addr16
Long subroutine call
3
4
RET
Return from subroutine
1
5
RETI
Return from interrupt
1
5
AJMP addr11
Absolute jump
2
3
LJMP addr16
Long jump
3
4
SJMP rel
Short jump (relative address)
2
3
JMP @A+DPTR
Jump indirect relative to DPTR
1
3
JZ rel
Jump if A equals zero
2
2/3
JNZ rel
Jump if A does not equal zero
2
2/3
CJNE A, direct, rel
Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal
3
3/4
CJNE A, #data, rel
Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal
3
3/4
CJNE Rn, #data, rel
Compare immediate to Register and jump if not equal
3
3/4
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel
Compare immediate to indirect and jump if not equal
3
4/5
DJNZ Rn, rel
Decrement Register and jump if not zero
2
2/3
Rev. 1.0
117
Table 15.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
Bytes
Clock
Cycles
DJNZ direct, rel
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero
3
3/4
NOP
No operation
1
1
Notes on Registers, Operands and Addressing Modes:
Rn—Register R0–R7 of the currently selected register bank.
@Ri—Data RAM location addressed indirectly through R0 or R1.
rel—8-bit, signed (twos complement) offset relative to the first byte of the following instruction. Used by SJMP
and all conditional jumps.
direct—8-bit internal data location’s address. This could be a direct-access Data RAM location (0x00–0x7F) or
an SFR (0x80–0xFF).
#data—8-bit constant
#data16—16-bit constant
bit—Direct-accessed bit in Data RAM or SFR
addr11—11-bit destination address used by ACALL and AJMP. The destination must be within the same 2 kB
page of program memory as the first byte of the following instruction.
addr16—16-bit destination address used by LCALL and LJMP. The destination may be anywhere within the
8 kB program memory space.
There is one unused opcode (0xA5) that performs the same function as NOP.
All mnemonics copyrighted © Intel Corporation 1980.
118
Rev. 1.0
15.4. CPU Core Registers
Register 15.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
DPL
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x82
Table 15.2. DPL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
DPL
Function
Data Pointer Low.
The DPL register is the low byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly
addressed flash memory or XRAM.
Rev. 1.0
119
Register 15.2. DPH: Data Pointer High
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
DPH
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x83
Table 15.3. DPH Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
DPH
Function
Data Pointer High.
The DPH register is the high byte of the 16-bit DPTR. DPTR is used to access indirectly
addressed flash memory or XRAM.
120
Rev. 1.0
Register 15.3. SP: Stack Pointer
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
SP
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0x81
Table 15.4. SP Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
SP
Function
Stack Pointer.
The Stack Pointer holds the location of the top of the stack. The stack pointer is incremented before every PUSH operation. The SP register defaults to 0x07 after reset.
Rev. 1.0
121
Register 15.4. ACC: Accumulator
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
ACC
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE0 (bit-addressable)
Table 15.5. ACC Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
ACC
Function
Accumulator.
This register is the accumulator for arithmetic operations.
122
Rev. 1.0
Register 15.5. B: B Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
B
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xF0 (bit-addressable)
Table 15.6. B Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
B
Function
B Register.
This register serves as a second accumulator for certain arithmetic operations.
Rev. 1.0
123
Register 15.6. PSW: Program Status Word
Bit
7
6
5
Name
CY
AC
F0
Type
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
RS
OV
F1
PARITY
RW
RW
RW
R
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD0 (bit-addressable)
Table 15.7. PSW Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CY
Function
Carry Flag.
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition) or a borrow
(subtraction). It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
6
AC
Auxiliary Carry Flag.
This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry into (addition) or a
borrow from (subtraction) the high order nibble. It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations.
5
F0
User Flag 0.
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.
4:3
RS
Register Bank Select.
These bits select which register bank is used during register accesses.
00: Bank 0, Addresses 0x00-0x07
01: Bank 1, Addresses 0x08-0x0F
10: Bank 2, Addresses 0x10-0x17
11: Bank 3, Addresses 0x18-0x1F
2
OV
Overflow Flag.
This bit is set to 1 under the following circumstances:
1. An ADD, ADDC, or SUBB instruction causes a sign-change overflow.
2. A MUL instruction results in an overflow (result is greater than 255).
3. A DIV instruction causes a divide-by-zero condition.
The OV bit is cleared to 0 by the ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions in all
other cases.
1
F1
User Flag 1.
This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control.
0
PARITY
Parity Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 if the sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is odd and cleared
if the sum is even.
124
Rev. 1.0
16. Clock Sources and Selection (HFOSC0, LFOSC0, and EXTCLK)
The C8051F85x/86x devices can be clocked from the internal low power 24.5 MHz oscillator, the internal
low-frequency 80 kHz oscillator, or an external CMOS clock signal at the EXTCLK pin. An adjustable clock
divider allows the selected clock source to be post-scaled by powers of 2, up to a factor of 128. By default,
the system clock comes up as the 24.5 MHz oscillator divided by 8.
Clock Control
High Frequency
24.5 MHz
Oscillator
Low Frequency
80 kHz
Oscillator
Programmable
Divider:
1, 2, 4...128
SYSCLK
To core and
peripherals
External Clock
Input (EXTCLK)
Figure 16.1. Clocking Options
16.1. Programmable High-Frequency Oscillator
All C8051F85x/86x devices include a programmable internal high-frequency oscillator that defaults as the
system clock after a system reset. The oscillator is automatically enabled when it is requested. The internal
oscillator period can be adjusted via the OSCICL register. On C8051F85x/86x devices, OSCICL is factory
calibrated to obtain a 24.5 MHz base frequency.
16.2. Programmable Low-Frequency Oscillator
A programmable low-frequency internal oscillator is also included. The low-frequency oscillator is
calibrated to a nominal frequency of 80 kHz. A divider at the oscillator output is capable of dividing the
output clock of the module by 1, 2, 4, or 8, using the OSCLD bits in the OSCLCN register. Additionally, the
OSCLF bits can be used to coarsely adjust the oscillator’s output frequency.
16.2.1. Calibrating the Internal L-F Oscillator
Timer 3 includes a capture function that can be used to capture the oscillator frequency, when running from
a known time base. When Timer 3 is configured for L-F Oscillator Capture Mode, a rising edge of the lowfrequency oscillator’s output will cause a capture event on the corresponding timer. As a capture event
occurs, the current timer value (TMR3H:TMR3L) is copied into the timer reload registers
(TMR3RLH:TMR3RLL). By recording the difference between two successive timer capture values, the lowfrequency oscillator’s period can be calculated. The OSCLF bits can then be adjusted to produce the
desired oscillator frequency.
Rev. 1.0
125
16.3. External Clock
An external CMOS clock source is also supported by the C8051F85x/86x family. The EXTCLK pin on the
device serves as the external clock input when running in this mode. The EXTCLK input may also be used
to clock some of the digital peripherals (e.g., Timers, PCA, etc.) while SYSCLK runs from one of the
internal oscillator sources. When not selected as the SYSCLK source, the EXTCLK input is always resynchronized to SYSCLK.
16.4. Clock Selection
The CLKSEL register is used to select the clock source for the system. The CLKSL field selects which
oscillator source is used as the system clock, while CLKDIV controls the programmable divider. CLKSL
must be set to 01b for the system clock to run from the external oscillator; however the external oscillator
may still clock certain peripherals (timers, PCA) when the internal oscillator is selected as the system
clock. In these cases, the external oscillator source is synchronized to the SYSCLK source. The system
clock may be switched on-the-fly between any of the oscillator sources so long as the selected clock
source is enabled and has settled, and CLKDIV may be changed at any time.
The internal high-frequency and low-frequency oscillators require little start-up time and may be selected
as the system clock immediately following the register write which enables the oscillator. When selecting
the EXTCLK pin as a clock input source, the pin should be skipped in the crossbar and configured as a
digital input. Firmware should ensure that the external clock source is present or enable the missing clock
detector before switching the CLKSL field.
126
Rev. 1.0
16.5. High Frequency Oscillator Control Registers
Register 16.1. OSCICL: High Frequency Oscillator Calibration
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
OSCICL
Type
RW
Reset
X
X
X
X
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
SFR Address: 0xC7
Table 16.1. OSCICL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
OSCICL
Function
Oscillator Calibration Bits.
These bits determine the internal oscillator period. When set to 00000000b, the oscillator
operates at its fastest setting. When set to 11111111b, the oscillator operates at its slowest setting. The reset value is factory calibrated to generate an internal oscillator frequency of 24.5 MHz.
Rev. 1.0
127
16.6. Low Frequency Oscillator Control Registers
Register 16.2. OSCLCN: Low Frequency Oscillator Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
OSCLEN
OSCLRDY
OSCLF
OSCLD
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
X
3
X
X
2
X
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xB1
Table 16.2. OSCLCN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
OSCLEN
Function
Internal L-F Oscillator Enable.
This bit enables the internal low-frequency oscillator. Note that the low-frequency oscillator is automatically enabled when the watchdog timer is active.
0: Internal L-F Oscillator Disabled.
1: Internal L-F Oscillator Enabled.
6
OSCLRDY
Internal L-F Oscillator Ready.
0: Internal L-F Oscillator frequency not stabilized.
1: Internal L-F Oscillator frequency stabilized.
5:2
OSCLF
Internal L-F Oscillator Frequency Control Bits.
Fine-tune control bits for the Internal L-F oscillator frequency. When set to 0000b, the L-F
oscillator operates at its fastest setting. When set to 1111b, the L-F oscillator operates at
its slowest setting. The OSCLF bits should only be changed by firmware when the L-F
oscillator is disabled (OSCLEN = 0).
1:0
OSCLD
Internal L-F Oscillator Divider Select.
00: Divide by 8 selected.
01: Divide by 4 selected.
10: Divide by 2 selected.
11: Divide by 1 selected.
Note: OSCLRDY is only set back to 0 in the event of a device reset or a change to the OSCLD bits.
128
Rev. 1.0
16.7. Clock Selection Control Registers
Register 16.3. CLKSEL: Clock Select
Bit
7
6
Name
Reserved
CLKDIV
Reserved
CLKSL
Type
R
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
5
1
4
1
3
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA9
Table 16.3. CLKSEL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7
Reserved
Must write reset value.
6:4
CLKDIV
Clock Source Divider.
This field controls the divider applied to the clock source selected by CLKSL. The output
of this divider is the system clock (SYSCLK).
000: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 1.
001: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 2.
010: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 4.
011: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 8.
100: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 16.
101: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 32.
110: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 64.
111: SYSCLK is equal to selected clock source divided by 128.
3:2
Reserved
Must write reset value.
1:0
CLKSL
Clock Source Select.
Selects the system clock source.
00: Clock derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator.
01: Clock derived from the External Oscillator circuit.
10: Clock derived from the Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator.
11: Reserved.
Rev. 1.0
129
17. Comparators (CMP0 and CMP1)
C8051F85x/86x devices include two on-chip programmable voltage comparators, CMP0 and CMP1. The
two comparators are functionally identical, but have different connectivity within the device. A functional
block diagram is shown in Figure 17.1.
CMPn
Positive Input
Selection
Programmable
Hysteresis
Port Pins (8)
Internal LDO
CPnA
(asynchronous)
CPn+
CPn
(synchronous)
CPn-
D
Q
SYSCLK
Port Pins (8)
Q
GND
Negative Input
Selection
Programmable
Response Time
Figure 17.1. Comparator Functional Block Diagram
17.1. System Connectivity
Comparator inputs are routed to port I/O pins or internal signals using the comparator mux registers. The
comparator’s synchronous and asynchronous outputs can optionally be routed to port I/O pins through the
port I/O crossbar. The output of either comparator may also be configured to generate a system interrupt.
CMP0 may also be used as a reset source, or as a trigger to kill a PCA output channel.
The CMP0 inputs are selected in the CPT0MX register, while CPT1MX selects the CMP1 inputs. The
CMXP field selects the comparator’s positive input (CPnP.x); the CMXN field selects the comparator’s negative input (CPnN.x). Table 17.1 through Table 17.4 detail the comparator input multiplexer options on the
C8051F85x/86x family. See the port I/O crossbar sections for details on configuring comparator outputs via
the digital crossbar. Comparator inputs can be externally driven from –0.25 V to (VDD) + 0.25 V without
damage or upset.
Important Note About Comparator Inputs: The port pins selected as comparator inputs should be configured as analog inputs in their associated port configuration register, and configured to be skipped by the
crossbar.
130
Rev. 1.0
Table 17.1. CMP0 Positive Input Multiplexer Channels
CMXP Setting in
Register CPT0MX
Signal Name
QSOP24 Pin Name
QFN20 Pin Name
SOIC16 Pin Name
0000
CP0P.0
P0.0
P0.0
P0.0
0001
CP0P.1
P0.1
P0.1
P0.1
0010
CP0P.2
P0.2
P0.2
P0.2
0011
CP0P.3
P0.3
P0.3
P0.3
0100
CP0P.4
P0.4
P0.4
P0.4
0101
CP0P.5
P0.5
P0.5
P0.5
0110
CP0P.6
P0.6
P0.6
Reserved
0111
CP0P.7
P0.7
P0.7
Reserved
1000
LDO
Internal 1.8 V LDO Output
1001-1111
None
No connection
Table 17.2. CMP0 Negative Input Multiplexer Channels
CMXN Setting in
Register CPT0MX
Signal Name
QSOP24 Pin Name
QFN20 Pin Name
SOIC16 Pin Name
0000
CP0N.0
P0.0
P0.0
P0.0
0001
CP0N.1
P0.1
P0.1
P0.1
0010
CP0N.2
P0.2
P0.2
P0.2
0011
CP0N.3
P0.3
P0.3
P0.3
0100
CP0N.4
P0.4
P0.4
P0.4
0101
CP0N.5
P0.5
P0.5
P0.5
0110
CP0N.6
P0.6
P0.6
Reserved
0111
CP0N.7
P0.7
P0.7
Reserved
1000
GND
GND
1001-1111
None
No connection
Rev. 1.0
131
Table 17.3. CMP1 Positive Input Multiplexer Channels
CMXP Setting in
Register CPT1MX
Signal Name
QSOP24 Pin Name
QFN20 Pin Name
SOIC16 Pin Name
0000
CP1P.0
P1.0
P1.0
P0.6
0001
CP1P.1
P1.1
P1.1
P0.7
0010
CP1P.2
P1.2
P1.2
P1.0
0011
CP1P.3
P1.3
P1.3
P1.1
0100
CP1P.4
P1.4
P1.4
P1.2
0101
CP1P.5
P1.5
P1.5
P1.3
0110
CP1P.6
P1.6
P1.6
Reserved
0111
CP1P.7
P1.7
Reserved
Reserved
1000
LDO
Internal 1.8 V LDO Output
1001-1111
None
No connection
Table 17.4. CMP1 Negative Input Multiplexer Channels
CMXN Setting in
Register CPT1MX
Signal Name
QSOP24 Pin Name
QFN20 Pin Name
SOIC16 Pin Name
0000
CP1N.0
P1.0
P1.0
P0.6
0001
CP1N.1
P1.1
P1.1
P0.7
0010
CP1N.2
P1.2
P1.2
P1.0
0011
CP1N.3
P1.3
P1.3
P1.1
0100
CP1N.4
P1.4
P1.4
P1.2
0101
CP1N.5
P1.5
P1.5
P1.3
0110
CP1N.6
P1.6
P1.6
Reserved
0111
CP1N.7
P1.7
Reserved
Reserved
1000
GND
GND
1001-1111
None
No connection
132
Rev. 1.0
17.2. Functional Description
The comparator offers programmable response time and hysteresis, an analog input multiplexer, and two
outputs that are optionally available at the port pins: a synchronous “latched” output (CPn), or an
asynchronous “raw” output (CPnA). The asynchronous CPnA signal is available even when the system
clock is not active. This allows the comparator to operate and generate an output with the device in STOP
mode.
When disabled, the comparator output (if assigned to a port I/O pin via the crossbar) defaults to the logic
low state, and the power supply to the comparator is turned off.
The comparator response time may be configured in software via the CPTnMD register. Selecting a longer
response time reduces the comparator supply current.
Positive programmable
hysteresis (CPHYP)
CPnCPn+
Negative programmable
hysteresis (CPHYN)
CP0 (out)
Figure 17.2. Comparator Hysteresis Plot
The comparator hysteresis is software-programmable via its Comparator Control register CPTnCN. The
user can program both the amount of hysteresis voltage (referred to the input voltage) and the positive and
negative-going symmetry of this hysteresis around the threshold voltage.
The comparator hysteresis is programmable using the CPHYN and CPHYP fields in the Comparator
Control Register CPTnCN. The amount of negative hysteresis voltage is determined by the settings of the
CPHYN bits. As shown in Figure 17.2, settings of 20, 10, or 5 mV (nominal) of negative hysteresis can be
programmed, or negative hysteresis can be disabled. In a similar way, the amount of positive hysteresis is
determined by the setting the CPHYP bits.
Comparator interrupts can be generated on both rising-edge and falling-edge output transitions. The
CPFIF flag is set to logic 1 upon a comparator falling-edge occurrence, and the CPRIF flag is set to logic 1
upon the comparator rising-edge occurrence. Once set, these bits remain set until cleared by software.
The comparator rising-edge interrupt mask is enabled by setting CPRIE to a logic 1. The comparator
falling-edge interrupt mask is enabled by setting CPFIE to a logic 1.
The output state of the comparator can be obtained at any time by reading the CPOUT bit. The comparator
is enabled by setting the CPEN bit to logic 1, and is disabled by clearing this bit to logic 0.
Note that false rising edges and falling edges can be detected when the comparator is first powered on or
if changes are made to the hysteresis or response time control bits. Therefore, it is recommended that the
rising-edge and falling-edge flags be explicitly cleared to logic 0 a short time after the comparator is
enabled or its mode bits have been changed, before enabling comparator interrupts.
Rev. 1.0
133
17.3. Comparator Control Registers
Register 17.1. CPT0CN: Comparator 0 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
CPEN
CPOUT
CPRIF
CPFIF
CPHYP
CPHYN
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
SFR Address: 0x9B
Table 17.5. CPT0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CPEN
Function
Comparator 0 Enable Bit.
0: Comparator Disabled.
1: Comparator Enabled.
6
CPOUT
Comparator 0 Output State Flag.
0: Voltage on CP0P < CP0N.
1: Voltage on CP0P > CP0N.
5
CPRIF
Comparator 0 Rising-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software.
0: No Comparator Rising Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator Rising Edge has occurred.
4
CPFIF
Comparator 0 Falling-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software.
0: No Comparator Falling-Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator Falling-Edge has occurred.
3:2
CPHYP
Comparator 0 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV.
1:0
CPHYN
Comparator 0 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV.
134
Rev. 1.0
0
Register 17.2. CPT0MD: Comparator 0 Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
CPLOUT
Reserved
CPRIE
CPFIE
Reserved
CPMD
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
SFR Address: 0x9D
Table 17.6. CPT0MD Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CPLOUT
Function
Comparator 0 Latched Output Flag.
This bit represents the comparator output value at the most recent PCA counter overflow.
0: Comparator output was logic low at last PCA overflow.
1: Comparator output was logic high at last PCA overflow.
6
Reserved
5
CPRIE
Must write reset value.
Comparator 0 Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable.
0: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt disabled.
1: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt enabled.
4
CPFIE
Comparator 0 Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable.
0: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt disabled.
1: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt enabled.
3:2
Reserved
1:0
CPMD
Must write reset value.
Comparator 0 Mode Select.
These bits affect the response time and power consumption of the comparator.
00: Mode 0 (Fastest Response Time, Highest Power Consumption)
01: Mode 1
10: Mode 2
11: Mode 3 (Slowest Response Time, Lowest Power Consumption)
Rev. 1.0
135
Register 17.3. CPT0MX: Comparator 0 Multiplexer Selection
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
CMXN
CMXP
Type
RW
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0x9F
Table 17.7. CPT0MX Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:4
CMXN
Function
Comparator 0 Negative Input MUX Selection.
0000: External pin CP0N.0
0001: External pin CP0N.1
0010: External pin CP0N.2
0011: External pin CP0N.3
0100: External pin CP0N.4
0101: External pin CP0N.5
0110: External pin CP0N.6
0111: External pin CP0N.7
1000: GND
1001-1111: Reserved.
3:0
CMXP
Comparator 0 Positive Input MUX Selection.
0000: External pin CP0P.0
0001: External pin CP0P.1
0010: External pin CP0P.2
0011: External pin CP0P.3
0100: External pin CP0P.4
0101: External pin CP0P.5
0110: External pin CP0P.6
0111: External pin CP0P.7
1000: Internal LDO output
1001-1111: Reserved.
136
Rev. 1.0
1
0
1
1
Register 17.4. CPT1CN: Comparator 1 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
CPEN
CPOUT
CPRIF
CPFIF
CPHYP
CPHYN
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xBF
Table 17.8. CPT1CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CPEN
Function
Comparator 1 Enable Bit.
0: Comparator Disabled.
1: Comparator Enabled.
6
CPOUT
Comparator 1 Output State Flag.
0: Voltage on CP1P < CP1N.
1: Voltage on CP1P > CP1N.
5
CPRIF
Comparator 1 Rising-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software.
0: No Comparator Rising Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator Rising Edge has occurred.
4
CPFIF
Comparator 1 Falling-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software.
0: No Comparator Falling Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared.
1: Comparator Falling Edge has occurred.
3:2
CPHYP
Comparator 1 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV.
1:0
CPHYN
Comparator 1 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits.
00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled.
01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV.
10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV.
11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV.
Rev. 1.0
137
Register 17.5. CPT1MD: Comparator 1 Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
CPLOUT
Reserved
CPRIE
CPFIE
Reserved
CPMD
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
SFR Address: 0xAB
Table 17.9. CPT1MD Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CPLOUT
Function
Comparator 1 Latched Output Flag.
This bit represents the comparator output value at the most recent PCA counter overflow.
0: Comparator output was logic low at last PCA overflow.
1: Comparator output was logic high at last PCA overflow.
6
Reserved
5
CPRIE
Must write reset value.
Comparator 1 Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable.
0: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt disabled.
1: Comparator Rising-Edge interrupt enabled.
4
CPFIE
Comparator 1 Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable.
0: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt disabled.
1: Comparator Falling-Edge interrupt enabled.
3:2
Reserved
1:0
CPMD
Must write reset value.
Comparator 1 Mode Select.
These bits affect the response time and power consumption of the comparator.
00: Mode 0 (Fastest Response Time, Highest Power Consumption)
01: Mode 1
10: Mode 2
11: Mode 3 (Slowest Response Time, Lowest Power Consumption)
138
Rev. 1.0
Register 17.6. CPT1MX: Comparator 1 Multiplexer Selection
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
CMXN
CMXP
Type
RW
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
SFR Address: 0xAA
Table 17.10. CPT1MX Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:4
CMXN
Function
Comparator 1 Negative Input MUX Selection.
0000: External pin CP1N.0
0001: External pin CP1N.1
0010: External pin CP1N.2
0011: External pin CP1N.3
0100: External pin CP1N.4
0101: External pin CP1N.5
0110: External pin CP1N.6
0111: External pin CP1N.7
1000: GND
1001-1111: Reserved.
3:0
CMXP
Comparator 1 Positive Input MUX Selection.
0000: External pin CP1P.0
0001: External pin CP1P.1
0010: External pin CP1P.2
0011: External pin CP1P.3
0100: External pin CP1P.4
0101: External pin CP1P.5
0110: External pin CP1P.6
0111: External pin CP1P.7
1000: Internal LDO output
1001-1111: Reserved.
Rev. 1.0
139
18. Cyclic Redundancy Check Unit (CRC0)
C8051F85x/86x devices include a cyclic redundancy check unit (CRC0) that can perform a CRC using a
16-bit polynomial. CRC0 accepts a stream of 8-bit data written to the CRC0IN register. CRC0 posts the 16bit result to an internal register. The internal result register may be accessed indirectly using the CRCPNT
bits and CRC0DAT register, as shown in Figure 18.1. CRC0 also has a bit reverse register for quick data
manipulation.
CRC0
CRC0IN
Flash
Memory
Automatic
flash read
control
8
8
CRC0FLIP
Seed
(0x0000 or
0xFFFF)
8
byte-level bit
reversal
Hardware CRC
Calculation
Unit
8
8
8
CRC0DAT
Figure 18.1. CRC0 Block Diagram
18.1. CRC Algorithm
The CRC unit generates a CRC result equivalent to the following algorithm:
1. XOR the input with the most-significant bits of the current CRC result. If this is the first iteration of
the CRC unit, the current CRC result will be the set initial value (0x0000 or 0xFFFF).
2a. If the MSB of the CRC result is set, shift the CRC result and XOR the result with the selected
polynomial.
2b. If the MSB of the CRC result is not set, shift the CRC result.
Repeat Steps 2a/2b for the number of input bits (8). The algorithm is also described in the following
example.
140
Rev. 1.0
The 16-bit CRC algorithm can be described by the following code:
unsigned short UpdateCRC (unsigned short CRC_acc, unsigned char CRC_input)
{
unsigned char i;
// loop counter
#define POLY 0x1021
// Create the CRC "dividend" for polynomial arithmetic (binary arithmetic
// with no carries)
CRC_acc = CRC_acc ^ (CRC_input << 8);
// "Divide" the poly into the dividend using CRC XOR subtraction
// CRC_acc holds the "remainder" of each divide
//
// Only complete this division for 8 bits since input is 1 byte
for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
{
// Check if the MSB is set (if MSB is 1, then the POLY can "divide"
// into the "dividend")
if ((CRC_acc & 0x8000) == 0x8000)
{
// if so, shift the CRC value, and XOR "subtract" the poly
CRC_acc = CRC_acc << 1;
CRC_acc ^= POLY;
}
else
{
// if not, just shift the CRC value
CRC_acc = CRC_acc << 1;
}
}
// Return the final remainder (CRC value)
return CRC_acc;
}
Table 18.1 lists several input values and the associated outputs using the 16-bit CRC algorithm:
Table 18.1. Example 16-bit CRC Outputs
Input
Output
0x63
0xBD35
0x8C
0xB1F4
0x7D
0x4ECA
0xAA, 0xBB, 0xCC
0x6CF6
0x00, 0x00, 0xAA, 0xBB, 0xCC
0xB166
Rev. 1.0
141
18.2. Preparing for a CRC Calculation
To prepare CRC0 for a CRC calculation, software should set the initial value of the result. The polynomial
used for the CRC computation is 0x1021. The CRC0 result may be initialized to one of two values: 0x0000
or 0xFFFF. The following steps can be used to initialize CRC0.
1. Select the initial result value (Set CRCVAL to 0 for 0x0000 or 1 for 0xFFFF).
2. Set the result to its initial value (Write 1 to CRCINIT).
18.3. Performing a CRC Calculation
Once CRC0 is initialized, the input data stream is sequentially written to CRC0IN, one byte at a time. The
CRC0 result is automatically updated after each byte is written. The CRC engine may also be configured to
automatically perform a CRC on one or more 256 byte blocks read from flash. The following steps can be
used to automatically perform a CRC on flash memory.
1. Prepare CRC0 for a CRC calculation as shown above.
2. Write the index of the starting page to CRC0AUTO.
3. Set the AUTOEN bit to 1 in CRC0AUTO.
4. Write the number of 256 byte blocks to perform in the CRC calculation to CRCCNT.
5. Write any value to CRC0CN (or OR its contents with 0x00) to initiate the CRC calculation. The
CPU will not execute code any additional code until the CRC operation completes. See the note in
the CRC0CN register definition for more information on how to properly initiate a CRC calculation.
6. Clear the AUTOEN bit in CRC0AUTO.
7. Read the CRC result.
18.4. Accessing the CRC0 Result
The internal CRC0 result is 16 bits. The CRCPNT bits select the byte that is targeted by read and write
operations on CRC0DAT and increment after each read or write. The calculation result will remain in the
internal CR0 result register until it is set, overwritten, or additional data is written to CRC0IN.
18.5. CRC0 Bit Reverse Feature
CRC0 includes hardware to reverse the bit order of each bit in a byte as shown in Figure 18.2. Each byte
of data written to CRC0FLIP is read back bit reversed. For example, if 0xC0 is written to CRC0FLIP, the
data read back is 0x03. Bit reversal is a useful mathematical function used in algorithms such as the FFT.
CRC0FLIP
(write)
CRC0FLIP
(read)
Figure 18.2. Bit Reversal
142
Rev. 1.0
18.6. CRC Control Registers
Register 18.1. CRC0CN: CRC0 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
CRCINIT
CRCVAL
Reserved
CRCPNT
Type
R
RW
RW
R
RW
0
0
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
1
SFR Address: 0xCE
Table 18.2. CRC0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:4
Reserved
Must write reset value.
3
CRCINIT
CRC Result Initialization Bit.
Writing a 1 to this bit initializes the entire CRC result based on CRCVAL.
2
CRCVAL
CRC Set Value Initialization Bit.
This bit selects the set value of the CRC result.
0: CRC result is set to 0x0000 on write of 1 to CRCINIT.
1: CRC result is set to 0xFFFF on write of 1 to CRCINIT.
1
Reserved
Must write reset value.
0
CRCPNT
CRC Result Pointer.
Specifies the byte of the CRC result to be read/written on the next access to CRC0DAT.
This bit will automatically toggle upon each read or write.
0: CRC0DAT accesses bits 7-0 of the 16-bit CRC result.
1: CRC0DAT accesses bits 15-8 of the 16-bit CRC result.
Note: Upon initiation of an automatic CRC calculation, the three cycles following a write to CRC0CN that initiate a CRC
operation must only contain instructions which execute in the same number of cycles as the number of bytes in the
instruction. An example of such an instruction is a 3-byte MOV that targets the CRC0FLIP register. When programming
in C, the dummy value written to CRC0FLIP should be a non-zero value to prevent the compiler from generating a 2byte MOV instruction.
Rev. 1.0
143
Register 18.2. CRC0IN: CRC0 Data Input
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
CRC0IN
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xDD
Table 18.3. CRC0IN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
CRC0IN
Function
CRC Data Input.
Each write to CRCIN results in the written data being computed into the existing CRC
result according to the CRC algorithm.
144
Rev. 1.0
Register 18.3. CRC0DAT: CRC0 Data Output
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
CRC0DAT
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xDE
Table 18.4. CRC0DAT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
CRC0DAT
Function
CRC Data Output.
Each read or write performed on CRC0DAT targets the CRC result bits pointed to by the
CRC0 Result Pointer (CRC0PNT bits in CRC0CN).
Note: CRC0DAT may not be valid for one cycle after setting the CRC0INIT bit in the CRC0CN register to 1. Any time
CRC0INIT is written to 1 by firmware, at least one instruction should be performed before reading CRC0DAT.
Rev. 1.0
145
Register 18.4. CRC0AUTO: CRC0 Automatic Control
Bit
7
6
5
Name
AUTOEN
Reserved
CRCST
Type
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
4
0
3
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD2
Table 18.5. CRC0AUTO Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
AUTOEN
Function
Automatic CRC Calculation Enable.
When AUTOEN is set to 1, any write to CRC0CN will initiate an automatic CRC starting
at flash sector CRCST and continuing for CRCCNT sectors.
6
Reserved
5:0
CRCST
Must write reset value.
Automatic CRC Calculation Starting Block.
These bits specify the flash block to start the automatic CRC calculation. The starting
address of the first flash block included in the automatic CRC calculation is CRCST x
block_size, where block_size is 256 bytes.
146
Rev. 1.0
Register 18.5. CRC0CNT: CRC0 Automatic Flash Sector Count
Bit
7
6
Name
CRCDN
Reserved
CRCCNT
Type
R
R
RW
Reset
1
0
5
0
4
3
0
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD3
Table 18.6. CRC0CNT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CRCDN
Function
Automatic CRC Calculation Complete.
Set to 0 when a CRC calculation is in progress. Code execution is stopped during a CRC
calculation; therefore, reads from firmware will always return 1.
6:5
Reserved
Must write reset value.
4:0
CRCCNT
Automatic CRC Calculation Block Count.
These bits specify the number of flash blocks to include in an automatic CRC calculation.
The last address of the last flash block included in the automatic CRC calculation is
(CRCST+CRCCNT) x Block Size - 1. The block size is 256 bytes.
Rev. 1.0
147
Register 18.6. CRC0FLIP: CRC0 Bit Flip
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
CRC0FLIP
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xCF
Table 18.7. CRC0FLIP Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
CRC0FLIP
Function
CRC0 Bit Flip.
Any byte written to CRC0FLIP is read back in a bit-reversed order, i.e., the written LSB
becomes the MSB. For example:
If 0xC0 is written to CRC0FLIP, the data read back will be 0x03.
If 0x05 is written to CRC0FLIP, the data read back will be 0xA0.
148
Rev. 1.0
19. External Interrupts (INT0 and INT1)
The C8051F85x/86x device family includes two external digital interrupt sources (INT0 and INT1), with
dedicated interrupt sources (up to 16 additional I/O interrupts are available through the port match
function). As is the case on a standard 8051 architecture, certain controls for these two interrupt sources
are available in the Timer0/1 registers. Extensions to these controls which provide additional functionality
on C8051F85x/86x devices are available in the IT01CF register. INT0 and INT1 are configurable as active
high or low, edge- or level-sensitive. The IN0PL and IN1PL bits in the IT01CF register select active high or
active low; the IT0 and IT1 bits in TCON select level- or edge-sensitive. The table below lists the possible
configurations.
IT1
IN1PL
Active low, edge-sensitive
1
0
Active low, edge-sensitive
1
Active high, edge-sensitive
1
1
Active high, edge-sensitive
0
0
Active low, level-sensitive
0
0
Active low, level-sensitive
0
1
Active high, level-sensitive
0
1
Active high, level-sensitive
IT0
IN0PL
1
0
1
INT0 Interrupt
INT1 Interrupt
INT0 and INT1 are assigned to port pins as defined in the IT01CF register. Note that INT0 and INT1 port
pin assignments are independent of any crossbar assignments. INT0 and INT1 will monitor their assigned
port pins without disturbing the peripheral that was assigned the port pin via the crossbar. To assign a port
pin only to INT0 and/or INT1, configure the crossbar to skip the selected pin(s).
IE0 and IE1 in the TCON register serve as the interrupt-pending flags for the INT0 and INT1 external
interrupts, respectively. If an INT0 or INT1 external interrupt is configured as edge-sensitive, the
corresponding interrupt-pending flag is automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the
ISR. When configured as level sensitive, the interrupt-pending flag remains logic 1 while the input is active
as defined by the corresponding polarity bit (IN0PL or IN1PL); the flag remains logic 0 while the input is
inactive. The external interrupt source must hold the input active until the interrupt request is recognized. It
must then deactivate the interrupt request before execution of the ISR completes or another interrupt
request will be generated.
Rev. 1.0
149
19.1. External Interrupt Control Registers
Register 19.1. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration
Bit
7
6
5
Name
IN1PL
IN1SL
IN0PL
IN0SL
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
SFR Address: 0xE4
Table 19.1. IT01CF Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
IN1PL
Function
INT1 Polarity.
0: INT1 input is active low.
1: INT1 input is active high.
6:4
IN1SL
INT1 Port Pin Selection Bits.
These bits select which Port pin is assigned to INT1. This pin assignment is independent
of the Crossbar; INT1 will monitor the assigned port pin without disturbing the peripheral
that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the
Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin.
000: Select P0.0
001: Select P0.1
010: Select P0.2
011: Select P0.3
100: Select P0.4
101: Select P0.5
110: Select P0.6
111: Select P0.7
3
IN0PL
INT0 Polarity.
0: INT0 input is active low.
1: INT0 input is active high.
150
Rev. 1.0
Table 19.1. IT01CF Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
2:0
IN0SL
Function
INT0 Port Pin Selection Bits.
These bits select which Port pin is assigned to INT0. This pin assignment is independent
of the Crossbar; INT0 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturbing the peripheral
that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the
Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin.
000: Select P0.0
001: Select P0.1
010: Select P0.2
011: Select P0.3
100: Select P0.4
101: Select P0.5
110: Select P0.6
111: Select P0.7
Rev. 1.0
151
20. Programmable Counter Array (PCA0)
The Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) provides three channels of enhanced timer and PWM
functionality while requiring less CPU intervention than standard counter/timers. The PCA consists of a
dedicated 16-bit counter/timer and three 16-bit capture/compare modules. The counter/timer is driven by a
programmable timebase that can select between seven sources: system clock, system clock divided by
four, system clock divided by twelve, the external oscillator clock source divided by 8, low frequency
oscillator divided by 8, Timer 0 overflows, or an external clock signal on the ECI input pin. Each capture/
compare module may be configured to operate independently in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered
Capture, Software Timer, High-Speed Output, Frequency Output, 8 to 11-Bit PWM, or 16-Bit PWM.
Additionally, all PWM modes support both center and edge-aligned operation. The external oscillator and
LFO oscillator clock options allow the PCA to be clocked by an external oscillator or the LFO while the
internal oscillator drives the system clock. Each capture/compare module has its own associated I/O line
(CEXn) which is routed through the crossbar to port I/O when enabled. The I/O signals have
programmable polarity and Comparator 0 can optionally be used to perform a cycle-by-cycle kill operation
on the PCA outputs. A PCA block diagram is shown in Figure 20.1
PCA0
SYSCLK
SYSCLK / 4
SYSCLK / 12
Timer 0 Overflow
PCA Counter
EXTCLK / 8
Sync
L-F Oscillator / 8
Sync
ECI
Sync
Control /
Configuration
Interrupt
Logic
SYSCLK
Channel 2
Mode
Control1
Channel
Capture
Mode
/ Compare
Control
Channel 0
CEX2
Output
Drive
Logic
CEX0
Capture
Mode
/ Compare
Control
Capture / Compare
Comparator 0 Output
Polarity Select
Comparator
Clear Enable
Figure 20.1. PCA0 Block Diagram
152
Rev. 1.0
CEX1
20.1. PCA Counter/Timer
The 16-bit PCA counter/timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs: PCA0L and PCA0H. PCA0H is the high byte of
the 16-bit counter/timer and PCA0L is the low byte. Reading PCA0L automatically latches the value of
PCA0H into a “snapshot” register; the following PCA0H read accesses this “snapshot” register. Reading
the PCA0L Register first guarantees an accurate reading of the entire 16-bit PCA0 counter. Reading
PCA0H or PCA0L does not disturb the counter operation. The CPS2–CPS0 bits in the PCA0MD register
select the timebase for the counter/timer as shown in Table 20.1.
When the counter/timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Counter Overflow Flag (CF) in PCA0MD is
set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CF interrupts are enabled. Setting the ECF bit in
PCA0MD to logic 1 enables the CF flag to generate an interrupt request. The CF bit is not automatically
cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by
software. Clearing the CIDL bit in the PCA0MD register allows the PCA to continue normal operation while
the CPU is in Idle mode.
Table 20.1. PCA Timebase Input Options
CPS2
CPS1
CPS0
Timebase
0
0
0
System clock divided by 12
0
0
1
System clock divided by 4
0
1
0
Timer 0 overflow
0
1
1
High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4)*
1
0
0
System clock
1
0
1
External oscillator source divided by 8*
1
1
0
Low frequency oscillator divided by 8*
1
1
1
Reserved
*Note: Synchronized with the system clock.
20.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources
The PCA0 module shares one interrupt vector among all of its modules. There are are several event flags
that can be used to generate a PCA0 interrupt. They are: the main PCA counter overflow flag (CF), which
is set upon a 16-bit overflow of the PCA0 counter, an intermediate overflow flag (COVF), which can be set
on an overflow from the 8th - 11th bit of the PCA0 counter, and the individual flags for each PCA channel
(CCFn), which are set according to the operation mode of that module. These event flags are always set
when the trigger condition occurs. Each of these flags can be individually selected to generate a PCA0
interrupt, using the corresponding interrupt enable flag (ECF for CF, ECOV for COVF, and ECCFn for each
CCFn). PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before any individual interrupt sources are recognized
by the processor. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit and the EPCA0 bit to logic 1.
Rev. 1.0
153
20.3. Capture/Compare Modules
Each module can be configured to operate independently in one of six operation modes: edge-triggered
capture, software timer, high-speed output, frequency output, 8 to 11-bit pulse width modulator, or 16-bit
pulse width modulator. Table 20.2 summarizes the bit settings in the PCA0CPMn and PCA0PWM registers
used to select the PCA capture/compare module’s operating mode. Note that all modules set to use 8-, 9-,
10-, or 11-bit PWM mode must use the same cycle length (8–11 bits). Setting the ECCFn bit in a
PCA0CPMn register enables the module's CCFn interrupt.
Table 20.2. PCA0CPM and PCA0PWM Bit Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules
Operational Mode
PCA0CPMn
PCA0PWM
Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4–3
2–0
Capture triggered by positive edge on CEXn
X X 1 0 0 0 0 A 0 X B XX
XXX
Capture triggered by negative edge on CEXn
X X 0 1 0 0 0 A 0 X B XX
XXX
Capture triggered by any transition on CEXn
X X 1 1 0 0 0 A 0 X B XX
XXX
Software Timer
X C 0 0 1 0 0 A 0 X B XX
XXX
High Speed Output
X C 0 0 1 1 0 A 0 X B XX
XXX
Frequency Output
X C 0 0 0 1 1 A 0 X B XX
XXX
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7)
0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A 0 X B XX
000
9-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7)
0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A D X B XX
001
10-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7)
0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A D X B XX
010
11-Bit Pulse Width Modulator (Note 7)
0 C 0 0 E 0 1 A D X B XX
011
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator
1 C 0 0 E 0 1 A 0 X B XX
XXX
Notes:
1. X = Don’t Care (no functional difference for individual module if 1 or 0).
2. A = Enable interrupts for this module (PCA interrupt triggered on CCFn set to 1).
3. B = Enable 8th - 11th bit overflow interrupt (Depends on setting of CLSEL).
4. C = When set to 0, the digital comparator is off. For high speed and frequency output modes, the associated pin will not
toggle. In any of the PWM modes, this generates a 0% duty cycle (output = 0).
5. D = Selects whether the Capture/Compare register (0) or the Auto-Reload register (1) for the associated channel is
accessed via addresses PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn.
6. E = When set, a match event will cause the CCFn flag for the associated channel to be set.
7. All modules set to 8, 9, 10 or 11-bit PWM mode use the same cycle length setting.
20.3.1. Output Polarity
The output polarity of each PCA channel is individually selectable using the PCA0POL register. By default,
all output channels are configured to drive the PCA output signals (CEXn) with their internal polarity. When
the CEXnPOL bit for a specific channel is set to 1, that channel’s output signal will be inverted at the pin.
All other properties of the channel are unaffected, and the inversion does not apply to PCA input signals.
Note that changes in the PCA0POL register take effect immediately at the associated output pin.
154
Rev. 1.0
20.3.2. Edge-Triggered Capture Mode
In this mode, a valid transition on the CEXn pin causes the PCA to capture the value of the PCA counter/
timer and load it into the corresponding module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPLn and
PCA0CPHn). The CAPPn and CAPNn bits in the PCA0CPMn register are used to select the type of
transition that triggers the capture: low-to-high transition (positive edge), high-to-low transition (negative
edge), or either transition (positive or negative edge). When a capture occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag
(CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module
is enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt
service routine, and must be cleared by software. If both CAPPn and CAPNn bits are set to logic 1, then
the state of the Port pin associated with CEXn can be read directly to determine whether a rising-edge or
falling-edge caused the capture.
CCFn (Interrupt Flag)
CAPPn
PCA0CPLn
PCA0CPHn
Capture
CEXn
CAPNn
PCA Clock
PCA0L
PCA0H
Figure 20.2. PCA Capture Mode Diagram
Note: The CEXn input signal must remain high or low for at least 2 system clock cycles to be recognized by the
hardware.
Rev. 1.0
155
20.3.3. Software Timer (Compare) Mode
In Software Timer mode, the PCA counter/timer value is compared to the module's 16-bit capture/compare
register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in
PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is
enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt
service routine, and must be cleared by software. Setting the ECOMn and MATn bits in the PCA0CPMn
register enables Software Timer mode.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1.
PCA0CPLn
PCA0CPHn
MATn (Match Enable)
ECOMn
(Compare Enable)
PCA Clock
16-bit Comparator
PCA0L
match
PCA0H
Figure 20.3. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram
156
Rev. 1.0
CCFn
(Interrupt Flag)
20.3.4. High-Speed Output Mode
In High-Speed Output mode, a module’s associated CEXn pin is toggled each time a match occurs
between the PCA Counter and the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and
PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An
interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not
automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be
cleared by software. Setting the TOGn, MATn, and ECOMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables the
High-Speed Output mode. If ECOMn is cleared, the associated pin will retain its state, and not toggle on
the next match event.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1.
PCA0CPLn
PCA0CPHn
MATn (Match Enable)
ECOMn
(Compare Enable)
16-bit Comparator
match
CCFn
(Interrupt Flag)
Toggle
CEXn
PCA Clock
PCA0L
PCA0H
TOGn (Toggle Enable)
Figure 20.4. PCA High-Speed Output Mode Diagram
Rev. 1.0
157
20.3.5. Frequency Output Mode
Frequency Output Mode produces a programmable-frequency square wave on the module’s associated
CEXn pin. The capture/compare module high byte holds the number of PCA clocks to count before the
output is toggled. The frequency of the square wave is then defined by Equation 20.1.
F PCA
F CEXn = ---------------------------------------2 PCA0CPHn
Note: A value of 0x00 in the PCA0CPHn register is equal to 256 for this equation.
Equation 20.1. Square Wave Frequency Output
Where FPCA is the frequency of the clock selected by the CPS2–0 bits in the PCA mode register,
PCA0MD. The lower byte of the capture/compare module is compared to the PCA counter low byte; on a
match, n is toggled and the offset held in the high byte is added to the matched value in PCA0CPLn.
Frequency Output Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, TOGn, and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn
register. Note that the MATn bit should normally be set to 0 in this mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the
CCFn flag for the channel will be set when the 16-bit PCA0 counter and the 16-bit capture/compare
register for the channel are equal.
PCA0CPLn
8-bit Adder
PCA0CPHn
Adder
Enable
Toggle
ECOMn
(Compare Enable)
8-bit
Comparator
match
CEXn
TOGn (Toggle Enable)
PCA Clock
PCA0L
Figure 20.5. PCA Frequency Output Mode
158
Rev. 1.0
20.4. PWM Waveform Generation
The PCA can generate edge- or center-aligned PWM waveforms with resolutions of 8, 9, 10, 11 or 16 bits.
PWM resolution depends on the module setup, as specified within the individual module PCA0CPMn
registers as well as the PCA0PWM register. Modules can be configured for 8-11 bit mode, or for 16-bit
mode individually using the PCA0CPMn registers. All modules configured for 8-11 bit mode will have the
same resolution, specified by the PCA0PWM register. When operating in one of the PWM modes, each
module may be individually configured for center or edge-aligned PWM waveforms. Each channel has a
single bit in the PCA0CENT register to select between the two options.
20.4.1. Edge Aligned PWM
When configured for edge-aligned mode, a module will generate an edge transition at two points for every
2N PCA clock cycles, where N is the selected PWM resolution in bits. In edge-aligned mode, these two
edges are referred to as the “match” and “overflow” edges. The polarity at the output pin is selectable, and
can be inverted by setting the appropriate channel bit to ‘1’ in the PCA0POL register. Prior to inversion, a
match edge sets the channel to logic high, and an overflow edge clears the channel to logic low.
The match edge occurs when the the lowest N bits of the module’s PCA0CPn register match the
corresponding bits of the main PCA0 counter register. For example, with 10-bit PWM, the match edge will
occur any time bits 9-0 of the PCA0CPn register match bits 9-0 of the PCA0 counter value.
The overflow edge occurs when an overflow of the PCA0 counter happens at the desired resolution. For
example, with 10-bit PWM, the overflow edge will occur when bits 0-9 of the PCA0 counter transition from
all 1’s to all 0’s. All modules configured for edge-aligned mode at the same resolution will align on the
overflow edge of the waveforms.
An example of the PWM timing in edge-aligned mode for two channels is shown in Figure 20.6. In this
example, the CEX0POL and CEX1POL bits are cleared to 0.
PCA Clock
Counter (PCA0) 0xFFFF
0x0000
0x0001
0x0002
Capture / Compare
(PCA0CP0)
0x0003
0x0004
0x0005
0x0001
Output (CEX0)
match edge
Capture / Compare
(PCA0CP1)
0x0005
Output (CEX1)
overflow edge
match edge
Figure 20.6. Edge-Aligned PWM Timing
For a given PCA resolution, the unused high bits in the PCA0 counter and the PCA0CPn compare
registers are ignored, and only the used bits of the PCA0CPn register determine the duty cycle.
Equation 20.2 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is cleared to 0.
Equation 20.3 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is set to 1. A 0% duty
cycle for the channel (with CEXnPOL = 0) is achieved by clearing the module’s ECOM bit to 0. This will
Rev. 1.0
159
disable the comparison, and prevent the match edge from occuring. Note that although the PCA0CPn
compare register determines the duty cycle, it is not always appropriate for firmware to update this register
directly. See the sections on 8 to 11-bit and 16-bit PWM mode for additional details on adjusting duty cycle
in the various modes.
N
2 – PCA0CPn Duty Cycle = ----------------------------------------N
2
Equation 20.2. N-bit Edge-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 0 (N = PWM resolution)
Duty Cycle = PCA0CPn
------------------------N
2
Equation 20.3. N-bit Edge-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 0 (N = PWM resolution)
160
Rev. 1.0
20.4.2. Center Aligned PWM
When configured for center-aligned mode, a module will generate an edge transition at two points for every
2(N+1) PCA clock cycles, where N is the selected PWM resolution in bits. In center-aligned mode, these
two edges are referred to as the “up” and “down” edges. The polarity at the output pin is selectable, and
can be inverted by setting the appropriate channel bit to ‘1’ in the PCA0POL register.
The generated waveforms are centered about the points where the lower N bits of the PCA0 counter are
zero. The (N+1)th bit in the PCA0 counter acts as a selection between up and down edges. In 16-bit mode,
a special 17th bit is implemented internally for this purpose. At the center point, the (non-inverted) channel
output will be low when the (N+1)th bit is ‘0’ and high when the (N+1)th bit is ‘1’, except for cases of 0% and
100% duty cycle. Prior to inversion, an up edge sets the channel to logic high, and a down edge clears the
channel to logic low.
Down edges occur when the (N+1)th bit in the PCA0 counter is one, and a logical inversion of the value in
the module’s PCA0CPn register matches the main PCA0 counter register for the lowest N bits. For
example, with 10-bit PWM, the down edge will occur when the one’s complement of bits 9-0 of the
PCA0CPn register match bits 9-0 of the PCA0 counter, and bit 10 of the PCA0 counter is ‘1’.
Up edges occur when the (N+1)th bit in the PCA0 counter is zero, and the lowest N bits of the module’s
PCA0CPn register match the value of (PCA0 - 1). For example, with 10-bit PWM, the up edge will occur
when bits 9-0 of the PCA0CPn register are one less than bits 9-0 of the PCA0 counter, and bit 10 of the
PCA0 counter is ‘0’.
An example of the PWM timing in center-aligned mode for two channels is shown in Figure 20.7. In this
example, the CEX0POL and CEX1POL bits are cleared to 0.
center
PCA Clock
Counter (PCA0L)
0xFB
0xFC
0xFD
0xFE
0xFF
Capture / Compare
(PCA0CPL0)
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x01
center
Output (CEX0)
up edge
down edge
Capture / Compare
(PCA0CPL1)
0x04
center
Output (CEX1)
down edge
up edge
Figure 20.7. Center-Aligned PWM Timing
Rev. 1.0
161
Equation 20.4 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is cleared to 0.
Equation 20.5 describes the duty cycle when CEXnPOL in the PCA0POL regsiter is set to 1. The
equations are true only when the lowest N bits of the PCA0CPn register are not all 0’s or all 1’s. With
CEXnPOL equal to zero, 100% duty cycle is produced when the lowest N bits of PCA0CPn are all 0, and
0% duty cycle is produced when the lowest N bits of PCA0CPn are all 1. For a given PCA resolution, the
unused high bits in the PCA0 counter and the PCA0CPn compare registers are ignored, and only the used
bits of the PCA0CPn register determine the duty cycle.
Note that although the PCA0CPn compare register determines the duty cycle, it is not always appropriate
for firmware to update this register directly. See the sections on 8 to 11-bit and 16-bit PWM mode for
additional details on adjusting duty cycle in the various modes.
2 – PCA0CPn – 1--Duty Cycle = --------------------------------------------------2N
2
N
Equation 20.4. N-bit Center-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 0 (N = PWM resolution)
PCA0CPn + 1--Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------2N
2
Equation 20.5. N-bit Center-Aligned PWM Duty Cycle With CEXnPOL = 1 (N = PWM resolution)
162
Rev. 1.0
20.4.3. 8 to11-bit Pulse Width Modulator Modes
Each module can be used independently to generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) output on its
associated CEXn pin. The frequency of the output is dependent on the timebase for the PCA counter/timer,
and the setting of the PWM cycle length (8 through 11-bits). For backwards-compatibility with the 8-bit
PWM mode available on other devices, the 8-bit PWM mode operates slightly different than 9 through 11bit PWM modes. It is important to note that all channels configured for 8 to 11-bit PWM mode will use the
same cycle length. It is not possible to configure one channel for 8-bit PWM mode and another for 11-bit
mode (for example). However, other PCA channels can be configured to Pin Capture, High-Speed Output,
Software Timer, Frequency Output, or 16-bit PWM mode independently. Each channel configured for a
PWM mode can be individually selected to operate in edge-aligned or center-aligned mode.
20.4.3.1. 8-bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
In 8-bit PWM mode, the duty cycle is determined by the value of the low byte of the PCA0CPn register
(PCA0CPLn). To adjust the duty cycle, PCA0CPLn should not normally be written directly. Instead, it is
recommended to adjust the duty cycle using the high byte of the PCA0CPn register (register PCA0CPHn).
This allows seamless updating of the PWM waveform, as PCA0CPLn is reloaded automatically with the
value stored in PCA0CPHn during the overflow edge (in edge-aligned mode) or the up edge (in centeraligned mode).
Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register, and setting the CLSEL bits in register
PCA0PWM to 00b enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for
the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The COVF flag in PCA0PWM can be
used to detect the overflow (falling edge), which will occur every 256 PCA clock cycles.
20.4.3.2. 9 to 11-bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
In 9 to 11-bit PWM mode, the duty cycle is determined by the value of the least significant N bits of the
PCA0CPn register, where N is the selected PWM resolution.
To adjust the duty cycle, PCA0CPn should not normally be written directly. Instead, it is recommended to
adjust the duty cycle by writing to an “Auto-Reload” register, which is dual-mapped into the PCA0CPHn
and PCA0CPLn register locations. The data written to define the duty cycle should be right-justified in the
registers. The auto-reload registers are accessed (read or written) when the bit ARSEL in PCA0PWM is
set to 1. The capture/compare registers are accessed when ARSEL is set to 0. This allows seamless
updating of the PWM waveform, as the PCA0CPn register is reloaded automatically with the value stored
in the auto-reload registers during the overflow edge (in edge-aligned mode) or the up edge (in centeraligned mode).
Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register, and setting the CLSEL bits in register
PCA0PWM to 00b enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for
the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The COVF flag in PCA0PWM can be
used to detect the overflow or down edge.
The 9 to 11-bit PWM mode is selected by setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register,
and setting the CLSEL bits in register PCA0PWM to the desired cycle length (other than 8-bits). If the
MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs.
The COVF flag in PCA0PWM can be used to detect the overflow or down edge.
Important Note About PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the
PCA0CPn registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn
bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1.
Rev. 1.0
163
20.4.4. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode
A PCA module may also be operated in 16-Bit PWM mode. 16-bit PWM mode is independent of the other
(8 through 11-bit) PWM modes. The entire PCA0CP register is used to determine the duty cycle in 16-bit
PWM mode.
To output a varying duty cycle, new value writes should be synchronized with the PCA CCFn match flag to
ensure seamless updates.
16-Bit PWM mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, PWMn, and PWM16n bits in the PCA0CPMn register.
For a varying duty cycle, the match interrupt flag should be enabled (ECCFn = 1 AND MATn = 1) to help
synchronize the capture/compare register writes. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module
will be set each time a match edge or up edge occurs. The CF flag in PCA0CN can be used to detect the
overflow or down edge.
Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Capture/
Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit
to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1.
164
Rev. 1.0
20.5. Comparator Clear Function
In 8/9/10/11/16-bit PWM modes, the comparator clear function utilizes the Comparator0 output
synchronized to the system clock to clear CEXn to logic low for the current PWM cycle. This comparator
clear function can be enabled for each PWM channel by setting the CPCEn bits to 1 in the PCA0CLR SFR.
When the comparator clear function is disabled, CEXn is unaffected.
The asynchronous Comparator 0 output is logic high when the voltage of CP0+ is greater than CP0- and
logic low when the voltage of CP0+ is less than CP0-. The polarity of the Comparator 0 output is used to
clear CEXn as follows: when CPCPOL = 0, CEXn is cleared on the falling edge of the Comparator0 output
(see Figure 20.8); when CPCPOL = 1, CEXn is cleared on the rising edge of the Comparator0 output (see
Figure 20.9).
CEXn (CPCEn = 0)
Comparator0 Output
(CPCPOL = 0)
CEXn (CPCEn = 1)
Figure 20.8. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 0
CEXn (CPCEn = 0)
Comparator0 Output
(CPCPOL = 1)
CEXn (CPCEn = 1)
Figure 20.9. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 1
In the PWM cycle following the current cycle, should the Comparator 0 output remain logic low when
CPCPOL = 0 or logic high when CPCPOL = 1, CEXn will continue to be cleared. See Figure 20.10 and
Figure 20.11.
CEXn (CPCEn = 0)
Comparator0 Output
(CPCPOL = 0)
CEXn (CPCEn = 1)
Figure 20.10. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 0
Rev. 1.0
165
CEXn (CPCEn = 0)
Comparator0 Output
(CPCPOL = 1)
CEXn (CPCEn = 1)
Figure 20.11. CEXn with CPCEn = 1, CPCPOL = 1
166
Rev. 1.0
20.6. PCA Control Registers
Register 20.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control
Bit
7
6
5
Name
CF
CR
Type
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved
CCF2
CCF1
CCF0
R
RW
RW
RW
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD8 (bit-addressable)
Table 20.3. PCA0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CF
Function
PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the PCA Counter/Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When
the Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to
vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
6
CR
PCA Counter/Timer Run Control.
This bit enables/disables the PCA Counter/Timer.
0: PCA Counter/Timer disabled.
1: PCA Counter/Timer enabled.
5:3
Reserved
2
CCF2
Must write reset value.
PCA Module 2 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF2 interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine.
This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
1
CCF1
PCA Module 1 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF1 interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine.
This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
0
CCF0
PCA Module 0 Capture/Compare Flag.
This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF0 interrupt is
enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine.
This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software.
Rev. 1.0
167
Register 20.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode
Bit
7
6
Name
CIDL
Reserved
CPS
ECF
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD9
Table 20.4. PCA0MD Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CIDL
Function
PCA Counter/Timer Idle Control.
Specifies PCA behavior when CPU is in Idle Mode.
0: PCA continues to function normally while the system controller is in Idle Mode.
1: PCA operation is suspended while the system controller is in Idle Mode.
6:4
Reserved
3:1
CPS
Must write reset value.
PCA Counter/Timer Pulse Select.
These bits select the timebase source for the PCA counter.
000: System clock divided by 12.
001: System clock divided by 4.
010: Timer 0 overflow.
011: High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4).
100: System clock.
101: External clock divided by 8 (synchronized with the system clock).
110: Low frequency oscillator divided by 8.
111: Reserved.
0
ECF
PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the PCA Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt.
0: Disable the CF interrupt.
1: Enable a PCA Counter/Timer Overflow interrupt request when CF (PCA0CN.7) is set.
168
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.3. PCA0PWM: PCA PWM Configuration
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
ARSEL
ECOV
COVF
Reserved
CLSEL
Type
RW
RW
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xF7
Table 20.5. PCA0PWM Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
ARSEL
Function
Auto-Reload Register Select.
This bit selects whether to read and write the normal PCA capture/compare registers
(PCA0CPn), or the Auto-Reload registers at the same SFR addresses. This function is
used to define the reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM modes. In all other modes, the AutoReload registers have no function.
0: Read/Write Capture/Compare Registers at PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn.
1: Read/Write Auto-Reload Registers at PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn.
6
ECOV
Cycle Overflow Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the Cycle Overflow Flag (COVF) interrupt.
0: COVF will not generate PCA interrupts.
1: A PCA interrupt will be generated when COVF is set.
5
COVF
Cycle Overflow Flag.
This bit indicates an overflow of the 8th to 11th bit of the main PCA counter (PCA0). The
specific bit used for this flag depends on the setting of the Cycle Length Select bits. The
bit can be set by hardware or software, but must be cleared by software.
0: No overflow has occurred since the last time this bit was cleared.
1: An overflow has occurred since the last time this bit was cleared.
4:3
Reserved
Must write reset value.
2:0
CLSEL
Cycle Length Select.
When 16-bit PWM mode is not selected, these bits select the length of the PWM cycle.
This affects all channels configured for PWM which are not using 16-bit PWM mode.
These bits are ignored for individual channels configured to16-bit PWM mode.
000: 8 bits.
001: 9 bits.
010: 10 bits.
011: 11 bits.
100-111: Reserved.
Rev. 1.0
169
Register 20.4. PCA0CLR: PCA Comparator Clear Control
Bit
7
Name
CPCPOL
Type
RW
Reset
0
6
0
5
4
2
1
0
Reserved
CPCE2
CPCE1
CPCE0
R
RW
RW
RW
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
SFR Address: 0x9C
Table 20.6. PCA0CLR Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
CPCPOL
Function
Comparator Clear Polarity.
Selects the polarity of the comparator result that will clear the PCA channel(s).
0: PCA channel(s) will be cleared when comparator result goes logic low.
1: PCA channel(s) will be cleared when comparator result goes logic high.
6:3
Reserved
2
CPCE2
Must write reset value.
Comparator Clear Enable for CEX2.
Enables the comparator clear function on PCA channel 2.
1
CPCE1
Comparator Clear Enable for CEX1.
Enables the comparator clear function on PCA channel 1.
0
CPCE0
Comparator Clear Enable for CEX0.
Enables the comparator clear function on PCA channel 0.
170
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.5. PCA0CPM0: PCA Capture/Compare Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PWM16
ECOM
CAPP
CAPN
MAT
TOG
PWM
ECCF
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xDA
Table 20.7. PCA0CPM0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
PWM16
Function
16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable.
This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled.
0: 8 to 11-bit PWM selected.
1: 16-bit PWM selected.
6
ECOM
Comparator Function Enable.
This bit enables the comparator function.
5
CAPP
Capture Positive Function Enable.
This bit enables the positive edge capture capability.
4
CAPN
Capture Negative Function Enable.
This bit enables the negative edge capture capability.
3
MAT
Match Function Enable.
This bit enables the match function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a
module's capture/compare register cause the CCF0 bit in the PCA0MD register to be set
to logic 1.
2
TOG
Toggle Function Enable.
This bit enables the toggle function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with the
capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEX0 pin to toggle. If the PWM bit
is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode.
1
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable.
This bit enables the PWM function. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is output on the CEX0 pin. 8 to 11-bit PWM is used if PWM16 is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if
PWM16 is set to logic 1. If the TOG bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency
Output Mode.
0
ECCF
Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCF0) interrupt.
0: Disable CCF0 interrupts.
1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCF0 is set.
Rev. 1.0
171
Register 20.6. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
PCA0L
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xF9
Table 20.8. PCA0L Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
PCA0L
Function
PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte.
The PCA0L register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer.
172
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.7. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
PCA0H
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xFA
Table 20.9. PCA0H Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
PCA0H
Function
PCA Counter/Timer High Byte.
The PCA0H register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer. Reads
of this register will read the contents of a snapshot register, whose contents are updated
only when the contents of PCA0L are read.
Rev. 1.0
173
Register 20.8. PCA0CPL0: PCA Capture Module Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
PCA0CPL0
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xFB
Table 20.10. PCA0CPL0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
7:0
Name
Function
PCA0CPL0 PCA Capture Module Low Byte.
The PCA0CPL0 register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This register address also allows access to the low byte of the corresponding PCA channels
auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM controls which register is accessed.
Note: A write to this register will clear the module’s ECOM bit to a 0.
174
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.9. PCA0CPH0: PCA Capture Module High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
PCA0CPH0
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xFC
Table 20.11. PCA0CPH0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
7:0
Name
Function
PCA0CPH0 PCA Capture Module High Byte.
The PCA0CPH0 register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This
register address also allows access to the high byte of the corresponding PCA channels
auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM controls which register is accessed.
Note: A write to this register will set the module’s ECOM bit to a 1.
Rev. 1.0
175
Register 20.10. PCA0POL: PCA Output Polarity
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
CEX2POL
CEX1POL
CEX0POL
Type
R
RW
RW
RW
0
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x96
Table 20.12. PCA0POL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:3
Reserved
Must write reset value.
2
CEX2POL
CEX2 Output Polarity.
Selects the polarity of the CEX2 output channel. When this bit is modified, the change
takes effect at the pin immediately.
0: Use default polarity.
1: Invert polarity.
1
CEX1POL
CEX1 Output Polarity.
Selects the polarity of the CEX1 output channel. When this bit is modified, the change
takes effect at the pin immediately.
0: Use default polarity.
1: Invert polarity.
0
CEX0POL
CEX0 Output Polarity.
Selects the polarity of the CEX0 output channel. When this bit is modified, the change
takes effect at the pin immediately.
0: Use default polarity.
1: Invert polarity.
176
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.11. PCA0CENT: PCA Center Alignment Enable
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
CEX2CEN
CEX1CEN
CEX0CEN
Type
R
RW
RW
RW
0
0
0
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x9E
Table 20.13. PCA0CENT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:3
Reserved
Must write reset value.
2
CEX2CEN
CEX2 Center Alignment Enable.
Selects the alignment properties of the CEX2 output channel when operated in any of the
PWM modes. This bit does not affect the operation of non-PWM modes.
0: Edge-aligned.
1: Center-aligned.
1
CEX1CEN
CEX1 Center Alignment Enable.
Selects the alignment properties of the CEX1 output channel when operated in any of the
PWM modes. This bit does not affect the operation of non-PWM modes.
0: Edge-aligned.
1: Center-aligned.
0
CEX0CEN
CEX0 Center Alignment Enable.
Selects the alignment properties of the CEX0 output channel when operated in any of the
PWM modes. This bit does not affect the operation of non-PWM modes.
0: Edge-aligned.
1: Center-aligned.
Rev. 1.0
177
Register 20.12. PCA0CPM1: PCA Capture/Compare Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PWM16
ECOM
CAPP
CAPN
MAT
TOG
PWM
ECCF
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xDB
Table 20.14. PCA0CPM1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
PWM16
Function
16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable.
This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled.
0: 8 to 11-bit PWM selected.
1: 16-bit PWM selected.
6
ECOM
Comparator Function Enable.
This bit enables the comparator function.
5
CAPP
Capture Positive Function Enable.
This bit enables the positive edge capture capability.
4
CAPN
Capture Negative Function Enable.
This bit enables the negative edge capture capability.
3
MAT
Match Function Enable.
This bit enables the match function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a
module's capture/compare register cause the CCF1 bit in the PCA0MD register to be set
to logic 1.
2
TOG
Toggle Function Enable.
This bit enables the toggle function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with the
capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEX1 pin to toggle. If the PWM bit
is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode.
1
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable.
This bit enables the PWM function. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is output on the CEX1 pin. 8 to 11-bit PWM is used if PWM16 is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if
PWM16 is set to logic 1. If the TOG bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency
Output Mode.
0
ECCF
Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCF1) interrupt.
0: Disable CCF1 interrupts.
1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCF1 is set.
178
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.13. PCA0CPM2: PCA Capture/Compare Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PWM16
ECOM
CAPP
CAPN
MAT
TOG
PWM
ECCF
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xDC
Table 20.15. PCA0CPM2 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
PWM16
Function
16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable.
This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled.
0: 8 to 11-bit PWM selected.
1: 16-bit PWM selected.
6
ECOM
Comparator Function Enable.
This bit enables the comparator function.
5
CAPP
Capture Positive Function Enable.
This bit enables the positive edge capture capability.
4
CAPN
Capture Negative Function Enable.
This bit enables the negative edge capture capability.
3
MAT
Match Function Enable.
This bit enables the match function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a
module's capture/compare register cause the CCF2 bit in the PCA0MD register to be set
to logic 1.
2
TOG
Toggle Function Enable.
This bit enables the toggle function. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with the
capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEX2 pin to toggle. If the PWM bit
is also set to logic 1, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode.
1
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable.
This bit enables the PWM function. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is output on the CEX2 pin. 8 to 11-bit PWM is used if PWM16 is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if
PWM16 is set to logic 1. If the TOG bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency
Output Mode.
0
ECCF
Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable.
This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCF2) interrupt.
0: Disable CCF2 interrupts.
1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCF2 is set.
Rev. 1.0
179
Register 20.14. PCA0CPL1: PCA Capture Module Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
PCA0CPL1
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE9
Table 20.16. PCA0CPL1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
7:0
Name
Function
PCA0CPL1 PCA Capture Module Low Byte.
The PCA0CPL1 register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This register address also allows access to the low byte of the corresponding PCA channels
auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM controls which register is accessed.
Note: A write to this register will clear the modules ECOM bit to a 0.
180
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.15. PCA0CPH1: PCA Capture Module High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
PCA0CPH1
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xEA
Table 20.17. PCA0CPH1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
7:0
Name
Function
PCA0CPH1 PCA Capture Module High Byte.
The PCA0CPH1 register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This
register address also allows access to the high byte of the corresponding PCA channels
auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM controls which register is accessed.
Note: A write to this register will set the modules ECOM bit to a 1.
Rev. 1.0
181
Register 20.16. PCA0CPL2: PCA Capture Module Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
PCA0CPL2
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xEB
Table 20.18. PCA0CPL2 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
7:0
Name
Function
PCA0CPL2 PCA Capture Module Low Byte.
The PCA0CPL2 register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This register address also allows access to the low byte of the corresponding PCA channels
auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM controls which register is accessed.
Note: A write to this register will clear the modules ECOM bit to a 0.
182
Rev. 1.0
Register 20.17. PCA0CPH2: PCA Capture Module High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
PCA0CPH2
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xEC
Table 20.19. PCA0CPH2 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
7:0
Name
Function
PCA0CPH2 PCA Capture Module High Byte.
The PCA0CPH2 register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module.This
register address also allows access to the high byte of the corresponding PCA channels
auto-reload value for 9 to 11-bit PWM mode. The ARSEL bit in register PCA0PWM controls which register is accessed.
Note: A write to this register will set the modules ECOM bit to a 1.
Rev. 1.0
183
21. Port I/O (Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Crossbar, and Port Match)
Digital and analog resources on the C8051F85x/86x family are externally available on the device’s multipurpose I/O pins. Port pins P0.0-P1.7 can be defined as general-purpose I/O (GPIO), assigned to one of
the internal digital resources through the crossbar, or assigned to an analog function. Port pins P2.0 and
P2.1 can be used as GPIO. Port pin P2.0 is shared with the C2 Interface Data signal (C2D). The designer
has complete control over which functions are assigned, limited only by the number of physical I/O pins.
This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the use of a priority crossbar decoder. Note that
the state of a port I/O pin can always be read in the corresponding port latch, regardless of the crossbar
settings.
The crossbar assigns the selected internal digital resources to the I/O pins based on the Priority Decoder
(Figure 21.2 and Figure 21.3). The registers XBR0, XBR1 and XBR2 are used to select internal digital
functions.
The port I/O cells are configured as either push-pull or open-drain in the Port Output Mode registers
(PnMDOUT, where n = 0,1). Additionally, each bank of port pins (P0, P1, and P2) has two selectable drive
strength settings.
2
UART0
4
Priority Crossbar
Decoder
SPI0
2
SMBus0
Port 0
Control
&
Config
P0.0 / VREF
P0.1 / AGND
P0.2
P0.3 / EXTCLK
P0.4
P0.5
P0.6 / CNVSTR
P0.7
Port 1
Control
&
Config
P1.0
P1.1
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
P1.6
P1.7
Port 2
Control
&
Config
P2.0 / C2D
P2.1
2
CMP0 Out
2
CMP1 Out
1
SYSCLK
3
PCA (CEXn)
ADC0 In
1
PCA (ECI)
CMP0/1 In
1
Timer 0
Port Match
1
Timer 1
INT0 / INT1
1
Timer 2
Figure 21.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram
184
Rev. 1.0
21.1. General Port I/O Initialization
Port I/O initialization consists of the following steps:
1. Select the input mode (analog or digital) for all port pins, using the Port Input Mode register
(PnMDIN).
2. Select the output mode (open-drain or push-pull) for all port pins, using the Port Output Mode
register (PnMDOUT).
3. Select any pins to be skipped by the I/O crossbar using the Port Skip registers (PnSKIP).
4. Assign port pins to desired peripherals.
5. Enable the crossbar (XBARE = ‘1’).
All port pins must be configured as either analog or digital inputs. Any pins to be used as Comparator or
ADC inputs should be configured as an analog inputs. When a pin is configured as an analog input, its
weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver are disabled. This process saves power and reduces noise
on the analog input. Pins configured as digital inputs may still be used by analog peripherals; however this
practice is not recommended.
Additionally, all analog input pins should be configured to be skipped by the crossbar (accomplished by
setting the associated bits in PnSKIP). Port input mode is set in the PnMDIN register, where a ‘1’ indicates
a digital input, and a ‘0’ indicates an analog input. All pins default to digital inputs on reset.
The output driver characteristics of the I/O pins are defined using the Port Output Mode registers
(PnMDOUT). Each port output driver can be configured as either open drain or push-pull. This selection is
required even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is not automatic. The only
exception to this is the SMBus (SDA, SCL) pins, which are configured as open-drain regardless of the
PnMDOUT settings. When the WEAKPUD bit in XBR1 is ‘0’, a weak pullup is enabled for all Port I/O
configured as open-drain. WEAKPUD does not affect the push-pull Port I/O. Furthermore, the weak pullup
is turned off on an output that is driving a ‘0’ to avoid unnecessary power dissipation.
Registers XBR0 and XBR1 must be loaded with the appropriate values to select the digital I/O functions
required by the design. Setting the XBARE bit in XBR2 to ‘1’ enables the crossbar. Until the crossbar is
enabled, the external pins remain as standard port I/O (in input mode), regardless of the XBRn Register
settings. For given XBRn Register settings, one can determine the I/O pin-out using the Priority Decode
Table; as an alternative, Silicon Labs provides configuration utility software to determine the port I/O pinassignments based on the crossbar register settings.
The crossbar must be enabled to use port pins as standard port I/O in output mode. Port output drivers of
all crossbar pins are disabled whenever the crossbar is disabled.
Rev. 1.0
185
21.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog and Digital Functions
Port I/O pins can be assigned to various analog, digital, and external interrupt functions. The port pins
assigned to analog functions should be configured for analog I/O, and port pins assigned to digital or
external interrupt functions should be configured for digital I/O.
21.2.1. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog Functions
Table 21.1 shows all available analog functions that require port I/O assignments. Table 21.1 shows the
potential mapping of port I/O to each analog function.
Table 21.1. Port I/O Assignment for Analog Functions
Analog Function
Potentially Assignable
Port Pins
SFR(s) used for
Assignment
ADC Input
P0.0 - P1.7
ADC0MX, PnSKIP,
PnMDIN
Comparator0 Input
P0.0 - P1.7
CPT0MX, PnSKIP,
PnMDIN
Comparator1 Input
P0.0 - P1.7
CPT1MX, PnSKIP,
PnMDIN
Voltage Reference (VREF)
P0.0
REF0CN, PnSKIP,
PnMDIN
Reference Ground (AGND)
P0.1
REF0CN, PnSKIP,
PnMDIN
21.2.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Digital Functions
Any port pins not assigned to analog functions may be assigned to digital functions or used as GPIO. Most
digital functions rely on the crossbar for pin assignment; however, some digital functions bypass the
crossbar in a manner similar to the analog functions listed above. Table 21.2 shows all digital functions
available through the crossbar and the potential mapping of port I/O to each function.
Table 21.2. Port I/O Assignment for Digital Functions
Digital Function
Potentially Assignable Port Pins
UART0, SPI0, SMBus0, CP0, CP0A, Any port pin available for assignment by the
CP1, CP1A, SYSCLK, PCA0 (CEX0- crossbar. This includes P0.0 - P1.7 pins which
2 and ECI), T0, T1 or T2.
have their PnSKIP bit set to ‘0’.
Note: The crossbar will always assign UART0
pins to P0.4 and P0.5.
Any pin used for GPIO
186
P0.0 - P2.1
Rev. 1.0
SFR(s) Used for
Assignment
XBR0, XBR1, XBR2
P0SKIP, P1SKIP,
P2SKIP
21.2.3. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Fixed Digital Functions
Fixed digital functions include external clock input as well as external event trigger functions, which can be
used to trigger events such as an ADC conversion, fire an interrupt or wake the device from idle mode
when a transition occurs on a digital I/O pin. The fixed digital functions do not require dedicated pins and
will function on both GPIO pins and pins in use by the crossbar. Fixed digital functions cannot be used on
pins configured for analog I/O. Table 21.3 shows all available fixed digital functions and the potential
mapping of port I/O to each function.
Table 21.3. Port I/O Assignment for Fixed Digital Functions
Function
Potentially Assignable Port Pins
SFR(s) used for
Assignment
External Interrupt 0
P0.0 - P0.7
IT01CF
External Interrupt 1
P0.0 - P0.7
IT01CF
Conversion Start (CNVSTR)
P0.6
ADC0CN
External Clock Input (EXTCLK)
P0.3
OSCXCN
P0.0 - P1.7
P0MASK, P0MAT
P1MASK, P1MAT
Port Match
Rev. 1.0
187
21.3. Priority Crossbar Decoder
The priority crossbar decoder assigns a priority to each I/O function, starting at the top with UART0. When
a digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned port pin is assigned to that resource
(excluding UART0, which is always at pins P0.4 and P0.5). If a port pin is assigned, the crossbar skips that
pin when assigning the next selected resource. Additionally, the crossbar will skip port pins whose
associated bits in the PnSKIP registers are set. The PnSKIP registers allow software to skip port pins that
are to be used for analog input, dedicated functions, or GPIO.
Important Note on Crossbar Configuration: If a port pin is claimed by a peripheral without use of the
crossbar, its corresponding PnSKIP bit should be set. This applies to P0.0 if VREF is used, P0.1 if AGND
is used, P0.3 if the EXTCLK input is enabled, P0.6 if the ADC is configured to use the external conversion
start signal (CNVSTR), and any selected ADC or comparator inputs. The crossbar skips selected pins as if
they were already assigned, and moves to the next unassigned pin.
Figure 21.2 shows all of the potential peripheral-to-pin assignments available to the crossbar. Note that
this does not mean any peripheral can always be assigned to the highlighted pins. The actual pin
assignments are determined by the priority of the enabled peripherals.
5
0
0
6
7
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
3
EXTCLK
VREF
QFN-20 Package
CNVSTR
SOIC-16 Package
P2
4
5
6
0
0
0
7
0
1
N/A
0
P1
4
C2D
0
3
N/A
2
N/A
1
N/A
P0
0
N/A
Port
Pin Number
QSOP-24 Package
UART0-TX
UART0-RX
SPI0-SCK
SPI0-MISO
SPI0-MOSI
SPI0-NSS*
Pins Not Available on Crossbar
SMB0-SDA
SMB0-SCL
CMP0-CP0
CMP0-CP0A
CMP1-CP1
CMP1-CP1A
SYSCLK
PCA0-CEX0
PCA0-CEX1
PCA0-CEX2
PCA0-ECI
Timer0-T0
Timer1-T1
Timer2-T2
Pin Skip Settings
0
0
0
P0SKIP
0
0
P1SKIP
The crossbar peripherals are assigned in priority order from top to bottom.
These boxes represent Port pins which can potentially be assigned to a peripheral.
Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar. When these signals are
enabled, the Crossbar should be manually configured to skip the corresponding port pins.
Pins can be “skipped” by setting the corresponding bit in PnSKIP to 1.
* NSS is only pinned out when the SPI is in 4-wire mode.
Figure 21.2. Crossbar Priority Decoder - Possible Pin Assignments
188
Rev. 1.0
Registers XBR0, XBR1 and XBR2 are used to assign the digital I/O resources to the physical I/O port pins.
Note that when the SMBus is selected, the crossbar assigns both pins associated with the SMBus (SDA
and SCL); when UART0 is selected, the crossbar assigns both pins associated with UART0 (TX and RX).
UART0 pin assignments are fixed for bootloading purposes: UART0 TX is always assigned to P0.4;
UART0 RX is always assigned to P0.5. Standard port I/Os appear contiguously after the prioritized
functions have been assigned.
Figure 21.3 shows an example of the resulting pin assignments of the device with UART0 and SPI0
enabled and the EXTCLK (P0.3) pin skipped (P0SKIP = 0x08). UART0 is the highest priority and it will be
assigned first. The UART0 pins can only appear on P0.4 and P0.5, so that is where it is assigned. The
next-highest enabled peripheral is SPI0. P0.0, P0.1 and P0.2 are free, so SPI0 takes these three pins. The
fourth pin, NSS, is routed to P0.6 because P0.3 is skipped and P0.4 and P0.5 are already occupied by the
UART. The other pins on the device are available for use as general-purpose digital I/O or analog
functions.
5
0
0
6
7
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
3
EXTCLK
VREF
QFN-20 Package
CNVSTR
SOIC-16 Package
P2
4
5
6
0
0
0
7
0
1
N/A
0
P1
4
C2D
0
3
N/A
2
N/A
1
N/A
P0
0
N/A
Port
Pin Number
QSOP-24 Package
UART0-TX
UART0-RX
SPI0-SCK
SPI0-MISO
SPI0-MOSI
SPI0-NSS*
Pins Not Available on Crossbar
SMB0-SDA
SMB0-SCL
CMP0-CP0
CMP0-CP0A
CMP1-CP1
CMP1-CP1A
SYSCLK
PCA0-CEX0
PCA0-CEX1
PCA0-CEX2
PCA0-ECI
Timer0-T0
Timer1-T1
Timer2-T2
Pin Skip Settings
0
1
0
P0SKIP
0
0
P1SKIP
The crossbar peripherals are assigned in priority order from top to bottom.
These boxes represent Port pins which can potentially be assigned to a peripheral.
Special Function Signals are not assigned by the crossbar. When these signals are
enabled, the Crossbar should be manually configured to skip the corresponding port pins.
Pins can be “skipped” by setting the corresponding bit in PnSKIP to 1.
* NSS is only pinned out when the SPI is in 4-wire mode.
Figure 21.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder Example
Rev. 1.0
189
Note: The SPI can be operated in either 3-wire or 4-wire modes, pending the state of the NSSMD1–
NSSMD0 bits in register SPI0CN. According to the SPI mode, the NSS signal may or may not be routed to
a port pin. The order in which SMBus pins are assigned is defined by the SWAP bit in the SMB0TC
register.
190
Rev. 1.0
21.4. Port I/O Modes of Operation
Port pins are configured by firmware as digital or analog I/O using the PnMDIN registers. On reset, all port
I/O cells default to a high impedance state with weak pull-ups enabled. Until the crossbar is enabled, both
the high and low port I/O drive circuits are explicitly disabled on all crossbar pins. Port pins configured as
digital I/O may still be used by analog peripherals; however, this practice is not recommended and may
result in measurement errors.
21.4.1. Configuring Port Pins For Analog Modes
Any pins to be used for analog functions should be configured for analog mode. When a pin is configured
for analog I/O, its weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver are disabled. Port pins configured for
analog functions will always read back a value of ‘0’ in the corresponding Pn Port Latch register. To
configure a pin as analog, the following steps should be taken:
1. Clear the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDIN register to ‘0’. This selects analog mode for the
pin.
2. Set the bit associated with the pin in the Pn register to ‘1’.
3. Skip the bit associated with the pin in the PnSKIP register to ensure the crossbar does not attempt
to assign a function to the pin.
21.4.2. Configuring Port Pins For Digital Modes
Any pins to be used by digital peripherals or as GPIO should be configured as digital I/O (PnMDIN.n = ‘1’).
For digital I/O pins, one of two output modes (push-pull or open-drain) must be selected using the
PnMDOUT registers.
Push-pull outputs (PnMDOUT.n = ‘1’) drive the port pad to the supply rails based on the output logic value
of the port pin. Open-drain outputs have the high side driver disabled; therefore, they only drive the port
pad to the low-side rail when the output logic value is ‘0’ and become high impedance inputs (both high low
drivers turned off) when the output logic value is ‘1’.
When a digital I/O cell is placed in the high impedance state, a weak pull-up transistor pulls the port pad to
the high-side rail to ensure the digital input is at a defined logic state. Weak pull-ups are disabled when the
I/O cell is driven low to minimize power consumption, and they may be globally disabled by setting
WEAKPUD to ‘1’. The user should ensure that digital I/O are always internally or externally pulled or driven
to a valid logic state to minimize power consumption. Port pins configured for digital I/O always read back
the logic state of the port pad, regardless of the output logic value of the port pin.
To configure a pin as digital input:
1. Set the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDIN register to ‘1’. This selects digital mode for the
pin.
2. Clear the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDOUT register to ‘0’. This configures the pin as
open-drain.
3. Set the bit associated with the pin in the Pn register to ‘1’. This tells the output driver to “drive” logic
high. Because the pin is configured as open-drain, the high-side driver is not active, and the pin
may be used as an input.
Open-drain outputs are configured exactly as digital inputs. However, the pin may be driven low by an
assigned peripheral, or by writing ‘0’ to the associated bit in the Pn register if the signal is a GPIO.
To configure a pin as a digital, push-pull output:
1. Set the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDIN register to ‘1’. This selects digital mode for the
pin.
2. Set the bit associated with the pin in the PnMDOUT register to ‘1’. This configures the pin as pushpull.
If a digital pin is to be used as a general-purpose I/O, or with a digital function that is not part of the
crossbar, the bit associated with the pin in the PnSKIP register can be set to ‘1’ to ensure the crossbar
does not attempt to assign a function to the pin.
Rev. 1.0
191
21.4.3. Port Drive Strength
Port drive strength can be controlled on a port-by-port basis using the PRTDRV register. Each port has a
bit in PRTDRV to select the high or low drive strength setting for all pins on that port. By default, all ports
are configured for high drive strength.
WEAKPUD
(Weak Pull-Up Disable)
PxMDOUT.x
(1 for push-pull)
(0 for open-drain)
VDD
XBARE
(Crossbar
Enable)
VDD
(WEAK)
PORT
PAD
Px.x – Output
Logic Value
(Port Latch or
Crossbar)
PxMDIN.x
(1 for digital)
(0 for analog)
To/From Analog
Peripheral
GND
Px.x – Input Logic Value
(Reads 0 when pin is configured as an analog I/O)
Figure 21.4. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram
21.5. Port Match
Port match functionality allows system events to be triggered by a logic value change on one or more port
I/O pins. A software controlled value stored in the PnMATCH registers specifies the expected or normal
logic values of the associated port pins (for example, P0MATCH.0 would correspond to P0.0). A port
mismatch event occurs if the logic levels of the port’s input pins no longer match the software controlled
value. This allows software to be notified if a certain change or pattern occurs on the input pins regardless
of the XBRn settings.
The PnMASK registers can be used to individually select which pins should be compared against the
PnMATCH registers. A port mismatch event is generated if (Pn & PnMASK) does not equal
(PnMATCH & PnMASK) for all ports with a PnMAT and PnMASK register.
A port mismatch event may be used to generate an interrupt or wake the device from idle mode. See the
interrupts and power options chapters for more details on interrupt and wake-up sources.
21.6. Direct Read/Write Access to Port I/O Pins
All port I/O are accessed through corresponding special function registers (SFRs) that are both byte
addressable and bit addressable. When writing to a port, the value written to the SFR is latched to maintain
the output data value at each pin. When reading, the logic levels of the port's input pins are returned
regardless of the XBRn settings (i.e., even when the pin is assigned to another signal by the crossbar, the
port register can always read its corresponding port I/O pin). The exception to this is the execution of the
read-modify-write instructions that target a Port Latch register as the destination. The read-modify-write
instructions when operating on a port SFR are the following: ANL, ORL, XRL, JBC, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ
and MOV, CLR or SETB, when the destination is an individual bit in a port SFR. For these instructions, the
value of the latch register (not the pin) is read, modified, and written back to the SFR.
192
Rev. 1.0
21.7. Port I/O and Pin Configuration Control Registers
Register 21.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar 0
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SYSCKE
CP1AE
CP1E
CP0AE
CP0E
SMB0E
SPI0E
URT0E
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE1
Table 21.4. XBR0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
SYSCKE
Function
SYSCLK Output Enable.
0: SYSCLK unavailable at Port pin.
1: SYSCLK output routed to Port pin.
6
CP1AE
Comparator1 Asynchronous Output Enable.
0: Asynchronous CP1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: Asynchronous CP1 routed to Port pin.
5
CP1E
Comparator1 Output Enable.
0: CP1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CP1 routed to Port pin.
4
CP0AE
Comparator0 Asynchronous Output Enable.
0: Asynchronous CP0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: Asynchronous CP0 routed to Port pin.
3
CP0E
Comparator0 Output Enable.
0: CP0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: CP0 routed to Port pin.
2
SMB0E
SMBus0 I/O Enable.
0: SMBus0 I/O unavailable at Port pins.
1: SMBus0 I/O routed to Port pins.
1
SPI0E
SPI I/O Enable.
0: SPI I/O unavailable at Port pins.
1: SPI I/O routed to Port pins. The SPI can be assigned either 3 or 4 GPIO pins.
0
URT0E
UART I/O Output Enable.
0: UART I/O unavailable at Port pin.
1: UART TX, RX routed to Port pins P0.4 and P0.5.
Rev. 1.0
193
Register 21.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar 1
Bit
7
Name
6
Reserved
5
4
3
2
T2E
T1E
T0E
ECIE
PCA0ME
RW
Type
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE2
Table 21.5. XBR1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:6
Reserved
5
T2E
Function
Must write reset value.
T2 Enable.
0: T2 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T2 routed to Port pin.
4
T1E
T1 Enable.
0: T1 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T1 routed to Port pin.
3
T0E
T0 Enable.
0: T0 unavailable at Port pin.
1: T0 routed to Port pin.
2
ECIE
PCA0 External Counter Input Enable.
0: ECI unavailable at Port pin.
1: ECI routed to Port pin.
1:0
PCA0ME
PCA Module I/O Enable Bits.
00: All PCA I/O unavailable at Port pins.
01: CEX0 routed to Port pin.
10: CEX0, CEX1 routed to Port pins.
11: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 routed to Port pins.
194
Rev. 1.0
1
0
0
0
Register 21.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar 2
Bit
7
6
5
Name
WEAKPUD
XBARE
Reserved
Type
RW
RW
R
Reset
0
0
0
4
0
3
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xE3
Table 21.6. XBR2 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
WEAKPUD
Function
Port I/O Weak Pullup Disable.
0: Weak Pullups enabled (except for Ports whose I/O are configured for analog mode).
1: Weak Pullups disabled.
6
XBARE
Crossbar Enable.
0: Crossbar disabled.
1: Crossbar enabled.
5:0
Reserved
Must write reset value.
Rev. 1.0
195
Register 21.4. PRTDRV: Port Drive Strength
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
P2DRV
P1DRV
P0DRV
Type
R
RW
RW
RW
1
1
1
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xF6
Table 21.7. PRTDRV Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:3
Reserved
Must write reset value.
2
P2DRV
Port 2 Drive Strength.
0: All pins on P2 use low drive strength.
1: All pins on P2 use high drive strength.
1
P1DRV
Port 1 Drive Strength.
0: All pins on P1 use low drive strength.
1: All pins on P1 use high drive strength.
0
P0DRV
Port 0 Drive Strength.
0: All pins on P0 use low drive strength.
1: All pins on P0 use high drive strength.
196
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.5. P0MASK: Port 0 Mask
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P0MASK
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xFE
Table 21.8. P0MASK Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P0MASK
Function
Port 0 Mask Value.
Selects P0 pins to be compared to the corresponding bits in P0MAT.
0: P0.x pin logic value is ignored and will cause a port mismatch event.
1: P0.x pin logic value is compared to P0MAT.x.
Rev. 1.0
197
Register 21.6. P0MAT: Port 0 Match
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P0MAT
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xFD
Table 21.9. P0MAT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P0MAT
Function
Port 0 Match Value.
Match comparison value used on P0 pins for bits in P0MASK which are set to 1.
0: P0.x pin logic value is compared with logic LOW.
1: P0.x pin logic value is compared with logic HIGH.
198
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.7. P0: Port 0 Pin Latch
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P0
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0x80 (bit-addressable)
Table 21.10. P0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P0
Function
Port 0 Data.
Writing this register sets the port latch logic value for the associated I/O pins configured
as digital I/O.
Reading this register returns the logic value at the pin, regardless if it is configured as
output or input.
Rev. 1.0
199
Register 21.8. P0MDIN: Port 0 Input Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P0MDIN
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xF1
Table 21.11. P0MDIN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P0MDIN
Function
Port 0 Input Mode.
Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital
receiver disabled.
0: Corresponding P0.x pin is configured for analog mode.
1: Corresponding P0.x pin is configured for digital mode.
200
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.9. P0MDOUT: Port 0 Output Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P0MDOUT
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA4
Table 21.12. P0MDOUT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P0MDOUT
Function
Port 0 Output Mode.
These bits are only applicable when the pin is configured for digital mode using the
P0MDIN register.
0: Corresponding P0.n Output is open-drain.
1: Corresponding P0.n Output is push-pull.
Rev. 1.0
201
Register 21.10. P0SKIP: Port 0 Skip
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P0SKIP
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD4
Table 21.13. P0SKIP Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P0SKIP
Function
Port 0 Skip.
These bits select port pins to be skipped by the crossbar decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped.
0: Corresponding P0.x pin is not skipped by the crossbar.
1: Corresponding P0.x pin is skipped by the crossbar.
202
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.11. P1MASK: Port 1 Mask
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P1MASK
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xEE
Table 21.14. P1MASK Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P1MASK
Function
Port 1 Mask Value.
Selects P1 pins to be compared to the corresponding bits in P1MAT.
0: P1.x pin logic value is ignored and will cause a port mismatch event.
1: P1.x pin logic value is compared to P1MAT.x.
Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits
(P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages.
Rev. 1.0
203
Register 21.12. P1MAT: Port 1 Match
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P1MAT
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xED
Table 21.15. P1MAT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P1MAT
Function
Port 1 Match Value.
Match comparison value used on P1 pins for bits in P1MASK which are set to 1.
0: P1.x pin logic value is compared with logic LOW.
1: P1.x pin logic value is compared with logic HIGH.
Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits
(P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages.
204
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.13. P1: Port 1 Pin Latch
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P1
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0x90 (bit-addressable)
Table 21.16. P1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P1
Function
Port 1 Data.
Writing this register sets the port latch logic value for the associated I/O pins configured
as digital I/O.
Reading this register returns the logic value at the pin, regardless if it is configured as
output or input.
Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits
(P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages.
Rev. 1.0
205
Register 21.14. P1MDIN: Port 1 Input Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P1MDIN
Type
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xF2
Table 21.17. P1MDIN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P1MDIN
Function
Port 1 Input Mode.
Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital
receiver disabled.
0: Corresponding P1.x pin is configured for analog mode.
1: Corresponding P1.x pin is configured for digital mode.
Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits
(P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages.
206
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.15. P1MDOUT: Port 1 Output Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P1MDOUT
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA5
Table 21.18. P1MDOUT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P1MDOUT
Function
Port 1 Output Mode.
These bits are only applicable when the pin is configured for digital mode using the
P1MDIN register.
0: Corresponding P1.n Output is open-drain.
1: Corresponding P1.n Output is push-pull.
Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits
(P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages.
Rev. 1.0
207
Register 21.16. P1SKIP: Port 1 Skip
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
P1SKIP
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD5
Table 21.19. P1SKIP Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
P1SKIP
Function
Port 1 Skip.
These bits select port pins to be skipped by the crossbar decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped.
0: Corresponding P1.x pin is not skipped by the crossbar.
1: Corresponding P1.x pin is skipped by the crossbar.
Note: Port 1 consists of 8 bits (P1.0-P1.7) on QSOP24 packages and 7 bits (P1.0-P1.6) on QFN20 packages and 4 bits
(P1.0-P1.3) on SOIC16 packages.
208
Rev. 1.0
Register 21.17. P2: Port 2 Pin Latch
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
P2
Type
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
SFR Address: 0xA0 (bit-addressable)
Table 21.20. P2 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:2
Reserved
1:0
P2
Function
Must write reset value.
Port 2 Data.
Writing this register sets the port latch logic value for the associated I/O pins configured
as digital I/O.
Reading this register returns the logic value at the pin, regardless if it is configured as
output or input.
Note: Port 2 consists of 2 bits (P2.0-P2.1) on QSOP24 devices and 1 bit (P2.0) on QFN20 and SOIC16 packages.
Rev. 1.0
209
Register 21.18. P2MDOUT: Port 2 Output Mode
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
P2MDOUT
Type
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA6
Table 21.21. P2MDOUT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7:2
Reserved
Must write reset value.
1:0
P2MDOUT
Port 2 Output Mode.
0: Corresponding P2.n Output is open-drain.
1: Corresponding P2.n Output is push-pull.
Note: Port 2 consists of 2 bits (P2.0-P2.1) on QSOP24 devices and 1 bit (P2.0) on QFN20 and SOIC16 packages.
210
Rev. 1.0
0
22. Reset Sources and Supply Monitor
Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. Upon entering this
reset state, the following events occur:
CIP-51
halts program execution
Special Function Registers (SFRs) are initialized to their defined reset values
External port pins are placed in a known state
Interrupts and timers are disabled.
All SFRs are reset to the predefined values noted in the SFR detailed descriptions. The contents of internal
data memory are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved. However, since the
stack pointer SFR is reset, the stack is effectively lost, even though the data on the stack is not altered.
The Port I/O latches are reset to 0xFF (all logic ones) in open-drain, low-drive mode. Weak pullups are
enabled during and after the reset. For VDD Monitor and power-on resets, the RST pin is driven low until
the device exits the reset state. Note that during a power-on event, there may be a short delay before the
POR circuitry fires and the RST pin is driven low. During that time, the RST pin will be weakly pulled to the
VDD supply pin.
On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, the Watchdog Timer is enabled and the
system clock defaults to the internal oscillator. Program execution begins at location 0x0000.
Reset Sources
RST
Supply Monitor or
Power-up
Missing Clock
Detector
Watchdog Timer
system reset
Software Reset
Comparator 0
Flash Error
Figure 22.1. Reset Sources
Rev. 1.0
211
22.1. Power-On Reset
During power-up, the POR circuit will fire. When POR fires, the device is held in a reset state and the RST
pin is driven low until VDD settles above VRST. Two delays are present during the supply ramp time. First, a
delay will occur before the POR circuitry fires and pulls the RST pin low. A second delay occurs before the
device is released from reset; the delay decreases as the VDD ramp time increases (VDD ramp time is
defined as how fast VDD ramps from 0 V to VRST). Figure 22.2. plots the power-on reset timing. For ramp
times less than 1 ms, the power-on reset time (TPOR) is typically less than 0.3 ms. Additionally, the power
supply must reach VRST before the POR circuit will release the device from reset.
VD
D
volts
On exit from a power-on reset, the PORSF flag (RSTSRC.1) is set by hardware to logic 1. When PORSF is
set, all of the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate (PORSF is cleared by all other
resets). Since all resets cause program execution to begin at the same location (0x0000) software can
read the PORSF flag to determine if a power-up was the cause of reset. The content of internal data
memory should be assumed to be undefined after a power-on reset. The VDD monitor is enabled following
a power-on reset.
t
Logic HIGH
RST
TPOR
Logic LOW
Power-On Reset
Figure 22.2. Power-on Reset Timing
212
Rev. 1.0
22.2. Power-Fail Reset / Supply Monitor
C8051F85x/86x devices have a supply monitor that is enabled and selected as a reset source after each
power-on.
The supply monitor senses the voltage on the device VDD supply and can generate a reset if the supply
drops below the corresponding threshold. This monitor is enabled and enabled as a reset source after
initial power-on to protect the device until VDD is an adequate and stable voltage.
When enabled and selected as a reset source, any power down transition or power irregularity that causes
VDD to drop below the reset threshold will drive the RST pin low and hold the core in a reset state. When
VDD returns to a level above the reset threshold, the monitor will release the core from the reset state. The
reset status can then be read using the device reset sources module. After a power-fail reset, the PORF
flag reads 1 and all of the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate. The power-on reset
delay (tPOR) is not incurred after a supply monitor reset. The contents of RAM should be presumed invalid
after a VDD monitor reset.
The enable state of the VDD supply monitor and its selection as a reset source is not altered by device
resets. For example, if the VDD supply monitor is de-selected as a reset source and disabled by software,
and then firmware performs a software reset, the VDD supply monitor will remain disabled and de-selected
after the reset.
volts
To protect the integrity of flash contents, the VDD supply monitor must be enabled and selected as a reset
source if software contains routines that erase or write flash memory. If the VDD supply monitor is not
enabled, any erase or write performed on flash memory will be ignored.
VDD
Reset Threshold
(VRST)
t
RST
VDD Monitor
Reset
Figure 22.3. VDD Supply Monitor Threshold
22.3. Enabling the VDD Monitor
The VDD supply monitor is enabled by default. However, in systems which disable the supply monitor, it
must be enabled before selecting it as a reset source. Selecting the VDD supply monitor as a reset source
before it has stabilized may generate a system reset. In systems where this reset would be undesirable, a
delay should be introduced between enabling the VDD supply monitor and selecting it as a reset source.
No delay should be introduced in systems where software contains routines that erase or write flash
memory. The procedure for enabling the VDD supply monitor and selecting it as a reset source is:
Rev. 1.0
213
1. Enable the VDD supply monitor (VMONEN = 1).
2. Wait for the VDD supply monitor to stabilize (optional).
3. Enable the VDD monitor as a reset source in the RSTSRC register.
22.4. External Reset
The external RST pin provides a means for external circuitry to force the device into a reset state.
Asserting an active-low signal on the RST pin generates a reset; an external pullup and/or decoupling of
the RST pin may be necessary to avoid erroneous noise-induced resets. The PINRSF flag is set on exit
from an external reset.
22.5. Missing Clock Detector Reset
The Missing Clock Detector (MCD) is a one-shot circuit that is triggered by the system clock. If the system
clock remains high or low for more than the MCD time window, the one-shot will time out and generate a
reset. After a MCD reset, the MCDRSF flag will read 1, signifying the MCD as the reset source; otherwise,
this bit reads 0. Writing a 1 to the MCDRSF bit enables the Missing Clock Detector; writing a 0 disables it.
The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
22.6. Comparator0 Reset
Comparator0 can be configured as a reset source by writing a 1 to the C0RSEF flag. Comparator0 should
be enabled and allowed to settle prior to writing to C0RSEF to prevent any turn-on chatter on the output
from generating an unwanted reset. The Comparator0 reset is active-low: if the non-inverting input voltage
(on CP0+) is less than the inverting input voltage (on CP0-), the device is put into the reset state. After a
Comparator0 reset, the C0RSEF flag will read 1 signifying Comparator0 as the reset source; otherwise,
this bit reads ‘0’. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
22.7. Watchdog Timer Reset
The programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) can be used to prevent software from running out of control
during a system malfunction. The WDT function can be enabled or disabled by software as described in
the watchdog timer section. If a system malfunction prevents user software from updating the WDT, a reset
is generated and the WDTRSF bit is set to ‘1’. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
22.8. Flash Error Reset
If a flash read/write/erase or program read targets an illegal address, a system reset is generated. This
may occur due to any of the following:
A
flash write or erase is attempted above user code space.
flash read is attempted above user code space.
A program read is attempted above user code space (i.e. a branch instruction to the reserved
area).
A flash read, write or erase attempt is restricted due to a flash security setting.
The FERROR bit is set following a flash error reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
A
22.9. Software Reset
Software may force a reset by writing a 1 to the SWRSF bit. The SWRSF bit will read 1 following a
software forced reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset.
214
Rev. 1.0
22.10. Reset Sources Control Registers
Register 22.1. RSTSRC: Reset Source
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved
FERROR
C0RSEF
SWRSF
WDTRSF
MCDRSF
PORSF
PINRSF
Type
R
R
RW
RW
R
RW
RW
R
Reset
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SFR Address: 0xEF
Table 22.1. RSTSRC Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
Function
7
Reserved
Must write reset value.
6
FERROR
Flash Error Reset Flag.
This read-only bit is set to 1 if a flash read/write/erase error caused the last reset.
5
C0RSEF
Comparator0 Reset Enable and Flag.
Read: This bit reads 1 if Comparator0 caused the last reset.
Write: Writing a 1 to this bit enables Comparator0 (active-low) as a reset source.
4
SWRSF
Software Reset Force and Flag.
Read: This bit reads 1 if last reset was caused by a write to SWRSF.
Write: Writing a 1 to this bit forces a system reset.
3
WDTRSF
Watchdog Timer Reset Flag.
This read-only bit is set to 1 if a watchdog timer overflow caused the last reset.
2
MCDRSF
Missing Clock Detector Enable and Flag.
Read: This bit reads 1 if a missing clock detector timeout caused the last reset.
Write: Writing a 1 to this bit enables the missing clock detector. The MCD triggers a reset
if a missing clock condition is detected.
1
PORSF
Power-On / Supply Monitor Reset Flag, and Supply Monitor Reset Enable.
Read: This bit reads 1 anytime a power-on or supply monitor reset has occurred.
Write: Writing a 1 to this bit enables the supply monitor as a reset source.
0
PINRSF
HW Pin Reset Flag.
This read-only bit is set to 1 if the RST pin caused the last reset.
Notes:
1. Reads and writes of the RSTSRC register access different logic in the device. Reading the register always returns
status information to indicate the source of the most recent reset. Writing to the register activates certain options as
reset sources. It is recommended to not use any kind of read-modify-write operation on this register.
2. When the PORSF bit reads back 1 all other RSTSRC flags are indeterminate.
3. Writing 1 to the PORSF bit when the supply monitor is not enabled and stabilized may cause a system reset.
Rev. 1.0
215
22.11. Supply Monitor Control Registers
Register 22.2. VDM0CN: Supply Monitor Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
VDMEN
VDDSTAT
Reserved
Type
RW
R
R
Reset
X
X
X
X
3
X
2
1
0
X
X
X
SFR Address: 0xFF
Table 22.2. VDM0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
VDMEN
Function
Supply Monitor Enable.
This bit turns the supply monitor circuit on/off. The supply monitor cannot generate system resets until it is also selected as a reset source in register RSTSRC. Selecting the
supply monitor as a reset source before it has stabilized may generate a system reset. In
systems where this reset would be undesirable, a delay should be introduced between
enabling the supply monitor and selecting it as a reset source.
0: Supply Monitor Disabled.
1: Supply Monitor Enabled.
6
VDDSTAT
Supply Status.
This bit indicates the current power supply status (supply monitor output).
0: VDD is at or below the supply monitor threshold.
1: VDD is above the supply monitor threshold.
5:0
216
Reserved
Must write reset value.
Rev. 1.0
23. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)
The serial peripheral interface (SPI0) provides access to a flexible, full-duplex synchronous serial bus.
SPI0 can operate as a master or slave device in both 3-wire or 4-wire modes, and supports multiple
masters and slaves on a single SPI bus. The slave-select (NSS) signal can be configured as an input to
select SPI0 in slave mode, or to disable Master Mode operation in a multi-master environment, avoiding
contention on the SPI bus when more than one master attempts simultaneous data transfers. NSS can
also be configured as a chip-select output in master mode, or disabled for 3-wire operation. Additional
general purpose port I/O pins can be used to select multiple slave devices in master mode.
SPI0
SCK Phase
Master or Slave
SCK Polarity
NSS Control
NSS
SYSCLK
Clock Rate
Generator
Bus Control
SCK
Shift Register
MISO
MOSI
TX Buffer
RX Buffer
SPI0DAT
Figure 23.1. SPI0 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.0
217
23.1. Signal Descriptions
The four signals used by SPI0 (MOSI, MISO, SCK, NSS) are described below.
23.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI)
The master-out, slave-in (MOSI) signal is an output from a master device and an input to slave devices. It
is used to serially transfer data from the master to the slave. This signal is an output when SPI0 is
operating as a master and an input when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant
bit first. When configured as a master, MOSI is driven by the MSB of the shift register in both 3- and 4-wire
mode.
23.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO)
The master-in, slave-out (MISO) signal is an output from a slave device and an input to the master device.
It is used to serially transfer data from the slave to the master. This signal is an input when SPI0 is
operating as a master and an output when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred mostsignificant bit first. The MISO pin is placed in a high-impedance state when the SPI module is disabled and
when the SPI operates in 4-wire mode as a slave that is not selected. When acting as a slave in 3-wire
mode, MISO is always driven by the MSB of the shift register.
23.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK)
The serial clock (SCK) signal is an output from the master device and an input to slave devices. It is used
to synchronize the transfer of data between the master and slave on the MOSI and MISO lines. SPI0
generates this signal when operating as a master. The SCK signal is ignored by a SPI slave when the
slave is not selected (NSS = 1) in 4-wire slave mode.
23.1.4. Slave Select (NSS)
The function of the slave-select (NSS) signal is dependent on the setting of the NSSMD1 and NSSMD0
bits in the SPI0CN register. There are three possible modes that can be selected with these bits:
1. NSSMD[1:0] = 00: 3-Wire Master or 3-Wire Slave Mode: SPI0 operates in 3-wire mode, and NSS
is disabled. When operating as a slave device, SPI0 is always selected in 3-wire mode. Since no
select signal is present, SPI0 must be the only slave on the bus in 3-wire mode. This is intended for
point-to-point communication between a master and one slave.
2. NSSMD[1:0] = 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is
enabled as an input. When operating as a slave, NSS selects the SPI0 device. When operating as
a master, a 1-to-0 transition of the NSS signal disables the master function of SPI0 so that multiple
master devices can be used on the same SPI bus.
3. NSSMD[1:0] = 1x: 4-Wire Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an
output. The setting of NSSMD0 determines what logic level the NSS pin will output. This
configuration should only be used when operating SPI0 as a master device.
See Figure 23.2, Figure 23.3, and Figure 23.4 for typical connection diagrams of the various operational
modes. Note that the setting of NSSMD bits affects the pinout of the device. When in 3-wire master or
3-wire slave mode, the NSS pin will not be mapped by the crossbar. In all other modes, the NSS signal will
be mapped to a pin on the device.
218
Rev. 1.0
23.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation
A SPI master device initiates all data transfers on a SPI bus. SPI0 is placed in master mode by setting the
Master Enable flag (MSTEN, SPI0CN.6). Writing a byte of data to the SPI0 data register (SPI0DAT) when
in master mode writes to the transmit buffer. If the SPI shift register is empty, the byte in the transmit buffer
is moved to the shift register, and a data transfer begins. The SPI0 master immediately shifts out the data
serially on the MOSI line while providing the serial clock on SCK. The SPIF (SPI0CN.7) flag is set to logic
1 at the end of the transfer. If interrupts are enabled, an interrupt request is generated when the SPIF flag
is set. While the SPI0 master transfers data to a slave on the MOSI line, the addressed SPI slave device
simultaneously transfers the contents of its shift register to the SPI master on the MISO line in a full-duplex
operation. Therefore, the SPIF flag serves as both a transmit-complete and receive-data-ready flag. The
data byte received from the slave is transferred MSB-first into the master's shift register. When a byte is
fully shifted into the register, it is moved to the receive buffer where it can be read by the processor by
reading SPI0DAT.
When configured as a master, SPI0 can operate in one of three different modes: multi-master mode, 3-wire
single-master mode, and 4-wire single-master mode. The default, multi-master mode is active when
NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In this mode, NSS is an input to the device, and
is used to disable the master SPI0 when another master is accessing the bus. When NSS is pulled low in
this mode, MSTEN (SPI0CN.6) and SPIEN (SPI0CN.0) are set to 0 to disable the SPI master device, and
a Mode Fault is generated (MODF, SPI0CN.5 = 1). Mode Fault will generate an interrupt if enabled. SPI0
must be manually re-enabled in software under these circumstances. In multi-master systems, devices will
typically default to being slave devices while they are not acting as the system master device. In multimaster mode, slave devices can be addressed individually (if needed) using general-purpose I/O pins.
Figure 23.2 shows a connection diagram between two master devices and a single slave in multiplemaster mode.
3-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. In this
mode, NSS is not used, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Any slave devices
that must be addressed in this mode should be selected using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 23.3
shows a connection diagram between a master device in 3-wire master mode and a slave device.
4-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 1. In this mode, NSS is configured as an
output pin, and can be used as a slave-select signal for a single SPI device. In this mode, the output value
of NSS is controlled (in software) with the bit NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2). Additional slave devices can be
addressed using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 23.4 shows a connection diagram for a master device
and a slave device in 4-wire mode.
Rev. 1.0
219
Master Device 1
Slave Device
SCK
SCK
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
NSS
NSS
port pin
Master Device 2
NSS
MOSI
MISO
SCK
port pin
Figure 23.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram
Master Device
Slave Device
SCK
SCK
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
Figure 23.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram
Master Device
Slave Device
SCK
SCK
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
NSS
NSS
Figure 23.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram
220
Rev. 1.0
23.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation
When SPI0 is enabled and not configured as a master, it will operate as a SPI slave. As a slave, bytes are
shifted in through the MOSI pin and out through the MISO pin by a master device controlling the SCK
signal. A bit counter in the SPI0 logic counts SCK edges. When 8 bits have been shifted through the shift
register, the SPIF flag is set to logic 1, and the byte is copied into the receive buffer. Data is read from the
receive buffer by reading SPI0DAT. A slave device cannot initiate transfers. Data to be transferred to the
master device is pre-loaded into the shift register by writing to SPI0DAT. Writes to SPI0DAT are doublebuffered, and are placed in the transmit buffer first. If the shift register is empty, the contents of the transmit
buffer will immediately be transferred into the shift register. When the shift register already contains data,
the SPI will load the shift register with the transmit buffer’s contents after the last SCK edge of the next (or
current) SPI transfer.
When configured as a slave, SPI0 can be configured for 4-wire or 3-wire operation. The default, 4-wire
slave mode, is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In 4-wire mode, the
NSS signal is routed to a port pin and configured as a digital input. SPI0 is enabled when NSS is logic 0,
and disabled when NSS is logic 1. The bit counter is reset on a falling edge of NSS. Note that the NSS
signal must be driven low at least 2 system clocks before the first active edge of SCK for each byte
transfer. Figure 23.4 shows a connection diagram between two slave devices in 4-wire slave mode and a
master device.
The 3-wire slave mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. NSS is not
used in this mode, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Since there is no way of
uniquely addressing the device in 3-wire slave mode, SPI0 must be the only slave device present on the
bus. It is important to note that in 3-wire slave mode there is no external means of resetting the bit counter
that determines when a full byte has been received. The bit counter can only be reset by disabling and reenabling SPI0 with the SPIEN bit. Figure 23.3 shows a connection diagram between a slave device in 3wire slave mode and a master device.
23.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources
When SPI0 interrupts are enabled, the following four flags will generate an interrupt when they are set to
logic 1:
All of the following bits must be cleared by software.
The
SPI Interrupt Flag, SPIF (SPI0CN.7) is set to logic 1 at the end of each byte transfer. This flag
can occur in all SPI0 modes.
The Write Collision Flag, WCOL (SPI0CN.6) is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted
when the transmit buffer has not been emptied to the SPI shift register. When this occurs, the write
to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written.This flag can occur in all
SPI0 modes.
The Mode Fault Flag MODF (SPI0CN.5) is set to logic 1 when SPI0 is configured as a master, and
for multi-master mode and the NSS pin is pulled low. When a Mode Fault occurs, the MSTEN and
SPIEN bits in SPI0CN are set to logic 0 to disable SPI0 and allow another master device to access
the bus.
The Receive Overrun Flag RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) is set to logic 1 when configured as a slave, and
a transfer is completed and the receive buffer still holds an unread byte from a previous transfer.
The new byte is not transferred to the receive buffer, allowing the previously received data byte to
be read. The data byte which caused the overrun is lost.
23.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity
Four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity can be selected using the clock control bits in the
SPI0 Configuration Register (SPI0CFG). The CKPHA bit (SPI0CFG.5) selects one of two clock phases
(edge used to latch the data). The CKPOL bit (SPI0CFG.4) selects between an active-high or active-low
clock. Both master and slave devices must be configured to use the same clock phase and polarity. SPI0
Rev. 1.0
221
should be disabled (by clearing the SPIEN bit, SPI0CN.0) when changing the clock phase or polarity. The
clock and data line relationships for master mode are shown in Figure 23.5. For slave mode, the clock and
data relationships are shown in Figure 23.6 and Figure 23.7. Note that CKPHA should be set to 0 on both
the master and slave SPI when communicating between two Silicon Labs C8051 devices.
The SPI0 Clock Rate Register (SPI0CKR) controls the master mode serial clock frequency. This register is
ignored when operating in slave mode. When the SPI is configured as a master, the maximum data
transfer rate (bits/sec) is one-half the system clock frequency or 12.5 MHz, whichever is slower. When the
SPI is configured as a slave, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) for full-duplex operation is 1/10 the
system clock frequency, provided that the master issues SCK, NSS (in 4-wire slave mode), and the serial
input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. If the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input
data asynchronously, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) must be less than 1/10 the system clock
frequency. In the special case where the master only wants to transmit data to the slave and does not need
to receive data from the slave (i.e. half-duplex operation), the SPI slave can receive data at a maximum
data transfer rate (bits/sec) of 1/4 the system clock frequency. This is provided that the master issues SCK,
NSS, and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock.
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0)
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1)
MISO/MOSI
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
NSS (Must Remain High
in Multi-Master Mode)
Figure 23.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing
222
Rev. 1.0
Bit 0
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0)
MOSI
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
MISO
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
NSS (4-Wire Mode)
Figure 23.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0)
SCK
(CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1)
SCK
(CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1)
MOSI
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
MISO
MSB
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 0
NSS (4-Wire Mode)
Figure 23.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1)
23.6. SPI Special Function Registers
SPI0 is accessed and controlled through four special function registers in the system controller: SPI0CN
Control Register, SPI0DAT Data Register, SPI0CFG Configuration Register, and SPI0CKR Clock Rate
Register. The four special function registers related to the operation of the SPI0 Bus are described in the
following figures.
Rev. 1.0
223
SCK*
T
T
MCKH
MCKL
T
T
MIS
MIH
MISO
MOSI
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Figure 23.8. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0)
SCK*
T
T
MCKH
MCKL
T
T
MIS
MIH
MISO
MOSI
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Figure 23.9. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1)
224
Rev. 1.0
NSS
T
T
SE
T
CKL
SD
SCK*
T
CKH
T
SIS
T
SIH
MOSI
T
T
SEZ
T
SOH
SDZ
MISO
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Figure 23.10. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0)
NSS
T
T
SE
T
CKL
SD
SCK*
T
CKH
T
SIS
T
SIH
MOSI
T
SEZ
T
T
SOH
SLH
T
SDZ
MISO
* SCK is shown for CKPOL = 0. SCK is the opposite polarity for CKPOL = 1.
Figure 23.11. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1)
Rev. 1.0
225
Table 23.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Max
Units
Master Mode Timing (See Figure 23.8 and Figure 23.9)
TMCKH
SCK High Time
1 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TMCKL
SCK Low Time
1 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TMIS
MISO Valid to SCK Shift Edge
1 x TSYSCLK + 20
—
ns
TMIH
SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change
0
—
ns
Slave Mode Timing (See Figure 23.10 and Figure 23.11)
TSE
NSS Falling to First SCK Edge
2 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TSD
Last SCK Edge to NSS Rising
2 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TSEZ
NSS Falling to MISO Valid
—
4 x TSYSCLK
ns
TSDZ
NSS Rising to MISO High-Z
—
4 x TSYSCLK
ns
TCKH
SCK High Time
5 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TCKL
SCK Low Time
5 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TSIS
MOSI Valid to SCK Sample Edge
2 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TSIH
SCK Sample Edge to MOSI Change
2 x TSYSCLK
—
ns
TSOH
SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change
—
4 x TSYSCLK
ns
TSLH
Last SCK Edge to MISO Change
(CKPHA = 1 ONLY)
6 x TSYSCLK
8 x TSYSCLK
ns
Note: TSYSCLK is equal to one period of the device system clock (SYSCLK).
226
Rev. 1.0
23.7. SPI Control Registers
Register 23.1. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SPIBSY
MSTEN
CKPHA
CKPOL
SLVSEL
NSSIN
SRMT
RXBMT
Type
R
RW
RW
RW
R
R
R
R
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0xA1
Table 23.2. SPI0CFG Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
SPIBSY
Function
SPI Busy.
This bit is set to logic 1 when a SPI transfer is in progress (master or slave mode).
6
MSTEN
Master Mode Enable.
0: Disable master mode. Operate in slave mode.
1: Enable master mode. Operate as a master.
5
CKPHA
SPI0 Clock Phase.
0: Data centered on first edge of SCK period.
1: Data centered on second edge of SCK period.
4
CKPOL
SPI0 Clock Polarity.
0: SCK line low in idle state.
1: SCK line high in idle state.
3
SLVSEL
Slave Selected Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 whenever the NSS pin is low indicating SPI0 is the selected
slave. It is cleared to logic 0 when NSS is high (slave not selected). This bit does not indicate the instantaneous value at the NSS pin, but rather a de-glitched version of the pin
input.
2
NSSIN
NSS Instantaneous Pin Input.
This bit mimics the instantaneous value that is present on the NSS port pin at the time
that the register is read. This input is not de-glitched.
1
SRMT
Shift Register Empty (valid in slave mode only).
This bit will be set to logic 1 when all data has been transferred in/out of the shift register,
and there is no new information available to read from the transmit buffer or write to the
receive buffer. It returns to logic 0 when a data byte is transferred to the shift register
from the transmit buffer or by a transition on SCK. SRMT = 1 when in Master Mode.
Note: In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is sampled one
SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave device.
Rev. 1.0
227
Table 23.2. SPI0CFG Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
RXBMT
Function
Receive Buffer Empty (valid in slave mode only).
This bit will be set to logic 1 when the receive buffer has been read and contains no new
information. If there is new information available in the receive buffer that has not been
read, this bit will return to logic 0. RXBMT = 1 when in Master Mode.
Note: In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is sampled one
SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave device.
228
Rev. 1.0
Register 23.2. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
SPIF
WCOL
MODF
RXOVRN
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
NSSMD
TXBMT
SPIEN
RW
R
RW
1
0
0
1
SFR Address: 0xF8 (bit-addressable)
Table 23.3. SPI0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
SPIF
Function
SPI0 Interrupt Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware at the end of a data transfer. If SPI interrupts are
enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware,
and must be cleared by software.
6
WCOL
Write Collision Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when TXBMT is 0. When this
occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written. If
SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically
cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software.
5
MODF
Mode Fault Flag.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a master mode collision is detected (NSS is
low, MSTEN = 1, and NSSMD = 01). If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be
generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by
software.
4
RXOVRN
Receive Overrun Flag (valid in slave mode only).
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when the receive buffer still holds unread data from
a previous transfer and the last bit of the current transfer is shifted into the SPI0 shift register. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software.
3:2
NSSMD
Slave Select Mode.
Selects between the following NSS operation modes:
00: 3-Wire Slave or 3-Wire Master Mode. NSS signal is not routed to a port pin.
01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode (Default). NSS is an input to the device.
10: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS is an output and logic low.
11: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS is an output and logic high.
1
TXBMT
Transmit Buffer Empty.
This bit will be set to logic 0 when new data has been written to the transmit buffer. When
data in the transmit buffer is transferred to the SPI shift register, this bit will be set to logic
1, indicating that it is safe to write a new byte to the transmit buffer.
Rev. 1.0
229
Table 23.3. SPI0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
SPIEN
Function
SPI0 Enable.
0: SPI disabled.
1: SPI enabled.
230
Rev. 1.0
Register 23.3. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
SPI0CKR
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA2
Table 23.4. SPI0CKR Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
SPI0CKR
Function
SPI0 Clock Rate.
These bits determine the frequency of the SCK output when the SPI0 module is configured for master mode operation. The SCK clock frequency is a divided version of the
system clock, and is given in the following equation, where SYSCLK is the system clock
frequency and SPI0CKR is the 8-bit value held in the SPI0CKR register.
SYSCLK
f SCK = ---------------------------------------------2 SPI0CKR + 1
for 0 <= SPI0CKR <= 255
Rev. 1.0
231
Register 23.4. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
SPI0DAT
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xA3
Table 23.5. SPI0DAT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
SPI0DAT
Function
SPI0 Transmit and Receive Data.
The SPI0DAT register is used to transmit and receive SPI0 data. Writing data to SPI0DAT places the data into the transmit buffer and initiates a transfer when in master mode.
A read of SPI0DAT returns the contents of the receive buffer.
232
Rev. 1.0
24. System Management Bus / I2C (SMBus0)
The SMBus I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. The SMBus is compliant with the System
Management Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I2C serial bus.
Reads and writes to the SMBus by the system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus interface
autonomously controlling the serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/20th of the
system clock as a master or slave (this can be faster than allowed by the SMBus specification, depending
on the system clock used). A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate
devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus.
The SMBus may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. The
SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration
logic, and START/STOP control and generation. The SMBus peripherals can be fully driven by software
(i.e., software accepts/rejects slave addresses, and generates ACKs), or hardware slave address
recognition and automatic ACK generation can be enabled to minimize software overhead. A block
diagram of the SMBus0 peripheral is shown in Figure 24.1.
SMBus0
Data /
Address
SI
SMB0DAT
Shift Register
SDA
State Control
Logic
Slave Address
Recognition
SCL
Timers 0,
1 or 2
Master SCL Clock
Generation
Timer 3
SCL Low
Figure 24.1. SMBus0 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.0
233
24.1. Supporting Documents
It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents:
1. The I2C-Bus and How to Use It (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor.
2. The I2C-Bus Specification—Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor.
3. System Management Bus Specification—Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum.
24.2. SMBus Configuration
Figure 24.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus specification allows any recessive voltage
between 3.0 V and 5.0 V; different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. However, the
maximum voltage on any port pin must conform to the electrical characteristics specifications. The bidirectional SCL (serial clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply
voltage through a pullup resistor or similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an opendrain or open-collector output for both the SCL and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high (recessive
state) when the bus is free. The maximum number of devices on the bus is limited only by the requirement
that the rise and fall times on the bus not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns, respectively.
VDD = 5V
VDD = 3V
VDD = 5V
VDD = 3V
Master
Device
Slave
Device 1
Slave
Device 2
SDA
SCL
Figure 24.2. Typical SMBus Configuration
24.3. SMBus Operation
Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave
receiver (WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ).
The master device initiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. The
SMBus interface may operate as a master or a slave, and multiple master devices on the same bus are
supported. If two or more masters attempt to initiate a data transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme
is employed with a single master always winning the arbitration. It is not necessary to specify one device
as the Master in a system; any device who transmits a START and a slave address becomes the master
for the duration of that transfer.
A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7–1: 7-bit
slave address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Bytes that are
received (by a master or slave) are acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see
Figure 24.3). If the receiving device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a NACK (not
acknowledge), which is a high SDA during a high SCL.
The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address byte. The direction bit is set
to logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation.
234
Rev. 1.0
All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The
master generates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the
transaction is a WRITE operation from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a
time waiting for an ACK from the slave at the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits
the data waiting for an ACK from the master at the end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the
master generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction and free the bus. Figure 24.3 illustrates a
typical SMBus transaction.
SCL
SDA
SLA6
START
SLA5-0
Slave Address + R/W
R/W
D7
ACK
D6-0
Data Byte
NACK
STOP
Figure 24.3. SMBus Transaction
24.3.1. Transmitter vs. Receiver
On the SMBus communications interface, a device is the “transmitter” when it is sending an address or
data byte to another device on the bus. A device is a “receiver” when an address or data byte is being sent
to it from another device on the bus. The transmitter controls the SDA line during the address or data byte.
After each byte of address or data information is sent by the transmitter, the receiver sends an ACK or
NACK bit during the ACK phase of the transfer, during which time the receiver controls the SDA line.
24.3.2. Arbitration
A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL
and SDA lines remain high for a specified time (see Section “24.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout” on
page 236). In the event that two or more devices attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an
arbitration scheme is employed to force one master to give up the bus. The master devices continue
transmitting until one attempts a HIGH while the other transmits a LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the
bus will be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH will detect a LOW SDA and lose the arbitration.
The winning master continues its transmission without interruption; the losing master becomes a slave and
receives the rest of the transfer if addressed. This arbitration scheme is non-destructive: one device
always wins, and no data is lost.
24.3.3. Clock Low Extension
SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I2C, which allows devices with different
speed capabilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow
slower slave devices to communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line
LOW to extend the clock low period, effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency.
24.3.4. SCL Low Timeout
If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore,
the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus
protocol specifies that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than
25 ms as a “timeout” condition. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the
communication no later than 10 ms after detecting the timeout condition.
Rev. 1.0
235
For the SMBus0 interface, Timer 3 is used to implement SCL low timeouts. The SCL low timeout feature is
enabled by setting the SMB0TOE bit in SMB0CF. The associated timer is forced to reload when SCL is
high, and allowed to count when SCL is low. With the associated timer enabled and configured to overflow
after 25 ms (and SMB0TOE set), the timer interrupt service routine can be used to reset (disable and reenable) the SMBus in the event of an SCL low timeout.
24.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout
The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 µs, the bus
is designated as free. When the SMB0FTE bit in SMB0CF is set, the bus will be considered free if SCL and
SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (as defined by the timer configured for the
SMBus clock source). If the SMBus is waiting to generate a Master START, the START will be generated
following this timeout. A clock source is required for free timeout detection, even in a slave-only
implementation.
24.4. Using the SMBus
The SMBus can operate in both Master and Slave modes. The interface provides timing and shifting
control for serial transfers; higher level protocol is determined by user software. The SMBus interface
provides the following application-independent features:
Byte-wise
serial data transfers
signal generation on SCL (Master Mode only) and SDA data synchronization
Timeout/bus error recognition, as defined by the SMB0CF configuration register
START/STOP timing, detection, and generation
Bus arbitration
Interrupt generation
Status information
Optional hardware recognition of slave address and automatic acknowledgement of address/data
Clock
SMBus interrupts are generated for each data byte or slave address that is transferred. When hardware
acknowledgement is disabled, the point at which the interrupt is generated depends on whether the
hardware is acting as a data transmitter or receiver. When a transmitter (i.e., sending address/data,
receiving an ACK), this interrupt is generated after the ACK cycle so that software may read the received
ACK value; when receiving data (i.e., receiving address/data, sending an ACK), this interrupt is generated
before the ACK cycle so that software may define the outgoing ACK value. If hardware acknowledgement
is enabled, these interrupts are always generated after the ACK cycle. See Section 24.5 for more details
on transmission sequences.
Interrupts are also generated to indicate the beginning of a transfer when a master (START generated), or
the end of a transfer when a slave (STOP detected). Software should read the SMB0CN (SMBus Control
register) to find the cause of the SMBus interrupt. Table 24.5 provides a quick SMB0CN decoding
reference.
24.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register
The SMBus Configuration register (SMB0CF) is used to enable the SMBus Master and/or Slave modes,
select the SMBus clock source, and select the SMBus timing and timeout options. When the ENSMB bit is
set, the SMBus is enabled for all master and slave events. Slave events may be disabled by setting the
INH bit. With slave events inhibited, the SMBus interface will still monitor the SCL and SDA pins; however,
the interface will NACK all received addresses and will not generate any slave interrupts. When the INH bit
is set, all slave events will be inhibited following the next START (interrupts will continue for the duration of
the current transfer).
236
Rev. 1.0
Table 24.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection
SMBCS
SMBus0 Clock Source
00
Timer 0 Overflow
01
Timer 1 Overflow
10
Timer 2 High Byte Overflow
11
Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow
The SMBCS bit field selects the SMBus clock source, which is used only when operating as a master or
when the Free Timeout detection is enabled. When operating as a master, overflows from the selected
source determine the absolute minimum SCL low and high times as defined in Equation 24.1.The selected
clock source may be shared by other peripherals so long as the timer is left running at all times.
1
T HighMin = T LowMin = --------------------------------------------f ClockSourceOverflow
Equation 24.1. Minimum SCL High and Low Times
The selected clock source should be configured to establish the minimum SCL High and Low times as per
Equation 24.1. When the interface is operating as a master (and SCL is not driven or extended by any
other devices on the bus), the typical SMBus bit rate is approximated by Equation 24.2.
f ClockSourceOverflow
BitRate = --------------------------------------------3
Equation 24.2. Typical SMBus Bit Rate
Figure 24.4 shows the typical SCL generation described by Equation 24.2. Notice that THIGH is typically
twice as large as TLOW. The actual SCL output may vary due to other devices on the bus (SCL may be
extended low by slower slave devices, or driven low by contending master devices). The bit rate when
operating as a master will never exceed the limits defined by equation Equation 24.1.
Timer Source
Overflows
SCL
TLow
THigh
SCL High Timeout
Figure 24.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation
Setting the EXTHOLD bit extends the minimum setup and hold times for the SDA line. The minimum SDA
setup time defines the absolute minimum time that SDA is stable before SCL transitions from low-to-high.
The minimum SDA hold time defines the absolute minimum time that the current SDA value remains stable
after SCL transitions from high-to-low. EXTHOLD should be set so that the minimum setup and hold times
meet the SMBus Specification requirements of 250 ns and 300 ns, respectively. Table 24.2 shows the
Rev. 1.0
237
minimum setup and hold times for the two EXTHOLD settings. Setup and hold time extensions are
typically necessary for SMBus compliance when SYSCLK is above 10 MHz.
Table 24.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times
EXTHOLD
Minimum SDA Setup Time
Minimum SDA Hold Time
0
Tlow – 4 system clocks
or
1 system clock + s/w delay*
3 system clocks
1
11 system clocks
12 system clocks
Note: Setup Time for ACK bit transmissions and the MSB of all data transfers. When using software acknowledgment, the s/
w delay occurs between the time SMB0DAT or ACK is written and when SI0 is cleared. Note that if SI is cleared in the
same write that defines the outgoing ACK value, s/w delay is zero.
With the SMBTOE bit set, Timer 3 should be configured to overflow after 25 ms in order to detect SCL low
timeouts (see Section “24.3.4. SCL Low Timeout” on page 235). The SMBus interface will force the
associated timer to reload while SCL is high, and allow the timer to count when SCL is low. The timer
interrupt service routine should be used to reset SMBus communication by disabling and re-enabling the
SMBus.
SMBus Free Timeout detection can be enabled by setting the SMBFTE bit. When this bit is set, the bus will
be considered free if SDA and SCL remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (see
Figure 24.4).
24.4.2. SMBus Pin Swap
The SMBus peripheral is assigned to pins using the priority crossbar decoder. By default, the SMBus
signals are assigned to port pins starting with SDA on the lower-numbered pin, and SCL on the next
available pin. The SWAP bit in the SMBTC register can be set to 1 to reverse the order in which the SMBus
signals are assigned.
24.4.3. SMBus Timing Control
The SDD field in the SMBTC register is used to restrict the detection of a START condition under certain
circumstances. In some systems where there is significant mismatch between the impedance or the
capacitance on the SDA and SCL lines, it may be possible for SCL to fall after SDA during an address or
data transfer. Such an event can cause a false START detection on the bus. These kind of events are not
expected in a standard SMBus or I2C-compliant system. In most systems this parameter should not be
adjusted, and it is recommended that it be left at its default value.
By default, if the SCL falling edge is detected after the falling edge of SDA (i.e. one SYSCLK cycle or
more), the device will detect this as a START condition. The SDD field is used to increase the amount of
hold time that is required between SDA and SCL falling before a START is recognized. An additional 2, 4,
or 8 SYSCLKs can be added to prevent false START detection in systems where the bus conditions
warrant this.
24.4.4. SMB0CN Control Register
SMB0CN is used to control the interface and to provide status information. The higher four bits of SMB0CN
(MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO) form a status vector that can be used to jump to service routines.
MASTER indicates whether a device is the master or slave during the current transfer. TXMODE indicates
whether the device is transmitting or receiving data for the current byte.
238
Rev. 1.0
STA and STO indicate that a START and/or STOP has been detected or generated since the last SMBus
interrupt. STA and STO are also used to generate START and STOP conditions when operating as a
master. Writing a 1 to STA will cause the SMBus interface to enter Master Mode and generate a START
when the bus becomes free (STA is not cleared by hardware after the START is generated). Writing a 1 to
STO while in Master Mode will cause the interface to generate a STOP and end the current transfer after
the next ACK cycle. If STO and STA are both set (while in Master Mode), a STOP followed by a START will
be generated.
The ARBLOST bit indicates that the interface has lost an arbitration. This may occur anytime the interface
is transmitting (master or slave). A lost arbitration while operating as a slave indicates a bus error
condition. ARBLOST is cleared by hardware each time SI is cleared.
The SI bit (SMBus Interrupt Flag) is set at the beginning and end of each transfer, after each byte frame, or
when an arbitration is lost; see Table 24.3 for more details.
Important Note About the SI Bit: The SMBus interface is stalled while SI is set; thus SCL is held low, and
the bus is stalled until software clears SI.
24.4.4.1. Software ACK Generation
When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is cleared to 0, the firmware on the device must detect
incoming slave addresses and ACK or NACK the slave address and incoming data bytes. As a receiver,
writing the ACK bit defines the outgoing ACK value; as a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the
value received during the last ACK cycle. ACKRQ is set each time a byte is received, indicating that an
outgoing ACK value is needed. When ACKRQ is set, software should write the desired outgoing value to
the ACK bit before clearing SI. A NACK will be generated if software does not write the ACK bit before
clearing SI. SDA will reflect the defined ACK value immediately following a write to the ACK bit; however
SCL will remain low until SI is cleared. If a received slave address is not acknowledged, further slave
events will be ignored until the next START is detected.
24.4.4.2. Hardware ACK Generation
When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is set to 1, automatic slave address recognition and ACK
generation is enabled. More detail about automatic slave address recognition can be found in Section
24.4.5. As a receiver, the value currently specified by the ACK bit will be automatically sent on the bus
during the ACK cycle of an incoming data byte. As a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value
received on the last ACK cycle. The ACKRQ bit is not used when hardware ACK generation is enabled. If
a received slave address is NACKed by hardware, further slave events will be ignored until the next
START is detected, and no interrupt will be generated.
Table 24.3 lists all sources for hardware changes to the SMB0CN bits. Refer to Table 24.5 for SMBus
status decoding using the SMB0CN register.
Table 24.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN
Bit
MASTER
Set by Hardware When:
A
A
START is generated.
START
TXMODE
STA
STO
Cleared by Hardware When:
is generated.
is written before the start of an
SMBus frame.
SMB0DAT
A
START followed by an address byte is
received.
A STOP is detected while addressed as a
slave.
Arbitration is lost due to a detected STOP.
Rev. 1.0
STOP is generated.
Arbitration is lost.
A START is detected.
Arbitration is lost.
SMB0DAT is not written before the
start of an SMBus frame.
Must be cleared by software.
A
pending STOP is generated.
239
Table 24.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN (Continued)
Bit
Set by Hardware When:
Cleared by Hardware When:
A
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
ACK
SI
byte has been received and an ACK
response value is needed (only when
hardware ACK is not enabled).
A repeated START is detected as a
MASTER when STA is low (unwanted
repeated START).
SCL is sensed low while attempting to
generate a STOP or repeated START
condition.
SDA is sensed low while transmitting a 1
(excluding ACK bits).
The incoming ACK value is low
(ACKNOWLEDGE).
A START has been generated.
Lost arbitration.
A byte has been transmitted and an ACK/
NACK received.
A byte has been received.
A START or repeated START followed by a
slave address + R/W has been received.
A STOP has been received.
After
each ACK cycle.
Each
time SIn is cleared.
The
incoming ACK value is high
(NOT ACKNOWLEDGE).
Must be cleared by software.
24.4.5. Hardware Slave Address Recognition
The SMBus hardware has the capability to automatically recognize incoming slave addresses and send an
ACK without software intervention. Automatic slave address recognition is enabled by setting the EHACK
bit in register SMB0ADM to 1. This will enable both automatic slave address recognition and automatic
hardware ACK generation for received bytes (as a master or slave). More detail on automatic hardware
ACK generation can be found in Section 24.4.4.2.
The registers used to define which address(es) are recognized by the hardware are the SMBus Slave
Address register and the SMBus Slave Address Mask register. A single address or range of addresses
(including the General Call Address 0x00) can be specified using these two registers. The most-significant
seven bits of the two registers are used to define which addresses will be ACKed. A 1 in a bit of the slave
address mask SLVM enables a comparison between the received slave address and the hardware’s slave
address SLV for that bit. A 0 in a bit of the slave address mask means that bit will be treated as a “don’t
care” for comparison purposes. In this case, either a 1 or a 0 value are acceptable on the incoming slave
address. Additionally, if the GC bit in register SMB0ADR is set to 1, hardware will recognize the General
Call Address (0x00). Table 24.4 shows some example parameter settings and the slave addresses that will
be recognized by hardware under those conditions.
Table 24.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1)
Hardware Slave Address
Slave Address Mask
GC bit
Slave Addresses Recognized by
Hardware
SLV
SLVM
0x34
0x7F
0
0x34
0x34
0x7F
1
0x34, 0x00 (General Call)
0x34
0x7E
0
0x34, 0x35
240
Rev. 1.0
Table 24.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1)
Hardware Slave Address
Slave Address Mask
GC bit
Slave Addresses Recognized by
Hardware
SLV
SLVM
0x34
0x7E
1
0x34, 0x35, 0x00 (General Call)
0x70
0x73
0
0x70, 0x74, 0x78, 0x7C
24.4.6. Data Register
The SMBus Data register SMB0DAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just been
received. Software may safely read or write to the data register when the SI flag is set. Software should not
attempt to access the SMB0DAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SI flag is cleared to logic 0,
as the interface may be in the process of shifting a byte of data into or out of the register.
Data in SMB0DAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received
data is located at the MSB of SMB0DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously
being shifted in. SMB0DAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event of lost
arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data or address
in SMB0DAT.
Rev. 1.0
241
24.5. SMBus Transfer Modes
The SMBus interface may be configured to operate as master and/or slave. At any particular time, it will be
operating in one of the following four modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave Transmitter, or
Slave Receiver. The SMBus interface enters Master Mode any time a START is generated, and remains in
Master Mode until it loses an arbitration or generates a STOP. An SMBus interrupt is generated at the end
of all SMBus byte frames. The position of the ACK interrupt when operating as a receiver depends on
whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a receiver, the interrupt for an ACK occurs before the
ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is
enabled. As a transmitter, interrupts occur after the ACK, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation
is enabled or not.
24.5.1. Write Sequence (Master)
During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The master in this transfer will be
a transmitter during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. The SMBus interface
generates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and
the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 (WRITE). The master then
transmits one or more bytes of serial data. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is generated
by the slave. The transfer is ended when the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will
switch to Master Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Master Transmitter interrupt.
Figure 24.5 shows a typical master write sequence. Two transmit data bytes are shown, though any
number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that all of the “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the
ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled.
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1)
S
SLA
W
A
Data Byte
A
Data Byte
A
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0)
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
W = WRITE
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Figure 24.5. Typical Master Write Sequence
242
Rev. 1.0
P
24.5.2. Read Sequence (Master)
During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The master in this transfer will
be a transmitter during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. The SMBus interface
generates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and
the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 (READ). Serial data is then
received from the slave on SDA while the SMBus outputs the serial clock. The slave transmits one or more
bytes of serial data.
If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each
received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte.
With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK,
and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be
set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled.
Writing a 1 to the ACK bit generates an ACK; writing a 0 generates a NACK. Software should write a 0 to
the ACK bit for the last data transfer, to transmit a NACK. The interface exits Master Receiver Mode after
the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will switch to Master Transmitter Mode if
SMB0DAT is written while an active Master Receiver. Figure 24.6 shows a typical master read sequence.
Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data
byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hardware ACK
generation is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and
after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled.
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1)
S
SLA
R
A
Data Byte
A
Data Byte
N
P
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0)
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
N = NACK
R = READ
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Figure 24.6. Typical Master Read Sequence
Rev. 1.0
243
24.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave)
During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be
a receiver during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled
(INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode when a START followed by a slave address and
direction bit (WRITE in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave
Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the
received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK
generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set
up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle.
If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the
next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are
received.
If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each
received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte.
With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK,
and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be
set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled.
The interface exits Slave Receiver Mode after receiving a STOP. The interface will switch to Slave
Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Slave Receiver. Figure 24.7 shows a typical slave
write sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice
that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether
hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation
disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled.
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1)
S
SLA
W
A
Data Byte
A
Data Byte
A
P
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0)
S = START
P = STOP
A = ACK
W = WRITE
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Figure 24.7. Typical Slave Write Sequence
244
Rev. 1.0
24.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave)
During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The slave in this transfer will
be a receiver during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. When slave events are
enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode (to receive the slave address) when a START
followed by a slave address and direction bit (READ in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation
is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The
software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address
with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address
which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK
cycle.
If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the
next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are
transmitted. If the received slave address is acknowledged, data should be written to SMB0DAT to be
transmitted. The interface enters slave transmitter mode, and transmits one or more bytes of data. After
each byte is transmitted, the master sends an acknowledge bit; if the acknowledge bit is an ACK,
SMB0DAT should be written with the next data byte. If the acknowledge bit is a NACK, SMB0DAT should
not be written to before SI is cleared (an error condition may be generated if SMB0DAT is written following
a received NACK while in slave transmitter mode). The interface exits slave transmitter mode after
receiving a STOP. The interface will switch to slave receiver mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a
Slave Transmitter interrupt. Figure 24.8 shows a typical slave read sequence. Two transmitted data bytes
are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that all of the “data byte transferred”
interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is
enabled.
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1)
S
SLA
R
A
Data Byte
A
Data Byte
N
P
Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0)
S = START
P = STOP
N = NACK
R = READ
SLA = Slave Address
Received by SMBus
Interface
Transmitted by
SMBus Interface
Figure 24.8. Typical Slave Read Sequence
24.6. SMBus Status Decoding
The current SMBus status can be easily decoded using the SMB0CN register. The appropriate actions to
take in response to an SMBus event depend on whether hardware slave address recognition and ACK
generation is enabled or disabled. Table 24.5 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address
recognition and ACK generation is disabled. Table 24.6 describes the typical actions when hardware slave
address recognition and ACK generation is enabled. In the tables, STATUS VECTOR refers to the four
upper bits of SMB0CN: MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO. The shown response options are only the
typical responses; application-specific procedures are allowed as long as they conform to the SMBus
specification. Highlighted responses are allowed by hardware but do not conform to the SMBus
specification.
Rev. 1.0
245
Vector
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
0
0 X A master START was generated.
0
0
STA
STO
0
Load slave address + R/W into
SMB0DAT.
0
0 X
1100
Set STA to restart transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Abort transfer.
0
1 X
—
Load next data byte into SMB0DAT.
0
0 X
1100
End transfer with STOP.
0
1 X
—
End transfer with STOP and start 1
another transfer.
1 X
—
Send repeated START.
1
0 X
1110
Switch to Master Receiver Mode 0
(clear SI without writing new data
to SMB0DAT).
0 X
1000
Acknowledge received byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
0
0
1
1000
Send NACK to indicate last byte, 0
and send STOP.
1
0
—
Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1
and send STOP followed by
START.
1
0
1110
Send ACK followed by repeated 1
A master data byte was received; ACK
START.
requested.
Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1
and send repeated START.
0
1
1110
0
0
1110
A master data or address byte was
transmitted; NACK received.
1100
0
1000
246
1
0
1
0 X
ACK
Typical Response Options
ACK
Status
Mode
Master Transmitter
Master Receiver
1110
Current SMbus State
Next Status
Values to
Write
Values Read
Vector Expected
Table 24.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0)
A master data or address byte was
transmitted; ACK received.
Rev. 1.0
Send ACK and switch to Master
Transmitter Mode (write to
SMB0DAT before clearing SI).
0
0
1
1100
Send NACK and switch to Master Transmitter Mode (write to
SMB0DAT before clearing SI).
0
0
0
1100
ARBLOST
ACK
STA
STO
0101
ACKRQ
0
0
0
A slave byte was transmitted; NACK
received.
No action required (expecting
STOP condition).
0
0 X
0001
0
0
1
A slave byte was transmitted; ACK
received.
Load SMB0DAT with next data
byte to transmit.
0
0 X
0100
0
1 X
A Slave byte was transmitted; error
detected.
No action required (expecting
Master to end transfer).
0
0 X
0001
0
0 X
—
0
0
1
0000
If Read, Load SMB0DAT with
0
data byte; ACK received address
0
1
0100
NACK received address.
0
0
0
—
If Write, Acknowledge received
address
0
0
1
0000
0
If Read, Load SMB0DAT with
data byte; ACK received address
0
1
0100
NACK received address.
0
0
0
—
Reschedule failed transfer;
NACK received address.
1
0
0
1110
0
0 X
—
No action required (transfer
complete/aborted).
0
0
0
—
Acknowledge received byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
0
0
1
0000
NACK received byte.
0
0
0
—
Current SMbus State
Typical Response Options
An illegal STOP or bus error was
0 X X detected while a Slave Transmission
was in progress.
Clear STO.
If Write, Acknowledge received
address
1
0 X
A slave address + R/W was received;
ACK requested.
Slave Receiver
0010
1
0
A STOP was detected while addressed
Clear STO.
0 X as a Slave Transmitter or Slave
Receiver.
1
1 X
1
A slave byte was received; ACK
0 X
requested.
0001
0000
Lost arbitration as master; slave
1 X address + R/W received; ACK
requested.
Lost arbitration while attempting a
STOP.
ACK
Vector
Status
Mode
Slave Transmitter
0100
Next Status
Values to
Write
Values Read
Vector Expected
Table 24.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) (Continued)
Rev. 1.0
247
Vector
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
0
1 X
Lost arbitration while attempting a
repeated START.
0001
0
1 X
Lost arbitration due to a detected
STOP.
0000
1
1 X
Lost arbitration while transmitting a
data byte as master.
STA
STO
ACK
Typical Response Options
ACK
Status
Mode
Bus Error Condition
0010
Current SMbus State
Next Status
Values to
Write
Values Read
Vector Expected
Table 24.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) (Continued)
Abort failed transfer.
0
0 X
—
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Abort failed transfer.
0
0 X
—
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Abort failed transfer.
0
0
0
—
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0
0
1110
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
0
0 X A master START was generated.
0
0
1100
0
0
A master data or address byte was
1
transmitted; ACK received.
STO
A master data or address byte was
transmitted; NACK received.
STA
0
Load slave address + R/W into
SMB0DAT.
0
0 X
1100
Set STA to restart transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Abort transfer.
0
1 X
—
Load next data byte into SMB0DAT.
0
0 X
1100
End transfer with STOP.
0
1 X
—
End transfer with STOP and start 1
another transfer.
1 X
—
Send repeated START.
0 X
1110
0
1000
1
Switch to Master Receiver Mode 0
(clear SI without writing new data
to SMB0DAT). Set ACK for initial
data byte.
248
Rev. 1.0
ACK
Typical Response Options
ACK
Vector
Status
Mode
Master Transmitter
1110
Current SMbus State
Next Status
Values to
Write
Values Read
Vector Expected
Table 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1)
1
Values to
Write
STA
STO
ACK
Next Status
Current SMbus State
0
0
1
1000
0
0
0
1000
1
0
0
1110
Switch to Master Transmitter
0
Mode (write to SMB0DAT before
clearing SI).
0 X
1100
Read SMB0DAT; send STOP.
0
1
0
—
Read SMB0DAT; Send STOP
followed by START.
1
1
0
1110
Initiate repeated START.
1
0
0
1110
Switch to Master Transmitter
0
Mode (write to SMB0DAT before
clearing SI).
0 X
1100
Typical Response Options
ACK
ARBLOST
ACKRQ
Vector
Status
Mode
Values Read
Set ACK for next data byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
Master Receiver
0
Set NACK to indicate next data
byte as the last data byte;
A master data byte was received; ACK Read SMB0DAT.
1
sent.
Initiate repeated START.
1000
0
Slave Transmitter
0
0100
0101
0
0
A master data byte was received;
NACK sent (last byte).
Vector Expected
Table 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) (Continued)
0
0
0
A slave byte was transmitted; NACK
received.
No action required (expecting
STOP condition).
0
0 X
0001
0
0
1
A slave byte was transmitted; ACK
received.
Load SMB0DAT with next data
byte to transmit.
0
0 X
0100
0
1 X
A Slave byte was transmitted; error
detected.
No action required (expecting
Master to end transfer).
0
0 X
0001
0
0 X
—
An illegal STOP or bus error was
0 X X detected while a Slave Transmission
was in progress.
Clear STO.
Rev. 1.0
249
Values to
Write
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
STA
STO
ACK
Next Status
0
0
1
0000
0
If Write, Set ACK for first data
A slave address + R/W was received; byte.
0 X
ACK sent.
If Read, Load SMB0DAT with
data byte
0
0 X
0100
If Write, Set ACK for first data
byte.
0
0
1
0000
If Read, Load SMB0DAT with
data byte
0
0 X
0100
Reschedule failed transfer
1
0 X
1110
0
0 X
—
No action required (transfer
complete/aborted).
0
0
0
—
Set ACK for next data byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
0
0
1
0000
Set NACK for next data byte;
Read SMB0DAT.
0
0
0
0000
Abort failed transfer.
0
0 X
—
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Abort failed transfer.
0
0 X
—
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Abort failed transfer.
0
0 X
—
Reschedule failed transfer.
1
0 X
1110
Current SMbus State
Typical Response Options
ACK
Vector
Status
Mode
Values Read
Slave Receiver
0010
0
Bus Error Condition
0010
0001
0000
250
1 X
Lost arbitration as master; slave
address + R/W received; ACK sent.
0
A STOP was detected while
0 X addressed as a Slave Transmitter or
Slave Receiver.
0
1 X
0001
0000
Vector Expected
Table 24.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) (Continued)
0
0
0
0
Lost arbitration while attempting a
STOP.
0 X A slave byte was received.
1 X
1 X
1 X
Lost arbitration while attempting a
repeated START.
Lost arbitration due to a detected
STOP.
Lost arbitration while transmitting a
data byte as master.
Rev. 1.0
Clear STO.
24.7. I2C / SMBus Control Registers
Register 24.1. SMB0CF: SMBus0 Configuration
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ENSMB
INH
BUSY
EXTHOLD
SMBTOE
SMBFTE
SMBCS
Type
RW
RW
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC1
Table 24.7. SMB0CF Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
ENSMB
Function
SMBus0 Enable.
This bit enables the SMBus0 interface when set to 1. When enabled, the interface constantly monitors the SDA and SCL pins.
6
INH
SMBus0 Slave Inhibit.
When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus0 does not generate an interrupt when slave
events occur. This effectively removes the SMBus0 slave from the bus. Master Mode
interrupts are not affected.
5
BUSY
SMBus0 Busy Indicator.
This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0
when a STOP or free-timeout is sensed.
4
EXTHOLD
SMBus0 Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable.
This bit controls the SDA setup and hold times.
0: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled.
1: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled.
3
SMBTOE
SMBus0 SCL Timeout Detection Enable.
This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus0 forces Timer 3
to reload while SCL is high and allows Timer 3 to count when SCL goes low. If Timer 3 is
configured to Split Mode, only the High Byte of the timer is held in reload while SCL is
high. Timer 3 should be programmed to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer 3
interrupt service routine should reset SMBus0 communication.
2
SMBFTE
SMBus0 Free Timeout Detection Enable.
When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high
for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods.
Rev. 1.0
251
Table 24.7. SMB0CF Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
1:0
SMBCS
Function
SMBus0 Clock Source Selection.
These two bits select the SMBus0 clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus0
bit rate. See the SMBus clock timing section for additional details.
00: Timer 0 Overflow
01: Timer 1 Overflow
10: Timer 2 High Byte Overflow
11: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow
252
Rev. 1.0
Register 24.2. SMB0TC: SMBus0 Timing and Pin Control
Bit
7
6
Name
SWAP
Reserved
SDD
Type
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xAC
Table 24.8. SMB0TC Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
SWAP
Function
SMBus0 Swap Pins.
This bit swaps the order of the SMBus0 pins on the crossbar.
0: SDA is mapped to the lower-numbered port pin, and SCL is mapped to the highernumbered port pin.
1: SCL is mapped to the lower-numbered port pin, and SDA is mapped to the highernumbered port pin.
6:2
Reserved
1:0
SDD
Must write reset value.
SMBus0 Start Detection Window.
These bits increase the hold time requirement between SDA falling and SCL falling for
START detection.
00: No additional hold time window (0-1 SYSCLK).
01: Increase hold time window to 2-3 SYSCLKs.
10: Increase hold time window to 4-5 SYSCLKs.
11: Increase hold time window to 8-9 SYSCLKs.
Rev. 1.0
253
Register 24.3. SMB0CN: SMBus0 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
MASTER
TXMODE
STA
STO
ACKRQ
ARBLOST
ACK
SI
Type
R
R
RW
RW
R
R
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC0 (bit-addressable)
Table 24.9. SMB0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
MASTER
Function
SMBus0 Master/Slave Indicator.
This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus0 is operating as a master.
0: SMBus0 operating in slave mode.
1: SMBus0 operating in master mode.
6
TXMODE
SMBus0 Transmit Mode Indicator.
This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus0 is operating as a transmitter.
0: SMBus0 in Receiver Mode.
1: SMBus0 in Transmitter Mode.
5
STA
SMBus0 Start Flag.
When reading STA, a 1 indicates that a start or repeated start condition was detected on
the bus.
Writing a 1 to the STA bit initiates a start or repeated start on the bus.
4
STO
SMBus0 Stop Flag.
When reading STO, a 1 indicates that a stop condition was detected on the bus (in slave
mode) or is pending (in master mode).
When acting as a master, writing a 1 to the STO bit initiates a stop condition on the bus.
This bit is cleared by hardware.
3
ACKRQ
SMBus0 Acknowledge Request.
0: No ACK requested.
1: ACK requested.
2
ARBLOST
SMBus0 Arbitration Lost Indicator.
0: No arbitration error.
1: Arbitration error occurred.
1
ACK
SMBus0 Acknowledge.
When read as a master, the ACK bit indicates whether an ACK (1) or NACK (0) is
received during the most recent byte transfer.
As a slave, this bit should be written to send an ACK (1) or NACK (0) to a master
request. Note that the logic level of the ACK bit on the SMBus interface is inverted from
the logic of the register ACK bit.
254
Rev. 1.0
Table 24.9. SMB0CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
SI
Function
SMBus0 Interrupt Flag.
This bit is set by hardware to indicate that the current SMBus0 state machine operation
(such as writing a data or address byte) is complete. While SI is set, SCL0 is held low
and SMBus0 is stalled. SI0 must be cleared by software. Clearing SI0 initiates the next
SMBus0 state machine operation.
Rev. 1.0
255
Register 24.4. SMB0ADR: SMBus0 Slave Address
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SLV
GC
Type
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xD7
Table 24.10. SMB0ADR Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:1
SLV
Function
SMBus Hardware Slave Address.
Defines the SMBus0 Slave Address(es) for automatic hardware acknowledgement. Only
address bits which have a 1 in the corresponding bit position in SLVM are checked
against the incoming address. This allows multiple addresses to be recognized.
0
GC
General Call Address Enable.
When hardware address recognition is enabled (EHACK = 1), this bit will determine
whether the General Call Address (0x00) is also recognized by hardware.
0: General Call Address is ignored.
1: General Call Address is recognized.
256
Rev. 1.0
Register 24.5. SMB0ADM: SMBus0 Slave Address Mask
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SLVM
EHACK
Type
RW
RW
Reset
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
SFR Address: 0xD6
Table 24.11. SMB0ADM Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:1
SLVM
Function
SMBus0 Slave Address Mask.
Defines which bits of register SMB0ADR are compared with an incoming address byte,
and which bits are ignored. Any bit set to 1 in SLVM enables comparisons with the corresponding bit in SLV. Bits set to 0 are ignored (can be either 0 or 1 in the incoming
address).
0
EHACK
Hardware Acknowledge Enable.
Enables hardware acknowledgement of slave address and received data bytes.
0: Firmware must manually acknowledge all incoming address and data bytes.
1: Automatic slave address recognition and hardware acknowledge is enabled.
Rev. 1.0
257
Register 24.6. SMB0DAT: SMBus0 Data
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
SMB0DAT
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC2
Table 24.12. SMB0DAT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
SMB0DAT
Function
SMBus0 Data.
The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus0 serial
interface or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus0 serial interface. The CPU
can safely read from or write to this register whenever the SI serial interrupt flag is set to
logic 1. The serial data in the register remains stable as long as the SI flag is set. When
the SI flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data in/out and the
CPU should not attempt to access this register.
258
Rev. 1.0
25. Timers (Timer0, Timer1, Timer2 and Timer3)
Each MCU in the C8051F85x/86x family includes four counter/timers: two are 16-bit counter/timers
compatible with those found in the standard 8051, and two are 16-bit auto-reload timers for timing
peripherals or for general purpose use. These timers can be used to measure time intervals, count
external events and generate periodic interrupt requests. Timer 0 and Timer 1 are nearly identical and
have four primary modes of operation. Timer 2 and Timer 3 are also identical and offer both 16-bit and split
8-bit timer functionality with auto-reload capabilities. Timer 2 and Timer 3 both offer a capture function, but
are different in their system-level connections. Timer 2 is capable of performing a capture function on an
external signal input routed through the crossbar, while the Timer 3 capture is dedicated to the lowfrequency oscillator output. Table 25.1 summarizes the modes available to each timer.
Table 25.1. Timer Modes
Timer 0 and Timer 1 Modes
Timer 2 Modes
Timer 3 Modes
13-bit counter/timer
16-bit timer with auto-reload
16-bit timer with auto-reload
16-bit counter/timer
Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload
Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload
8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload
Input pin capture
Low-frequency oscillator capture
Two 8-bit counter/timers
(Timer 0 only)
Timers 0 and 1 may be clocked by one of five sources, determined by the Timer Mode Select bits (T1M–
T0M) and the Clock Scale bits (SCA1–SCA0). The Clock Scale bits define a pre-scaled clock from which
Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 may be clocked.
Timer 0/1 may then be configured to use this pre-scaled clock signal or the system clock. Timer 2 and
Timer 3 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator
clock source divided by 8.
Timer 0 and Timer 1 may also be operated as counters. When functioning as a counter, a counter/timer
register is incremented on each high-to-low transition at the selected input pin (T0 or T1). Events with a
frequency of up to one-fourth the system clock frequency can be counted. The input signal need not be
periodic, but it must be held at a given level for at least two full system clock cycles to ensure the level is
properly sampled.
All four timers are capable of clocking other peripherals and triggering events in the system. The individual
peripherals select which timer to use for their respective functions. Table 25.2 summarizes the peripheral
connections for each timer. Note that the Timer 2 and Timer 3 high overflows apply to the full timer when
operating in 16-bit mode or the high-byte timer when operating in 8-bit split mode.
Table 25.2. Timer Peripheral Clocking / Event Triggering
Function
T0
Overflow
UART0 Baud Rate
SMBus0 Clock Rate
T1
Overflow
T2 High
Overflow
T2 Low
Overflow
X
X
T3 Low
Overflow
X
X
X
SMBus0 SCL Low Timeout
PCA0 Clock
T3 High
Overflow
X
X
Rev. 1.0
259
Table 25.2. Timer Peripheral Clocking / Event Triggering
Function
ADC0 Conversion Start
T0
Overflow
T1
Overflow
T2 High
Overflow
T2 Low
Overflow
T3 High
Overflow
T3 Low
Overflow
X*
X*
X*
X*
X
*Note: The high-side overflow is used when the timer is in16-bit mode. The low-side overflow is used in 8-bit mode.
260
Rev. 1.0
25.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1
Timer 0 and Timer 1 are each implemented as a16-bit register accessed as two separate bytes: a low byte
(TL0 or TL1) and a high byte (TH0 or TH1). The Counter/Timer Control register (TCON) is used to enable
Timer 0 and Timer 1 as well as indicate status. Timer 0 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET0 bit in
the IE register. Timer 1 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET1 bit in the IE register. Both counter/
timers operate in one of four primary modes selected by setting the Mode Select bits T1M1–T0M0 in the
Counter/Timer Mode register (TMOD). Each timer can be configured independently for the operating
modes described below.
Rev. 1.0
261
25.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer
Timer 0 and Timer 1 operate as 13-bit counter/timers in Mode 0. The following describes the configuration
and operation of Timer 0. However, both timers operate identically, and Timer 1 is configured in the same
manner as described for Timer 0.
The TH0 register holds the eight MSBs of the 13-bit counter/timer. TL0 holds the five LSBs in bit positions
TL0.4–TL0.0. The three upper bits of TL0 (TL0.7–TL0.5) are indeterminate and should be masked out or
ignored when reading. As the 13-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0x1FFF (all ones) to
0x0000, the timer overflow flag TF0 in TCON is set and an interrupt will occur if Timer 0 interrupts are
enabled.
The CT0 bit in the TMOD register selects the counter/timer's clock source. When CT0 is set to logic 1,
high-to-low transitions at the selected Timer 0 input pin (T0) increment the timer register. Clearing CT
selects the clock defined by the T0M bit in register CKCON. When T0M is set, Timer 0 is clocked by the
system clock. When T0M is cleared, Timer 0 is clocked by the source selected by the Clock Scale bits in
CKCON.
Setting the TR0 bit enables the timer when either GATE0 in the TMOD register is logic 0 or the input signal
INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF. Setting GATE0 to 1 allows the timer to be
controlled by the external input signal INT0, facilitating pulse width measurements.
TR0
GATE0
INT0
Counter/Timer
0
X
X
Disabled
1
0
X
Enabled
1
1
0
Disabled
1
1
1
Enabled
Note: X = Don't Care
Setting TR0 does not force the timer to reset. The timer registers should be loaded with the desired initial
value before the timer is enabled.
TL1 and TH1 form the 13-bit register for Timer 1 in the same manner as described above for TL0 and TH0.
Timer 1 is configured and controlled using the relevant TCON and TMOD bits just as with Timer 0. The
input signal INT1 is used with Timer 1; the /INT1 polarity is defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF.
T0M
Pre-scaled Clock
0
SYSCLK
1
CT0
0
1
T0
TCLK
TR0
TL0
(5 bits)
GATE0
INT0
IN0PL
XOR
Figure 25.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram
262
Rev. 1.0
TH0
(8 bits)
TF0
(Interrupt Flag)
25.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer
Mode 1 operation is the same as Mode 0, except that the counter/timer registers use all 16 bits. The
counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 1 in the same manner as for Mode 0.
Rev. 1.0
263
25.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload
Mode 2 configures Timer 0 and Timer 1 to operate as 8-bit counter/timers with automatic reload of the start
value. TL0 holds the count and TH0 holds the reload value. When the counter in TL0 overflows from all
ones to 0x00, the timer overflow flag TF0 in the TCON register is set and the counter in TL0 is reloaded
from TH0. If Timer 0 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will occur when the TF0 flag is set. The reload
value in TH0 is not changed. TL0 must be initialized to the desired value before enabling the timer for the
first count to be correct. When in Mode 2, Timer 1 operates identically to Timer 0.
Both counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 2 in the same manner as Mode 0. Setting the
TR0 bit enables the timer when either GATE0 in the TMOD register is logic 0 or when the input signal INT0
is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF.
T0M
Pre-scaled Clock
CT0
0
0
SYSCLK
1
1
T0
TCLK
TR0
TL0
(8 bits)
TF0
(Interrupt Flag)
GATE0
IN0PL
INT0
TH0
(8 bits)
XOR
Figure 25.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram
264
Rev. 1.0
Reload
25.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)
In Mode 3, Timer 0 is configured as two separate 8-bit counter/timers held in TL0 and TH0. The counter/
timer in TL0 is controlled using the Timer 0 control/status bits in TCON and TMOD: TR0, CT0, GATE0 and
TF0. TL0 can use either the system clock or an external input signal as its timebase. The TH0 register is
restricted to a timer function sourced by the system clock or prescaled clock. TH0 is enabled using the
Timer 1 run control bit TR1. TH0 sets the Timer 1 overflow flag TF1 on overflow and thus controls the
Timer 1 interrupt.
Timer 1 is inactive in Mode 3. When Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be operated in Modes 0,
1 or 2, but cannot be clocked by external signals nor set the TF1 flag and generate an interrupt. However,
the Timer 1 overflow can be used to generate baud rates for the SMBus and/or UART, and/or initiate ADC
conversions. While Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 run control is handled through its mode
settings. To run Timer 1 while Timer 0 is in Mode 3, set the Timer 1 Mode as 0, 1, or 2. To disable Timer 1,
configure it for Mode 3.
T0M
CT0
Pre-scaled Clock
0
TH0
(8 bits)
TR1
SYSCLK
TF1
(Interrupt Flag)
1
0
1
T0
TCLK
TR0
TL0
(8 bits)
GATE0
IN0PL
INT0
TF0
(Interrupt Flag)
XOR
Figure 25.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram
Rev. 1.0
265
25.2. Timer 2 and Timer 3
Timer 2 and Timer 3 are functionally equivalent, with the only differences being the top-level connections to
other parts of the system, as detailed in Table 25.1 and Table 25.2.
The timers are 16 bits wide, formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMRnL (low byte) and TMRnH (high byte). Each
timer may operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode or (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TnSPLIT bit in
TMRnCN defines the timer operation mode.
The timers may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator
source divided by 8. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system
clock.
25.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload
When TnSPLIT is zero, the timer operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. In this mode, the timer may
be configured to clock from SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source
divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit
value in the timer reload registers (TMRnRLH and TMRnRLL) is loaded into the main timer count register
as shown in Figure 25.4, and the High Byte Overflow Flag (TFnH) is set. If the timer interrupts are enabled,
an interrupt will be generated on each timer overflow. Additionally, if the timer interrupts are enabled and
the TFnLEN bit is set, an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMRnL) overflow from
0xFF to 0x00.
TnXCLK
YSCLK / 12
TnML
TFnL
Overflow
0
0
TCLK / 8
SYSCLK
TRn
1
TCLK
TMRnL
TMRnH
TFnH
Overflow
1
TFnLEN
TMRnRLL TMRnRLH
Reload
Figure 25.4. 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram
266
Rev. 1.0
Inter
25.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload
When TnSPLIT is set, the timer operates as two 8-bit timers (TMRnH and TMRnL). Both 8-bit timers
operate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 25.5. TMRnRLL holds the reload value for TMRnL;
TMRnRLH holds the reload value for TMRnH. The TRn bit in TMRnCN handles the run control for TMRnH.
TMRnL is always running when configured for 8-bit auto-reload mode.
Each 8-bit timer may be configured to clock from SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external
oscillator clock source divided by 8. The Clock Select bits (TnMH and TnML in CKCON) select either
SYSCLK or the clock defined by the External Clock Select bit (TnXCLK in TMRnCN), as follows:
TnMH
TnXCLK
0
0
0
1
TMRnH Clock Source
TnML
TnXCLK
TMRnL Clock Source
SYSCLK / 12
0
0
SYSCLK / 12
1
External Clock / 8
0
1
External Clock / 8
X
SYSCLK
1
X
SYSCLK
The TFnH bit is set when TMRnH overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TFnL bit is set when TMRnL overflows
from 0xFF to 0x00. When timer interrupts are enabled, an interrupt is generated each time TMRnH
overflows. If timer interrupts are enabled and TFnLEN is set, an interrupt is generated each time either
TMRnL or TMRnH overflows. When TFnLEN is enabled, software must check the TFnH and TFnL flags to
determine the source of the timer interrupt. The TFnH and TFnL interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware
and must be manually cleared by software.
TnXCLK
TnMH
SYSCLK / 12
TMRnRLH
0
0
xternal Clock / 8
Reload
1
TCLK
TMRnH
TRn
TFnH
Overflow
Interrupt
1
SYSCLK
TMRnRLL
TnML
Reload
TFnLEN
1
TCLK
TMRnL
TFnL
Overflow
0
Figure 25.5. 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram
Rev. 1.0
267
25.2.3. Capture Mode
Capture mode allows an external input (Timer 2) or the low-frequency oscillator clock (Timer 3) to be
measured against the system clock or an external oscillator source. The timer can be clocked from the
system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator divided by 8, depending on the
TnML, and TnXCLK settings.
Setting TFnCEN to 1 enables Capture Mode. In this mode, TnSPLIT should be set to 0, as the full 16-bit
timer is used. Upon a falling edge of the input capture signal, the contents of the timer register
(TMRnH:TMRnL) are loaded into the reload registers (TMRnRLH:TMRnRLL) and the TFnH flag is set. By
recording the difference between two successive timer capture values, the period of the captured signal
can be determined with respect to the selected timer clock.
TnXCLK
TnML
SYSCLK / 12
0
0
External Clock / 8
SYSCLK
T2 Pin (Timer 2)
L-F Oscillator (Timer 3)
TCLK
TRn
1
TMRnL
TMRnH
Capture
1
TFnCEN
TMRnRLL TMRnRLH
Figure 25.6. Capture Mode Block Diagram
268
Rev. 1.0
TFnH
(Interrupt)
25.3. Timer Control Registers
Register 25.1. CKCON: Clock Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T3MH
T3ML
T2MH
T2ML
T1M
T0M
SCA
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x8E
Table 25.3. CKCON Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
T3MH
Function
Timer 3 High Byte Clock Select.
Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 3 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only).
0: Timer 3 high byte uses the clock defined by the T3XCLK bit in TMR3CN.
1: Timer 3 high byte uses the system clock.
6
T3ML
Timer 3 Low Byte Clock Select.
Selects the clock supplied to Timer 3. Selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer
in split 8-bit timer mode.
0: Timer 3 low byte uses the clock defined by the T3XCLK bit in TMR3CN.
1: Timer 3 low byte uses the system clock.
5
T2MH
Timer 2 High Byte Clock Select.
Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 2 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only).
0: Timer 2 high byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN.
1: Timer 2 high byte uses the system clock.
4
T2ML
Timer 2 Low Byte Clock Select.
Selects the clock supplied to Timer 2. If Timer 2 is configured in split 8-bit timer mode,
this bit selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer.
0: Timer 2 low byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN.
1: Timer 2 low byte uses the system clock.
3
T1M
Timer 1 Clock Select.
Selects the clock source supplied to Timer 1. Ignored when C/T1 is set to 1.
0: Timer 1 uses the clock defined by the prescale field, SCA.
1: Timer 1 uses the system clock.
2
T0M
Timer 0 Clock Select.
Selects the clock source supplied to Timer 0. Ignored when C/T0 is set to 1.
0: Counter/Timer 0 uses the clock defined by the prescale field, SCA.
1: Counter/Timer 0 uses the system clock.
Rev. 1.0
269
Table 25.3. CKCON Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
1:0
SCA
Function
Timer 0/1 Prescale Bits.
These bits control the Timer 0/1 Clock Prescaler:
00: System clock divided by 12
01: System clock divided by 4
10: System clock divided by 48
11: External clock divided by 8 (synchronized with the system clock)
270
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.2. TCON: Timer 0/1 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TF1
TR1
TF0
TR0
IE1
IT1
IE0
IT0
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x88 (bit-addressable)
Table 25.4. TCON Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
TF1
Function
Timer 1 Overflow Flag.
Set to 1 by hardware when Timer 1 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is
automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 1 interrupt service routine.
6
TR1
Timer 1 Run Control.
Timer 1 is enabled by setting this bit to 1.
5
TF0
Timer 0 Overflow Flag.
Set to 1 by hardware when Timer 0 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is
automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 0 interrupt service routine.
4
TR0
Timer 0 Run Control.
Timer 0 is enabled by setting this bit to 1.
3
IE1
External Interrupt 1.
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can
be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External
Interrupt 1 service routine in edge-triggered mode.
2
IT1
Interrupt 1 Type Select.
This bit selects whether the configured INT1 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. INT1
is configured active low or high by the IN1PL bit in register IT01CF.
0: INT1 is level triggered.
1: INT1 is edge triggered.
1
IE0
External Interrupt 0.
This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT0 is detected. It can
be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External
Interrupt 0 service routine in edge-triggered mode.
0
IT0
Interrupt 0 Type Select.
This bit selects whether the configured INT0 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. INT0
is configured active low or high by the IN0PL bit in register IT01CF.
0: INT0 is level triggered.
1: INT0 is edge triggered.
Rev. 1.0
271
Register 25.3. TMOD: Timer 0/1 Mode
Bit
7
6
Name
GATE1
CT1
Type
RW
RW
Reset
0
0
5
4
3
2
T1M
GATE0
CT0
T0M
RW
RW
RW
RW
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x89
Table 25.5. TMOD Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
GATE1
Function
Timer 1 Gate Control.
0: Timer 1 enabled when TR1 = 1 irrespective of INT1 logic level.
1: Timer 1 enabled only when TR1 = 1 and INT1 is active as defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF.
6
CT1
Counter/Timer 1 Select.
0: Timer Mode. Timer 1 increments on the clock defined by T1M in the CKCON register.
1: Counter Mode. Timer 1 increments on high-to-low transitions of an external pin (T1).
5:4
T1M
Timer 1 Mode Select.
These bits select the Timer 1 operation mode.
00: Mode 0, 13-bit Counter/Timer
01: Mode 1, 16-bit Counter/Timer
10: Mode 2, 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload
11: Mode 3, Timer 1 Inactive
3
GATE0
Timer 0 Gate Control.
0: Timer 0 enabled when TR0 = 1 irrespective of INT0 logic level.
1: Timer 0 enabled only when TR0 = 1 and INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF.
2
CT0
Counter/Timer 0 Select.
0: Timer Mode. Timer 0 increments on the clock defined by T0M in the CKCON register.
1: Counter Mode. Timer 0 increments on high-to-low transitions of an external pin (T0).
1:0
T0M
Timer 0 Mode Select.
These bits select the Timer 0 operation mode.
00: Mode 0, 13-bit Counter/Timer
01: Mode 1, 16-bit Counter/Timer
10: Mode 2, 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload
11: Mode 3, Two 8-bit Counter/Timers
272
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.4. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TL0
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x8A
Table 25.6. TL0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TL0
Function
Timer 0 Low Byte.
The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.
Rev. 1.0
273
Register 25.5. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TL1
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x8B
Table 25.7. TL1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TL1
Function
Timer 1 Low Byte.
The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
274
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.6. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TH0
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x8C
Table 25.8. TH0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TH0
Function
Timer 0 High Byte.
The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0.
Rev. 1.0
275
Register 25.7. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TH1
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x8D
Table 25.9. TH1 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TH1
Function
Timer 1 High Byte.
The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1.
276
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.8. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TF2H
TF2L
TF2LEN
TF2CEN
T2SPLIT
TR2
Reserved
T2XCLK
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xC8 (bit-addressable)
Table 25.10. TMR2CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
TF2H
Function
Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the Timer 2 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit
mode, this will occur when Timer 2 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 2
interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 2 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware.
6
TF2L
Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the Timer 2 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF2L will be
set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 2 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware.
5
TF2LEN
Timer 2 Low Byte Interrupt Enable.
When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 2 interrupts are also
enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 2 overflows.
4
TF2CEN
Timer 2 Capture Enable.
When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 2 Capture Mode. If TF2CEN is set and Timer 2
interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on a falling edge of the selected T2
input pin, and the current 16-bit timer value in TMR2H:TMR2L will be copied to
TMR2RLH:TMR2RLL.
3
T2SPLIT
Timer 2 Split Mode Enable.
When this bit is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload.
0: Timer 2 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode.
1: Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers.
2
TR2
Timer 2 Run Control.
Timer 2 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR2H
only; TMR2L is always enabled in split mode.
1
Reserved
Must write reset value.
Rev. 1.0
277
Table 25.10. TMR2CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
T2XCLK
Function
Timer 2 External Clock Select.
This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 2. If Timer 2 is in 8-bit mode, this bit
selects the external oscillator clock source for both timer bytes. However, the Timer 2
Clock Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select
between the external clock and the system clock for either timer.
0: Timer 2 clock is the system clock divided by 12.
1: Timer 2 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK).
278
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.9. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR2RLL
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xCA
Table 25.11. TMR2RLL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR2RLL
Function
Timer 2 Reload Low Byte.
When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR2RLL holds the reload value for
the low byte of Timer 2 (TMR2L). When operating in capture mode, TMR2RLL is the captured value of TMR2L.
Rev. 1.0
279
Register 25.10. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR2RLH
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xCB
Table 25.12. TMR2RLH Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR2RLH
Function
Timer 2 Reload High Byte.
When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR2RLH holds the reload value for
the high byte of Timer 2 (TMR2H). When oeprating in capture mode, TMR2RLH is the
captured value of TMR2H.
280
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.11. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR2L
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xCC
Table 25.13. TMR2L Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR2L
Function
Timer 2 Low Byte.
In 16-bit mode, the TMR2L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit
mode, TMR2L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value.
Rev. 1.0
281
Register 25.12. TMR2H: Timer 2 High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR2H
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0xCD
Table 25.14. TMR2H Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR2H
Function
Timer 2 High Byte.
In 16-bit mode, the TMR2H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8-bit
mode, TMR2H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value.
282
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.13. TMR3CN: Timer 3 Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TF3H
TF3L
TF3LEN
TF3CEN
T3SPLIT
TR3
Reserved
T3XCLK
Type
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
R
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x91
Table 25.15. TMR3CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
TF3H
Function
Timer 3 High Byte Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the Timer 3 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16-bit
mode, this will occur when Timer 3 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 3
interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 3 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware.
6
TF3L
Timer 3 Low Byte Overflow Flag.
Set by hardware when the Timer 3 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF3L will be
set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 3 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware.
5
TF3LEN
Timer 3 Low Byte Interrupt Enable.
When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 3 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 3 interrupts are also
enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 3 overflows.
4
TF3CEN
Timer 3 Capture Enable.
When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 3 Capture Mode. If TF3CEN is set and Timer 3
interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on a falling edge of the low-frequency oscillator output, and the current 16-bit timer value in TMR3H:TMR3L will be copied to TMR3RLH:TMR3RLL.
3
T3SPLIT
Timer 3 Split Mode Enable.
When this bit is set, Timer 3 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload.
0: Timer 3 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode.
1: Timer 3 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers.
2
TR3
Timer 3 Run Control.
Timer 3 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR3H
only; TMR3L is always enabled in split mode.
1
Reserved
Must write reset value.
Rev. 1.0
283
Table 25.15. TMR3CN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
T3XCLK
Function
Timer 3 External Clock Select.
This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 3. If Timer 3 is in 8-bit mode, this bit
selects the external oscillator clock source for both timer bytes. However, the Timer 3
Clock Select bits (T3MH and T3ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select
between the external clock and the system clock for either timer.
0: Timer 3 clock is the system clock divided by 12.
1: Timer 3 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK).
284
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.14. TMR3RLL: Timer 3 Reload Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR3RLL
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x92
Table 25.16. TMR3RLL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR3RLL
Function
Timer 3 Reload Low Byte.
When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR3RLL holds the reload value for
the low byte of Timer 3 (TMR3L). When operating in capture mode, TMR3RLL is the captured value of TMR3L.
Rev. 1.0
285
Register 25.15. TMR3RLH: Timer 3 Reload High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR3RLH
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x93
Table 25.17. TMR3RLH Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR3RLH
Function
Timer 3 Reload High Byte.
When operating in one of the auto-reload modes, TMR3RLH holds the reload value for
the high byte of Timer 3 (TMR3H). When oeprating in capture mode, TMR3RLH is the
captured value of TMR3H.
286
Rev. 1.0
Register 25.16. TMR3L: Timer 3 Low Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR3L
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x94
Table 25.18. TMR3L Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR3L
Function
Timer 3 Low Byte.
In 16-bit mode, the TMR3L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 3. In 8-bit
mode, TMR3L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value.
Rev. 1.0
287
Register 25.17. TMR3H: Timer 3 High Byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
TMR3H
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x95
Table 25.19. TMR3H Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
TMR3H
Function
Timer 3 High Byte.
In 16-bit mode, the TMR3H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 3. In 8-bit
mode, TMR3H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value.
288
Rev. 1.0
26. Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART0)
UART0 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART.
Enhanced baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details
in Section “26.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation” on page 289). Received data buffering allows UART0
to start reception of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data
byte.
UART0 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 0 (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer 0 (SBUF0).
The single SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Writes to SBUF0
always access the transmit register. Reads of SBUF0 always access the buffered receive register;
it is not possible to read data from the transmit register.
With UART0 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI is set in
SCON0), or a data byte has been received (RI is set in SCON0). The UART0 interrupt flags are not cleared
by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually by software, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive complete).
U A R T0
TI, R I
Interrupts
TB8
(9 th bit)
O utput Shift
R egister
Control /
C onfiguration
Baud R ate
G enerator
(Tim er 1)
TX
SB UF (8 LSBs)
TX C lk
R X C lk
Input Shift
R egister
R B8
(9 th bit)
RX
STAR T
D etection
Figure 26.1. UART0 Block Diagram
26.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation
The UART0 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by
TL1; the RX clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 26.2), which is not useraccessible. Both TX and RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates.
The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an
RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to
begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer state.
Rev. 1.0
289
Baud Rate Generator
(In Timer 1)
TL1
2
TX Clock
2
RX Clock
TH1
START
Detection
RX Timer
Figure 26.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic
Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload. The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that
overflows will occur at two times the desired UART baud rate frequency. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked
by one of six sources: SYSCLK, SYSCLK/4, SYSCLK/12, SYSCLK/48, the external oscillator clock/8, or
an external input T1. For any given Timer 1 overflow rate, the UART0 baud rate is determined by
Equation 26.1.
1
UartBaudRate = --- T1_Overflow_Rate
2
Equation 26.1. UART0 Baud Rate
Timer 1 overflow rate is selected as described in the Timer section. A quick reference for typical baud rates
and system clock frequencies is given in Table 26.1.
290
Rev. 1.0
26.2. Operational Modes
UART0 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is
selected by the S0MODE bit in register SCON.
26.2.1. 8-Bit UART
8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop
bit. Data are transmitted LSB first from the TX pin and received at the RX pin. On receive, the eight data
bits are stored in SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into RB8 in the SCON register.
Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI Transmit
Interrupt Flag is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can
begin any time after the REN Receive Enable bit is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is received, the data
byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: RI must be logic 0,
and if MCE is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data overrun, the first received
8 bits are latched into the SBUF0 receive register and the following overrun data bits are lost.
If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB8 and the
RI flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB8 will not be loaded and the RI flag will not be
set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI or RI is set.
MARK
SPACE
START
BIT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
STOP
BIT
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
Figure 26.3. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram
Rev. 1.0
291
26.2.2. 9-Bit UART
9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a
programmable ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the
value in TB8, which is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in
register PSW) for error detection, or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit
goes into RB8 and the stop bit is ignored.
Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI Transmit
Interrupt Flag is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can
begin any time after the REN Receive Enable bit is set to 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will
be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: (1) RI must be logic 0, and
(2) if MCE is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE is logic 0, the state of the ninth data bit is
unimportant). If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored
in RB8, and the RI flag is set to 1. If the above conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB8 will not be loaded
and the RI flag will not be set to 1. A UART0 interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI or RI is set to 1.
MARK
SPACE
START
BIT
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
BIT TIMES
BIT SAMPLING
Figure 26.4. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram
292
Rev. 1.0
D7
D8
STOP
BIT
26.3. Multiprocessor Communications
9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more
slave processors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or
more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte
in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0.
Setting the MCE bit of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is received, the
UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic 1 (RB8 = 1) signifying an address byte has been
received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received address with the slave's own
assigned 8-bit address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE bit to enable interrupts on the
reception of the following data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave their MCE bits set and do not
generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes, thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire
message is received, the addressed slave resets its MCE bit to ignore all transmissions until it receives the
next address byte.
Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple
slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master
processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the
master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master
and slave(s).
Master
Device
Slave
Device
Slave
Device
Slave
Device
V+
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
Figure 26.5. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram
Rev. 1.0
293
Table 26.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using the Internal 24.5 MHz Oscillator
Internal Osc.
SYSCLK from
Frequency: 49 MHz
Oscillator Timer Clock
Source
Divide
Factor
SCA1–SCA0
(pre-scale
select)1
T1M1
Timer 1
Reload
Value (hex)
SYSCLK
XX2
1
0xCB
212
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x96
0.15%
426
SYSCLK
XX
1
0x2B
28800
–0.32%
848
SYSCLK/4
01
0
0x96
14400
0.15%
1704
SYSCLK/12
00
0
0xB9
9600
–0.32%
2544
SYSCLK/12
00
0
0x96
2400
–0.32%
10176
SYSCLK/48
10
0
0x96
1200
0.15%
20448
SYSCLK/48
10
0
0x2B
Target
Baud Rate
(bps)
Baud Rate
% Error
230400
–0.32%
106
115200
–0.32%
57600
Notes:
1. SCA1–SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Timer1 chapter.
2. X = Don’t care.
294
Rev. 1.0
26.4. UART Control Registers
Register 26.1. SCON0: UART0 Serial Port Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
SMODE
Reserved
MCE
REN
TB8
RB8
TI
RI
Type
RW
R
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Reset
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x98 (bit-addressable)
Table 26.2. SCON0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7
SMODE
Function
Serial Port 0 Operation Mode.
Selects the UART0 Operation Mode.
0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate (Mode 0).
1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate (Mode 1).
6
Reserved
5
MCE
Must write reset value.
Multiprocessor Communication Enable.
This bit enables checking of the stop bit or the 9th bit in multi-drop communication buses.
The function of this bit is dependent on the UART0 operation mode selected by the
SMODE bit. In Mode 0 (8-bits), the peripheral will check that the stop bit is logic 1. In
Mode 1 (9-bits) the peripheral will check for a logic 1 on the 9th bit.
0: Ignore level of 9th bit / Stop bit.
1: RI is set and an interrupt is generated only when the stop bit is logic 1 (Mode 0) or
when the 9th bit is logic 1 (Mode 1).
4
REN
Receive Enable.
0: UART0 reception disabled.
1: UART0 reception enabled.
3
TB8
Ninth Transmission Bit.
The logic level of this bit will be sent as the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode
(Mode 1). Unused in 8-bit mode (Mode 0).
2
RB8
Ninth Receive Bit.
RB8 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th
data bit in Mode 1.
1
TI
Transmit Interrupt Flag.
Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in
8-bit UART Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the
UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software.
Rev. 1.0
295
Table 26.2. SCON0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
0
RI
Function
Receive Interrupt Flag.
Set to 1 by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (set at the STOP
bit sampling time). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to 1 causes the
CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually
by software.
296
Rev. 1.0
Register 26.2. SBUF0: UART0 Serial Port Data Buffer
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
SBUF0
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
SFR Address: 0x99
Table 26.3. SBUF0 Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
SBUF0
Function
Serial Data Buffer Bits.
This SFR accesses two registers: a transmit shift register and a receive latch register.
When data is written to SBUF0, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial
transmission. Writing a byte to SBUF0 initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF0
returns the contents of the receive latch.
Rev. 1.0
297
27. Watchdog Timer (WDT0)
The C8051F85x/86x family includes a programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) running off the lowfrequency oscillator. A WDT overflow will force the MCU into the reset state. To prevent the reset, the WDT
must be restarted by application software before overflow. If the system experiences a software or
hardware malfunction preventing the software from restarting the WDT, the WDT will overflow and cause a
reset.
Following a reset the WDT is automatically enabled and running with the default maximum time interval. If
desired the WDT can be disabled by system software or locked on to prevent accidental disabling. Once
locked, the WDT cannot be disabled until the next system reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by
this reset.
The WDT consists of an internal timer running from the low-frequency oscillator. The timer measures the
period between specific writes to its control register. If this period exceeds the programmed limit, a WDT
reset is generated. The WDT can be enabled and disabled as needed in software, or can be permanently
enabled if desired. When the WDT is active, the low-frequency oscillator is forced on. All watchdog
features are controlled via the Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCN).
Watchdog Timer
Lock and Key
Watchdog Timer
LFOSC0
Watchdog
Reset
Timeout Interval
Figure 27.1. Watchdog Timer Block Diagram
298
Rev. 1.0
27.1. Enabling / Resetting the WDT
The watchdog timer is both enabled and reset by writing 0xA5 to the WDTCN register. The user's
application software should include periodic writes of 0xA5 to WDTCN as needed to prevent a watchdog
timer overflow. The WDT is enabled and reset as a result of any system reset.
27.2. Disabling the WDT
Writing 0xDE followed by 0xAD to the WDTCN register disables the WDT. The following code segment
illustrates disabling the WDT:
CLR EA
MOV WDTCN,#0DEh
MOV WDTCN,#0ADh
SETB EA
; disable all interrupts
; disable software watchdog timer
; re-enable interrupts
The writes of 0xDE and 0xAD must occur within 4 clock cycles of each other, or the disable operation is
ignored. Interrupts should be disabled during this procedure to avoid delay between the two writes.
27.3. Disabling the WDT Lockout
Writing 0xFF to WDTCN locks out the disable feature. Once locked out, the disable operation is ignored
until the next system reset. Writing 0xFF does not enable or reset the watchdog timer. Applications always
intending to use the watchdog should write 0xFF to WDTCN in the initialization code.
27.4. Setting the WDT Interval
WDTCN.[2:0] controls the watchdog timeout interval. The interval is given by the following equation, where
Tlfosc is the low-frequency oscillator clock period:
T LFOSC 4 WDTCN[2:0] + 3
This provides a nominal interval range of 0.8 ms to 13.1 s. WDTCN.7 must be logic 0 when setting this
interval. Reading WDTCN returns the programmed interval. WDTCN.[2:0] reads 111b after a system reset.
Rev. 1.0
299
27.5. Watchdog Timer Control Registers
Register 27.1. WDTCN: Watchdog Timer Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
WDTCN
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
1
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
SFR Address: 0x97
Table 27.1. WDTCN Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
WDTCN
Function
WDT Control.
The WDT control field has different behavior for reads and writes.
Read:
When reading the WDTCN register, the lower three bits (WDTCN[2:0]) indicate the current timeout interval. Bit WDTCN.4 indicates whether the WDT is active (logic 1) or inactive (logic 0).
Write:
Writing the WDTCN register can set the timeout interval, enable the WDT, disable the
WDT, reset the WDT, or lock the WDT to prevent disabling.
Writing to WDTCN with the MSB (WDTCN.7) cleared to 0 will set the timeout interval to
the value in bits WDTCN[2:0].
Writing 0xA5 both enables and reloads the WDT.
Writing 0xDE followed within 4 system clocks by 0xAD disables the WDT.
Writing 0xFF locks out the disable feature until the next device reset.
300
Rev. 1.0
28. Revision-Specific Behavior
C8051F85x/86x Revision B devices have differences from Revision C devices:
Temperature
Sensor offset and slope
Flash endurance
Latch-up performance
Unique Identifier
28.1. Revision Identification
The Lot ID Code on the top side of the device package can be used for decoding device revision
information. Figure 28.1, Figure 28.2, and Figure 28.3 show how to find the Lot ID Code on the top side of
the device package.
Firmware can distinguish between a Revision B and Revision C device using the value of the REVID
register described in “Device Identification and Unique Identifier” on page 68.
e3
C8051F850
1342C00000
This character identifies the
device revision
Figure 28.1. QSOP-24 Package Revision Marking
Rev. 1.0
301
F850
C000
342+
This first character identifies
the device revision
Figure 28.2. QFN-20 Package Revision Marking
e3
C8051F860
1342C00000
This character identifies the
device revision
Figure 28.3. SOIC-16 Package Revision Marking
302
Rev. 1.0
28.2. Temperature Sensor Offset and Slope
The temperature sensor slope and offset characteristics of Revision B devices are different than the slope
and offset characteristics of Revision C devices. The differences are:
Table 28.1. Temperature Sensor Revision Differences
Parameter
Symbol
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Offset
VOFF
TA = 0 °C
—
713
—
mV
Slope
M
—
2.67
—
mV/°C
—
757
—
mV
—
2.85
—
mV/°C
Revision B
Revision C
Offset
VOFF
Slope
M
TA = 0 °C
Firmware that uses the slope and offset of the temperature sensor to calculate the temperature from the
sensor ADC reading can detect the revision of the device by reading the REVID register and adjust the
slope and offset calculations based on the result. A REVID value of 0x01 indicates a Revision B device,
and a REVID value of 0x02 indicates a Revision C device.
28.3. Flash Endurance
The flash endurance, or number of times the flash may be written and erased, on some Revision B devices
may be lower than expected. Table 1.4 specifies a minimum Endurance (Write/Erase Cycles) as 20000,
but some Revision B devices may support a minimum of ~5000 cycles.
28.4. Latch-Up Performance
Pulling the device pins below ground and drawing significant current (~3.5 mA) can cause a Power-On
Reset event with Revision B devices. Some pins, like P0.0 and P0.1, are more susceptible to this behavior
than others. This behavior is outside normal operating parameters and would typically be seen during
latch-up or ESD performance testing.
28.5. Unique Identifier
Revision B devices do not implement the unique identifier described in “Device Identification and Unique
Identifier” on page 68.
Rev. 1.0
303
29. C2 Interface
C8051F85x/86x devices include an on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow flash
programming and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application. The C2
interface uses a clock signal (C2CK) and a bi-directional C2 data signal (C2D) to transfer information
between the device and a host system. Details on the C2 protocol can be found in the C2 Interface
Specification.
29.1. C2 Pin Sharing
The C2 protocol allows the C2 pins to be shared with user functions so that in-system debugging and flash
programming may be performed. C2CK is shared with the RST pin, while the C2D signal is shared with a
port I/O pin. This is possible because C2 communication is typically performed when the device is in the
halt state, where all on-chip peripherals and user software are stalled. In this halted state, the C2 interface
can safely ‘borrow’ the C2CK and C2D pins. In most applications, external resistors are required to isolate
C2 interface traffic from the user application. A typical isolation configuration is shown in Figure 29.1.
C8051Fxxx
/Reset (a)
C2CK
Input (b)
C2D
Output (c)
C2 Interface Master
Figure 29.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing
The configuration in Figure 29.1 assumes the following:
1. The user input (b) cannot change state while the target device is halted.
2. The RST pin on the target device is used as an input only.
Additional resistors may be necessary depending on the specific application.
304
Rev. 1.0
29.2. C2 Interface Registers
The following describes the C2 registers necessary to perform flash programming through the C2
interface. All C2 registers are accessed through the C2 interface, and are not available in the SFR map for
firmware access.
Register 29.1. C2ADD: C2 Address
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
C2ADD
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
This register is part of the C2 protocol.
Table 29.1. C2ADD Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
C2ADD
Function
C2 Address.
The C2ADD register is accessed via the C2 interface. The value written to C2ADD
selects the target data register for C2 Data Read and Data Write commands.
0x00: C2DEVID
0x01: C2REVID
0x02: C2FPCTL
0xB4: C2FPDAT
Rev. 1.0
305
Register 29.2. C2DEVID: C2 Device ID
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
C2DEVID
Type
R
Reset
0
0
1
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
C2 Address: 0x00
Table 29.2. C2DEVID Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
C2DEVID
Function
Device ID.
This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x30 (C8051F85x/86x).
306
Rev. 1.0
Register 29.3. C2REVID: C2 Revision ID
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
C2REVID
Type
R
Reset
X
X
X
X
3
2
1
0
X
X
X
X
C2 Address: 0x01
Table 29.3. C2REVID Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
C2REVID
Function
Revision ID.
This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID. For example: 0x00 = Revision A,
0x01 = Revision B and 0x02 = Revision C.
Rev. 1.0
307
Register 29.4. C2FPCTL: C2 Flash Programming Control
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
C2FPCTL
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
C2 Address: 0x02
Table 29.4. C2FPCTL Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
C2FPCTL
Function
Flash Programming Control Register.
This register is used to enable flash programming via the C2 interface. To enable C2
flash programming, the following codes must be written in order: 0x02, 0x01. Note that
once C2 flash programming is enabled, a system reset must be issued to resume normal
operation.
308
Rev. 1.0
Register 29.5. C2FPDAT: C2 Flash Programming Data
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
C2FPDAT
Type
RW
Reset
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
C2 Address: 0xB4
Table 29.5. C2FPDAT Register Bit Descriptions
Bit
Name
7:0
C2FPDAT
Function
C2 Flash Programming Data Register.
This register is used to pass flash commands, addresses, and data during C2 flash
accesses. Valid commands are listed below.
0x03: Device Erase
0x06: Flash Block Read
0x07: Flash Block Write
0x08: Flash Page Erase
Rev. 1.0
309
DOCUMENT CHANGE LIST
Revision 0.5 to Revision 0.6
Updated front page block diagram.
Updated ADC supply current parameters in Table 1.2, “Power Consumption,” on page 8.
Corrected flash programming voltage range in "Table 1.4. Flash Memory" on page 11.
Added ADC Power-On Time specification in Table 1.7, “ADC,” on page 13.
Added section "1.2. Typical Performance Curves" on page 19.
Corrected DERIVID Information in Table 11.3, “DERIVID Register Bit Descriptions,” on page 70.
Updated ADC chapter ("14. Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0)" on page 85) and expanded section
"14.5. Power Considerations" on page 85 with recommended power configuration settings.
Updated Figure 21.1, “Port I/O Functional Block Diagram,” on page 184.
Corrected reset value in Register 24.5, “SMB0ADM: SMBus0 Slave Address Mask,” on page 257.
Corrected description of IE0 in "Table 25.4. TCON Register Bit Descriptions" on page 259.
Revision 0.6 to Revision 0.7
Added mention of the UID to the front page.
Updated some TBD values in the "1. Electrical Specifications" on page 8 section.
Updated Power-On Reset (POR) Threshold maximum Falling Voltage on VDD specification in Table 1.3.
Updated Reset Delay from non-POR source typical specification in Table 1.3.
Removed VDD Ramp Time maximum specification in Table 1.3.
Updated Flash Memory Erase Time specification and added Note 2 to Table 1.4.
Updated maximum ADC DC performance specifications in Table 1.7.
Updated minimum and maximum ADC offset error and slope error specifications in Table 1.7.
Updated conditions on Internal Fast Settling Reference Output Voltage (Full Temperature and Supply
Range) in Table 1.8.
Added a new section "1.2.3. Port I/O Output Drive" on page 21.
Updated pinout Figure 3.1, Figure 3.2, Figure 3.3, Table 3.1, Table 3.2, and Table 3.3 titles to the
correct part numbers.
Updated the Ordering Information ("4. Ordering Information" on page 42.) for Revision C devices.
Added mention of the unique identifier to "8. Memory Organization" on page 52.
Added unique identifier information to "11. Device Identification and Unique Identifier" on page 68.
Updated device part numbers listed in Table 11.3, “DERIVID Register Bit Descriptions,” on page 70 to
include the revision.
Added "28. Revision-Specific Behavior" on page 301.
Revision 0.7 to Revision 1.0
Updated Digital Core, ADC, and Temperature Sensor electrical specifications information for -I devices.
Updated -I part number information in "4. Ordering Information" on page 42.
Replaced reference to AMX0P and AMX0N with ADC0MX in Table 21.1, “Port I/O Assignment for
Analog Functions,” on page 186.
Added a note to Table 1.13, “Absolute Maximum Ratings,” on page 22 and added a link to the Quality
and Reliability Monitor Report.
Added Operating Junction Temperature to Table 1.13, “Absolute Maximum Ratings,” on page 22.
Updated all TBDs in "1. Electrical Specifications" on page 8.
310
Rev. 1.0
Simplicity Studio
One-click access to MCU and
wireless tools, documentation,
software, source code libraries &
more. Available for Windows,
Mac and Linux!
IoT Portfolio
www.silabs.com/IoT
SW/HW
Quality
Support and Community
www.silabs.com/simplicity
www.silabs.com/quality
community.silabs.com
Disclaimer
Silicon Laboratories intends to provide customers with the latest, accurate, and in-depth documentation of all peripherals and modules available for system and software implementers
using or intending to use the Silicon Laboratories products. Characterization data, available modules and peripherals, memory sizes and memory addresses refer to each specific
device, and "Typical" parameters provided can and do vary in different applications. Application examples described herein are for illustrative purposes only. Silicon Laboratories
reserves the right to make changes without further notice and limitation to product information, specifications, and descriptions herein, and does not give warranties as to the accuracy
or completeness of the included information. Silicon Laboratories shall have no liability for the consequences of use of the information supplied herein. This document does not imply
or express copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits. The products must not be used within any Life Support System without the specific
written consent of Silicon Laboratories. A "Life Support System" is any product or system intended to support or sustain life and/or health, which, if it fails, can be reasonably expected
to result in significant personal injury or death. Silicon Laboratories products are generally not intended for military applications. Silicon Laboratories products shall under no
circumstances be used in weapons of mass destruction including (but not limited to) nuclear, biological or chemical weapons, or missiles capable of delivering such weapons.
Trademark Information
Silicon Laboratories Inc., Silicon Laboratories, Silicon Labs, SiLabs and the Silicon Labs logo, CMEMS®, EFM, EFM32, EFR, Energy Micro, Energy Micro logo and combinations
thereof, "the world’s most energy friendly microcontrollers", Ember®, EZLink®, EZMac®, EZRadio®, EZRadioPRO®, DSPLL®, ISOmodem ®, Precision32®, ProSLIC®, SiPHY®,
USBXpress® and others are trademarks or registered trademarks of Silicon Laboratories Inc. ARM, CORTEX, Cortex-M3 and THUMB are trademarks or registered trademarks of
ARM Holdings. Keil is a registered trademark of ARM Limited. All other products or brand names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective holders.
Silicon Laboratories Inc.
400 West Cesar Chavez
Austin, TX 78701
USA
http://www.silabs.com